0% found this document useful (0 votes)

32 views704 pages

CFturbo en

Uploaded by

yazhen shi

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

32 views704 pages

CFturbo en

Uploaded by

yazhen shi

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 704

User manual for CFturbo software

This manual describes the usage of the software CFturbo

and corresponds to the online help with regards to content.

© CFturbo GmbH, 2024

All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the
written permission of the publisher.

Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the
respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks.

While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no
responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this
document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and
the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused
directly or indirectly by this document.
Contents 3

Table of Contents

Part I CFturbo 9

Part II What's new in CFturbo 12

Part III General 14

1 Installation
................................................................................................................................... 15
Silent Mode
........................................................................................................................... 19
2 Licensing
................................................................................................................................... 20
Node-locked license setup
........................................................................................................................... 22
Floating license setup
........................................................................................................................... 25
License
....................................................................................................................
server setup 26
Client
....................................................................................................................
setup 31
Cloud license setup
........................................................................................................................... 33
Show license information
........................................................................................................................... 34
Troubleshooting
........................................................................................................................... 35
3 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
mode 37
4 Batch
...................................................................................................................................
mode 37
Example
........................................................................................................................... 42
Exit...........................................................................................................................
Codes 43
5 Project
...................................................................................................................................
structure 43
Add...........................................................................................................................
component 46
Import
....................................................................................................................
geometry 50
Native.............................................................................................................
format 50
RTZT.............................................................................................................
format 51
Reverse .............................................................................................................
Engineering 53
Geometric coupling
........................................................................................................................... 67
Automatic calculations
........................................................................................................................... 69
6 Drag
...................................................................................................................................
& Drop 71
7 Windows
...................................................................................................................................
Explorer integration 72
8 Logging
................................................................................................................................... 75
9 Troubleshooting
................................................................................................................................... 75
Error reporting
........................................................................................................................... 76
Emergency recovery
........................................................................................................................... 79
Known problems
........................................................................................................................... 80
Part IV Getting started 82
1 Start
................................................................................................................................... 83
2 Opened
...................................................................................................................................
project 85
3 Component
...................................................................................................................................
design process 87
4 Component
...................................................................................................................................
handling 89
5 Remove
...................................................................................................................................
design steps 91

6 Handling
................................................................................................................................... 92
General handling
........................................................................................................................... 93
Graphical dialogs
........................................................................................................................... 94
Progression dialog
........................................................................................................................... 96
Polyline to Bezier
........................................................................................................................... 97
Edit...........................................................................................................................
fields with empirical functions 98
Part V Menu 100
1 File
................................................................................................................................... 102
Create new design
........................................................................................................................... 102
Stage
....................................................................................................................
designer 104
Open/ Save design
........................................................................................................................... 105
2 PROJECT
................................................................................................................................... 106
General
........................................................................................................................... 106
Project
....................................................................................................................
information 106
Global
....................................................................................................................
setup 108
Performance
....................................................................................................................
prediction 115
Euler .............................................................................................................
based 119
Casey/Robinson
............................................................................................................. 124
Undo
.................................................................................................................... 125
Additional
........................................................................................................................... 126
Export
.................................................................................................................... 127
Remarks
............................................................................................................. 132
Basic ............................................................................................................. 133
STL ...................................................................................................................................... 136
Tetrahedral
......................................................................................................................................
volume mesh 137
CAD,
.............................................................................................................
CAM 138
Ansys BladeGen
......................................................................................................................................
(Ansys) 141
Ansys SpaceClaim
......................................................................................................................................
(Ansys) 142
Know n issues
......................................................................................................................................
in Spaceclaim 146
AutoCAD ......................................................................................................................................
(Autodesk) 149
CATIA (Dassault
......................................................................................................................................
Systèmes) 156
Creo Parametric
......................................................................................................................................
(PTC) 157
Inventor ......................................................................................................................................
(Autodesk) 173
CFD,
.............................................................................................................
FEA 176
Ansys ICEM-CFD
...................................................................................................................................... 181
Ansys Meshing
...................................................................................................................................... 183
Ansys TurboGrid
...................................................................................................................................... 184
Fidelity AutoGrid
...................................................................................................................................... 186
Simerics...................................................................................................................................... 189
TCFD ...................................................................................................................................... 198
Batch
....................................................................................................................
mode/ Optimization 199
CFturbo
....................................................................................................................
BLADERUNNER 204
Reference
....................................................................................................................
components 204
Model
....................................................................................................................
finishing 208
3 SETTINGS
................................................................................................................................... 209
Licensing
........................................................................................................................... 209
Preferences
........................................................................................................................... 209
General
.................................................................................................................... 210
Units
.................................................................................................................... 214
Basic .............................................................................................................
units 215
Specific
.............................................................................................................
speed 217

Other .............................................................................................................
units 219
Impeller/
....................................................................................................................
Stator 220
Progression
.............................................................................................................
diagrams 221
Initial
.............................................................................................................
default settings 222
Warning
.............................................................................................................
level 224
Approximation functions
........................................................................................................................... 226
Fluids
........................................................................................................................... 229
CoolProp
....................................................................................................................
library 235
REFPROP
....................................................................................................................
library 239
Gas....................................................................................................................
mixtures 242
Profiles
........................................................................................................................... 244
4 HELP
................................................................................................................................... 250
Check for Updates
........................................................................................................................... 250
5 Component
................................................................................................................................... 251
6 3D
...................................................................................................................................
View 252
7 Report
...................................................................................................................................
View 253

Part VI Views 254

1 Meridian
................................................................................................................................... 256
2 3D
...................................................................................................................................
Model 259
Model display (top)
........................................................................................................................... 261
Model tree (left)
........................................................................................................................... 268
Problems when generating the 3D model
........................................................................................................................... 272
3 Report
................................................................................................................................... 274

Part VII Impeller 276

1 Main
...................................................................................................................................
dimensions 278
Centrifugal, Mixed-flow Pump/ Fan
........................................................................................................................... 280
Setup
.................................................................................................................... 281
Parameters
.................................................................................................................... 284
Dimensions
.................................................................................................................... 291
Axial Pump / Fan
........................................................................................................................... 300
Setup
.................................................................................................................... 301
Parameters
....................................................................................................................
Pump 304
Inducer
............................................................................................................. 309
Parameters
....................................................................................................................
Fan 311
Dimensions
.................................................................................................................... 318
Centrifugal Compressor
........................................................................................................................... 325
Setup
.................................................................................................................... 327
Parameters
.................................................................................................................... 330
Dimensions
.................................................................................................................... 337
Radial-inflow Gas Turbine
........................................................................................................................... 345
Setup
.................................................................................................................... 347
Parameters
.................................................................................................................... 350
Dimensions
.................................................................................................................... 356
Axial Gas Turbine / Compressor
........................................................................................................................... 364
Setup
.................................................................................................................... 366
Parameters
....................................................................................................................
Gas Turbine 369
Parameters
....................................................................................................................
Compressor 375
Dimensions
.................................................................................................................... 380
Francis Turbine
........................................................................................................................... 386

Setup
.................................................................................................................... 388
Parameters
.................................................................................................................... 390
Dimensions
.................................................................................................................... 395
Kaplan Turbine
........................................................................................................................... 402
Setup
.................................................................................................................... 403
Parameters
.................................................................................................................... 405
Dimensions
.................................................................................................................... 410
Material density
........................................................................................................................... 415
Multi stage
........................................................................................................................... 416
Shaft/Hub
........................................................................................................................... 418
Cordier
........................................................................................................................... 418
Balje
........................................................................................................................... 419
2 Meridional
...................................................................................................................................
contour 423
Primary flow path
........................................................................................................................... 427
Hub,
....................................................................................................................
Shroud 429
Bezier............................................................................................................. 431
Circular
.............................................................................................................
Arc + Straight line 435
Contour
............................................................................................................. 438
Leading,
....................................................................................................................
Trailing edge 439
Meridional
....................................................................................................................
flow calculation 441
Hub/Shroud materials
........................................................................................................................... 445
Bezier
....................................................................................................................
curve 448
Line
....................................................................................................................
segment curve 449
Secondary flow path
........................................................................................................................... 449
Additional views
........................................................................................................................... 451
3 Mean
...................................................................................................................................
line design 453
Blade properties
........................................................................................................................... 453
Blade
....................................................................................................................
setup 459
Ruled .............................................................................................................
Surface blade 471
Radial.............................................................................................................
element blade 474
Compound
.............................................................................................................
blade shapes 475
Spans
.................................................................................................................... 476
cu,....................................................................................................................
cm 476
Radial.............................................................................................................
equilibrium 478
Blade
....................................................................................................................
angles 479
Inlet.............................................................................................................
triangle 483
Outlet.............................................................................................................
triangle 485
Slip coefficient
......................................................................................................................................
by GÜLICH/ WIESNER 489
Slip coefficient
......................................................................................................................................
by AUNGIER/ WIESNER 490
Slip coefficient
......................................................................................................................................
by PFLEIDERER 491
Slip coefficient
......................................................................................................................................
by VON BACKSTROEM 492
Specific ......................................................................................................................................
slip coefficient definitions 493
Calculation
......................................................................................................................................
details 494
Blade mean lines
........................................................................................................................... 495
Design
....................................................................................................................
mode 502
t, m.............................................................................................................
Conformal mapping 503
Blade
.............................................................................................................
angle 506
B' Blade
.............................................................................................................
loading 507
z, T.............................................................................................................
Peripheral projection 510
Fixed ............................................................................................................. 510
Additional
....................................................................................................................
views 511
Informational
.............................................................................................................
values 514
Sine rule...................................................................................................................................... 516
t, m.............................................................................................................
conformal mapping 517

Blade .............................................................................................................
angles 518
Blade .............................................................................................................
lean angle 519
Strike.............................................................................................................
velocity 521
Blade .............................................................................................................
surface values 522
Blade-to-blade
.............................................................................................................
flow 2D 528
Blade-to-blade
.............................................................................................................
flow 1D 532
Blade profiles
........................................................................................................................... 533
Additional
....................................................................................................................
views 538
Blade edges
........................................................................................................................... 541
Additional
....................................................................................................................
views 548
Edge
....................................................................................................................
position 550
4 Airfoil/
...................................................................................................................................
Hydrofoil design 552
Blade properties
........................................................................................................................... 552
Spans
.................................................................................................................... 558
cu,....................................................................................................................
cm 559
Radial.............................................................................................................
equilibrium 561
Blade
....................................................................................................................
profiles 562
Kinematics
.................................................................................................................... 567
Blade .............................................................................................................
element momentum method 570
Lieblein
.............................................................................................................
method 572
Simple.............................................................................................................
method 574
Blade profile
........................................................................................................................... 574
Blade sweep
........................................................................................................................... 577
5 CFD
...................................................................................................................................
setup 580
Virtual geometry
........................................................................................................................... 582
Extension
.................................................................................................................... 585
RSI....................................................................................................................
connection 587
6 Model
...................................................................................................................................
settings 588
7 Model
...................................................................................................................................
finishing 590
Trimming
........................................................................................................................... 596
Part VIII Stator 601
1 Main
...................................................................................................................................
dimensions 603
Extent
........................................................................................................................... 606
Inlet
........................................................................................................................... 609
Outlet
........................................................................................................................... 609
2 Meridional
...................................................................................................................................
contour 610
3 Blade
...................................................................................................................................
properties 611
Number of blades
........................................................................................................................... 612
4 Blade
...................................................................................................................................
mean lines 613
5 Blade
...................................................................................................................................
profiles 616
6 Blade
...................................................................................................................................
edges 617
7 CFD
...................................................................................................................................
setup 617
8 Model
...................................................................................................................................
settings 618
9 Model
...................................................................................................................................
finishing 618

Part IX Volute 619

1 Setup
...................................................................................................................................
+ Inlet 620

Setup
........................................................................................................................... 621
Inlet details
........................................................................................................................... 626
2 Cross
...................................................................................................................................
Section 628
Bezier cross section
........................................................................................................................... 632
Line Segments cross section
........................................................................................................................... 633
Radius based cross section
........................................................................................................................... 637
Internal cross sections
........................................................................................................................... 638
3 Spiral
...................................................................................................................................
development areas 638
Design rule
........................................................................................................................... 641
Cut-water compensation
........................................................................................................................... 644
Circular arc approximation
........................................................................................................................... 644
Double Volute
........................................................................................................................... 646
Additional views
........................................................................................................................... 650
4 Diffuser
................................................................................................................................... 652
Additional views
........................................................................................................................... 659
5 Cut-water
................................................................................................................................... 661
Simple
........................................................................................................................... 665
Fillet
........................................................................................................................... 667
Sharp
........................................................................................................................... 670
Additional views
........................................................................................................................... 671
6 Wall
...................................................................................................................................
thickness 673
7 CFD
...................................................................................................................................
setup 677
8 Model
...................................................................................................................................
settings 678

Part X Appendix 680

1 References
................................................................................................................................... 681
2 Symbols
................................................................................................................................... 685
3 Contact
...................................................................................................................................
addresses 688
4 License
...................................................................................................................................
agreement 688
5 External
...................................................................................................................................
Libraries 696

Index 697

I
10 CFturbo

1 CFturbo

CFturbo is made to interactively design

centrifugal, mixed-flow and axial
turbomachinery: pumps, fans,
compressors, turbines. The software is
easy to use and does enable quick
generation and variation of impeller, stator
and volute geometries. Several models can
be displayed, compared and modified
simultaneously.

It contains numerous approximation

functions that may be customized by the
user in order to implement user specific
knowledge into the CFturbo-based design
process. In spite of the creation of
semiautomatic proposals, fundamental
experiences in turbomachinery design are
helpful but not necessary. An experienced
turbomachinery design engineer should be
able to design new high-quality machines
more easily and quickly.

CFturbo runs under the 64 bit Windows versions currently supported by Microsoft. Currently these
are Windows 10 and Windows 11.
Hardware requirement is a modern office PC.

The software user interface is in English language, whereas the manual is available in German and
English.

Integration of geometry data into the CAE environment is easily possible by direct interfaces to
various CAD- and CFD-systems.

Please read the License agreement 688 before using the program.
Information about activating license you can read in chapter Licensing 20 .

Contact persons you can find under Contact addresses 688 , actual information on the CFturbo
website.
Copyright © CFturbo GmbH

II
What's new in CFturbo 13

2 What's new in CFturbo

Information about news in the current and previous versions is available on the CFturbo website:

https://cfturbo.com/software/release-notes

III
General 15

3 General
This chapter contains some general program information about

¢ Installation 15

¢ Licensing 20

¢ Interactive mode 37

¢ Batch mode 37

¢ Project structure 43

¢ Drag & Drop 71

¢ Windows Explorer integration 72

¢ Logging 75

¢ Troubleshooting 75

3.1 Installation

PLEASE NOTE:

· Administrator rights are required for the installation.

· CFturbo runs on Windows 10 and 11 on computers with x64 processor.

· Microsoft .Net Framework 4.0 or higher is required for running CFturbo.

More information can be found on http://www.microsoft.com/net.

(1) Download

https://cfturbo.com/software/download

Download is possible for authorized users only.

Registered users can change their password.

Registration is required to get download access.

Available downloads after login:

· CFturbo*_setup.exe CFturbo client setup (64 Bit)

· CFturboLicenseServer*_setup. CFturbo License server setup (for customers only)
exe

(2) Installation

Start the installation program

CFturbo*_setup.exe.

Uninstall existing version optionally.

Accept the license agreement.

Accept or select the destination directory.

If the directory already exists, the existing

installation can be overwritten .

CFturbo Ansys Workbench Extension can be

installed optionally.

The extension is installed into all existing

Ansys installations from version 19.0. Of
course, the extension can be installed later
manually.

More information about the CFturbo Ansys

Workbench Extension is available here:
https://cfturbo.com/software/interfaces-
workflows/extension-for-ansys-workbench

Accept or modify the start menu name.

The installation takes about 20 seconds

normally.

Short licensing information (see licensing 20 ).

Setup is completed.

(3) Licensing

After successful installation of the software CFturbo the licensing 20 must be performed.

3.1.1 Silent Mode

In some cases, you may need to install CFturbo in silent mode, so the installation is performed
automatically without any user interaction.

For example, you install CFturbo in silent mode if you need to automate the installation procedure or
deploy the application on multiple computers on your network.

You can install CFturbo in silent mode via specific command-line arguments.

Accept the terms of use

By installing CFturbo in silent mode, you confirm that you consent to all license terms and
conditions.

Unattended installation

On the target computer, run the installation using the following command-line arguments:
<path_to_installation_package>\<CFturbo_installer_executable> /SILENT /
VERYSILENT /SUPPRESSMSGBOXES

The setup will install CFturbo without user interaction.

Note: Administrator permissions are required to run the installation!

Unattended uninstallation

On the target computer, run the uninstall process using the following command-line arguments:
<path_to_installed_application>\uninstall.exe /SILENT /VERYSILENT /SUPP
RESSMSGBOXES

The setup will uninstall CFturbo without user interaction.

As the uninstallation doesn't prompt for the removal of the settings, an additional switch
<path_to_installed_application>\uninstall.exe /SILENT /VERYSILENT /SUPP
RESSMSGBOXES /REMOVESETTINGS

can be added to remove the application settings during the uninstall process.

Note: Administrator permissions are required to run the uninstallation!

3.2 Licensing

SETTINGS | General | Licensing

CFturbo can be used without a valid license in viewer mode. This mode allows to open project files
independent of the included components for reading access. No changes can be done in viewer
mode.

For modifying projects with CFturbo a valid license is necessary. Does a project include multiple
components, only that ones can be modified, a valid license is present for.
A special feature of the CFturbo license model are stators. With every license for volute or impeller it
is possible to create and modify vaneless stators.

CFturbo uses the Reprise License Manager (RLM).

In principle, 3 alternative types of licensing are available:

· Node-locked license 22

· Floating license 25

· Cloud license 33

Menu item Licensing enables license handling.

REQUEST 22 new node-locked

license by e-mail

SHOW 34 current license

information

License expiration

If the license of a software module has expired, it can be reactivated by replacing the license with a
new one.

A hint with remaining days appears on startup screen 20 days before expiration of the license. The
number of days for this hint can be specified in SETTINGS | Preferences | General 210 .

Steps for licensing

At the first start of CFturbo there is no running license

available. For using the viewer mode, no further steps
are necessary.
If projects are to be modified, one of the following
actions must be performed:

a) A node-locked license 22 has to be requested

and installed

b) CFturbo has to be configured for using a floating

license 25 in place.

c) A cloud license 33 has to be installed

In general all licensing steps can be performed using remote desktop connection (RDP). But keep in
mind that finally a Node-locked license can be used directly on this computer only and not via a RDP
session. For this purpose, a Floating license is required.

3.2.1 Node-locked license setup

For using CFturbo with a node-locked license 2 steps have to be performed:

1) Requesting a license using the CFturbo license dialog

2) Storing the received license file in the CFturbo installation directory

Note: If CFturbo is configured for using a floating license 25 , modules get checked out from that
license first if available.

Requesting a node-locked license

If not either a node-locked license file is present or a floating license is configured, CFturbo will start
the licensing dialog (SETTINGS | General | Licensing).

Here you can select REQUEST new node-locked license by E-mail.

Under Modules the CFturbo modules must get selected for which a license should be requested. Fill
the Company field with the requesting company's name.

The Start date of the requested license can be selected for e.g. sync a short time-period license to
a project's start date.

The so-called Machine ID and the Checksum are calculated automatically and ensure the singular
usage of provided license information as well as to link the license to the local computer.

After input of all necessary information you can

· use the Create E-Mail button to prepare a message with the computer's default mail client
(the mail will NOT be sent automatically!)

· use the Copy to Clipboard button if you want to create the mail manually and paste the
information (send the mail to [email protected]).

Install license file

The license file you receive must be stored in the CFturbo installation directory (C:\Program
Files\CFturbo *) you have chosen during the setup. It already has .lic as file extension, this
extension must be preserved!

There should be only one license file (*.lic) present in this directory.

Afterwards you can restart CFturbo and check the license information 34 .

3.2.2 Floating license setup

Selecting the license server machine

Network (floating) licensing requires a CFturbo license server software running on a server machine.
The license server controls access of the clients to the CFturbo licenses.

The server machine should have the following properties:

· The operating system of the server machine has to be Microsoft Windows ® .

It's highly recommended to use a server system (Windows Server 20xx).
· The server machine must be accessible from the CFturbo clients.
Normally, server machine and CFturbo clients have to be located in the same local area
network (LAN).
Usage of the floating licenses across locations (WAN) is allowed with the corresponding
license agreement only.
· The server machine should be highly available, have high-speed Ethernet connection and a
moderate level of network traffic.
· All license related files must be located on a local computer disk of the server machine.

· The server machine must have a static IP address.

· Make sure that the time and date of the server machine is correct. Do not manipulate these
settings manually.

If the recommendations are not followed, corresponding warnings are displayed during the installation
and have to be explicitly confirmed by the user.

License server on Virtual Machines

The CFturbo license server software can be installed and used on a Virtual Machine. Even if the most
well-known suppliers (e.g. VMware) are supported, the license handling is not tested and certified on
all Virtual Machine environments. Problems related to the use of virtual servers cannot be resolved
by the CFturbo support and should be reported to the Virtual Machine supplier.

Note, that using Virtual Machines to duplicate the available CFturbo licenses is explicitly prohibited.

Steps for network licensing

For using CFturbo with a floating license the following steps have to be performed:

1. Setting up the CFturbo license server 26

2. Requesting a license using the Request Generator 29

3. Storing the received license file in the CFturbo license server installation directory 26

4. Configuring the clients for accessing the floating license 31

3.2.2.1 License server setup

Installing the license server

The CFturbo license server is installed by a setup separate from the CFturbo program. It includes the
following components:

· Server files

· Windows Service "Reprise LM for CFturbo"

· Request Generator

· This manual

The license server will be installed as a Windows Service which is automatically started on system
boot.

After starting the setup, selecting installation directory and start menu settings, the server
parameters can be configured:

Allow autodiscovery of server enable the clients to find the license server automatically within the
same network broadcast subnet.

The RepriseLM server has a built in web server. When Start web server is selected, the installed
Windows service will also run a web server on the port configured here.

Note, that the setup is not checking for port conflicts, the port must be available. It can be changed
e.g. by uninstalling and installing the server again. See "Port configuration" below.

The last wizard page offers to Create a license request. This option will start the Request
Generator (see below).

The Windows Start menu contains the following items after installation:

· CFturbo Website open CFturbo website in a webbrowser

· Create License Request start the Request Generator, see below

· Display Server Logfile display the server log file

· Restart License Server restart the CFturbo license server

· RLM End User Manual open Reprise License Manager (RLM) License Administration
Manual in a webbrowser

· Run License Server display detailed license server diagnostic information; required for
Diagnostics support requests

· Start License Server start the CFturbo license server

· Stop License Server stop the CFturbo license server

Please note: License server handling (Start, Stop, Restart) requires administrator rights. "Run as
administrator" in the context menu of the corresponding Start menu item has to be used.

Requesting a floating license

The Request Generator collects all information needed for the license request.

Under Modules the CFturbo modules must get selected for which a license should be requested. Fill
the Company field with the requesting company's name.

The Start date of the requested license can be selected for e.g. sync a short time-period license to
a project's start date.

The so-called Machine ID and the Checksum are calculated automatically and ensure the singular
usage of provided license information as well as to link the license to the network server.

The Concurrent users setting enables you to change to number of users you request the license
for.

After input of all necessary information you can

· use the Create E-Mail button to prepare a message with the computer's default mail client
(the mail will NOT be sent automatically!)
OR

· use the Copy to Clipboard button if you want to create the mail manually and paste the
information (send the email to [email protected]).

Install license file

The license file you receive must be stored in the license server installation directory (C:\Program
Files\CFturbo *\LicenseServer) you have chosen during the setup. It already has .lic as file
extension, this extension must be preserved!

There should be only one license file (*.lic) present in this directory.

After placing the file in the folder, restart the Windows service ("Reprise LM for CFturbo") by
operating system control. Alternatively you can use "Restart License Server" under CFturbo in the
Windows Start menu.
Please note: Restarting the license server requires administrator rights. "Run as administrator" in the
context menu of the corresponding Start menu item has to be used.

Now the logfile and the web server page can be checked for the licenses to be running.

Firewall configuration

If the server is protected by the Windows Firewall, exceptions for the license server application are
created during the setup. Depending on your server configuration and network infrastructure,
additional configuration steps may be necessary.

Port configuration

If you want to serve licenses across a firewall, at least two port numbers have to be allowed your
firewall to pass requests on these ports:

· The RLM server itself defaults to port 5053.

This port must be modified when running different software on the same Reprise license server.
The port number can be specified at the end of the HOST line of the license file.
HOST <hostname> <hostid> [tcp/ip port #]
Example: HOST licserver
CFIDNET2=81f344a7a69115ce4cfd7c30c46efd1f 5555

Please note that the CFturbo client is not able to automatically detect the license server when
the port number is different to the default 5053. In this case the Windows environment variable
on the client has to be specified explicitly, including the modified port number (see Client
setup 31 ).
Example: CFTURBO_LICENSE = 5555@licserver

· The ISV server starts with a dynamic port number which is not known before start-up time.

It is possible to have RLM assign a fixed port number to the ISV server. In order to do this, you
need to specify the port number for the ISV server on the ISV line of the license file. The port
number is the fourth parameter in the ISV line:
ISV <isvname> [<isv-binary-pathname>] [port=<port-number>]
Example: ISV cfturbo cfturbolm.exe port=5054

Except the web server port, all ports have to be reachable.

More information

For additional configuration options check RLM Support for License Administrators and Users.

3.2.2.2 Client setup

Every client computer that should run CFturbo has to be configured for using the floating license.

Auto configuration

CFturbo is able to automatically detect running license servers in the network. No further
configuration is needed on client side, if the detection succeeds. If the client is not able to find the
license server, it has to be configured using the environment variable.

The detection relies on the client being in the same network broadcast subnet like the license server
and a default configuration of the license server. For further details see RLM Support for License
Administrators and Users.

Manual configuration by environment variable

The Windows environment variable CFTURBO_LICENSE is used to identify the location of the
license server.

It is set to <port>@<host>

<port>: port of the license server for connection between client and server
<host>: host name of the license server machine (name or IP address)

The default port - if not configured in the server license file (on the SERVER or HOST line) - is 5053.

Windows environment variables always have a name (first part) and a value (second part) connected
by “=”.

Example:
CFTURBO_LICENSE=5053@rlmhost ("rlmhost" has to be replaced by the specific host
name)

Multiple license servers are separated by semicolon:

CFTURBO_LICENSE=5053@rlmhost;5053@rlmhost2

For details about how to set environment variables, please consult your IT department or the
Windows documentation.

3.2.3 Cloud license setup

The behavior is very similar to the "Floating license", with the difference that the license server is
located in the cloud. Therefore, there is no need to run your own license server.
A stable internet connection is required to use cloud licensing.

For using CFturbo with a cloud license 2 steps have to be performed:

1) Requesting a cloud license from CFturbo sales team (no technical data required)
2) Storing the received license file in the CFturbo installation directory

Note: If CFturbo is configured for using a floating license 25 , modules get checked out from that
license first if available.

Install license file

Afterwards, you can restart CFturbo and check the license information 34 .

Note: The cloud license server is ls96.rlmcloud.com, which is contacted via port 443. To
communicate with the license server across a firewall, this port must be allowed.

3.2.4 Show license information

Current license information are displayed here.

The company name is for information only.

Path is the license file location and the content of the environment variables used for defining floating
license servers.

If available the last Error message of license checking is displayed.

3.2.5 Troubleshooting

Error messages

Problem Message Reasons

No valid license See Steps for licensing 20

available yet.

Diagnostic configuration

CFturbo and its license server are enabled to output diagnostic information about licensing. Start
menu entries are created to run a script collecting useful information for the support:

· "Run CFturbo Diagnostics" on the client

· "Run License Server Diagnostics" on the server

Alternatively the client license dialog and the server request generator have a Diagnostics button in
the bottom line to start the diagnostic.

The resulting text file will give among others the following information:

· time the program was run

· working directory

· relevant environment variables

· the license files in use, in the order RLM will use them (can be re-ordered from your normal
list if RLM_PATH_RANDOMIZE is set)
· a list of all licenses which can be checked out

License server problems

If problems occur setting up or running the license server, the following can be checked:

· Service "Reprise LM for CFturbo" present and running (Windows ® services)

· Server logfile (installation directory of license server, server.log and cfturbo.dlog)

· Server diagnostics (License server web interface -> Diagnostics)

3.3 Interactive mode

CFturbo can be executed in interactive mode with different command line parameters.
For starting in batch mode 37 , several different parameters exist.

Syntax

cfturbo.exe [<project file> [-readonly]] or [<batch file>]

Options

<project file> CFturbo project file (*.cft)

The specified project file is loaded automatically after program start.

This behavior is similar to double-clicking on a *.cft file.

-readonly The specified project file is loaded in read-only mode.

All details are displayed, but nothing can be modified.

<batch file> CFturbo batch file (*.cft-batch)

The project file specified in the batch file is loaded automatically after program
start.
The modified parameters specified in the <Updates> block are applied to the
project, while the <Batch action> blocks are ignored.

Details of batch mode are described in the separate topic 37 .

3.4 Batch mode

CFturbo can be executed in batch mode to modify designs without any screen display and user
interaction. This is essential for using CFturbo with optimization software.

Syntax

cfturbo.exe -batch <batch file> [-verbose] [-export <interface name>] [-log <log file>]

Example

CFturbo is installed c:\Program Files\CFturbo 20xx.x\

in: c:\tmp\Example.cft-batch
Batch file is:

"c:\Program Files\CFturbo 20xx.x\cfturbo.exe" -batch c:

\tmp\Example.cft-batch

Options

-batch <batch file> Enables CFturbo batch mode. <batch file> can either be a CFturbo
batch file (*.cft-batch) or a CFturbo project file (*.cft).

-verbose Display log output on the command line.

-export <interface If CFturbo is started with a CFturbo project file in batch mode,
name> an export interface can be selected like in the batch file.

-log <log file> Use specified logfile for output

All other batch commands have to be defined in a "Batch file".

Batch file

The batch mode of CFturbo is controlled by an XML file *.cft-batch.

For a specific CFturbo project this file can be created via PROJECT | Batch mode/
Optimization 199 .

Due to a close relation between the CFturbo file format (*.cft) and the batch mode format (*.cft-
batch), only batch mode files created with the same version as your CFturbo file should be used.
After an update of CFturbo a new batch mode file can be created and the needed adjustments can
be done.

The resulting batch mode file contains all selected parameters of the CFturbo project as XML nodes
supplemented by a short description and optional range definitions.

File structure:

<?xml version="1.0" standalone="yes"?>

A batch mode file can contain multiple elements of the CFturboBatchProject-type, each of
which is handling a specific CFturbo project.This allows the combination of multiple batch mode files
into one batch mode file.

All XML-subelements are optional and can occur multiple times except for the Updates-block
which must occur once per CFturboBatchProject-element.

The InputFile-attribute of the CFturboBatchProject-element specifies the path of the

CFturbo project file.

Updates

The Updates block contains all selected parameters that should be modified during batch run.
These can be simple scalar values, points or arrays. Each parameters has his own description for
more easy navigation in the file, e.g. for optimization setup.

Some general remarks to the parameter update:

· Parameters are available for batch mode only if they can be modified in interactive design
mode.
Examples:
- Impeller main dimensions 291 , blade angles 479 are available only if automatic calculation is
disabled.
- Values for splitter blades are available when splitters are not geometrically linked to main
blades.

· Parameters can be modified within the same constraints that exist in interactive design mode.
Modifications that violate the constraints will be corrected automatically.

· All parameters of the Updates block with their new values after the batch run are saved in a
resulting parameter file <name of batch file>.cft-res. The file structure is identical to the batch
file *.cft-batch and allows a comparison between the desired and the realized parameter value
which takes all restrictions into account.

Output

The Output block contains all selected parameters, which are a result of any geometry
modifications during a batch run.

The modified values are save in the .cft-res file at the end of the batch run for further processing, e.g.
for using as constraints during optimization runs.

Batch actions

Two different actions are available for further processing of the CFturbo projects loaded in batch
mode. The BatchAction-element can occur multiple times, e.g. for exporting parts of the
geometry in different formats and/ or modelstates or saving the updated geometry.

· Export action

The Export-action is used to export the project data utilizing the export interfaces CFturbo
supports. Export is performed according to the export settings saved in the CFturbo file. The
ExportComponents subelement can be specified for export interfaces supporting
components selection. For details about the supported selection options for the specific
interface see Project | Export 127 .

<BatchAction Type="Object" Name="Export">

<WorkingDir>c:\Examples\Myexports\</WorkingDir>
<BaseFileName>Pump1</BaseFileName>
<ExportInterface Type="Enum">General</ExportInterface>
<ExportComponents Count="3" Type="Array1" Desc="Components to
be exported">
<Value Type="Integer" Caption="Nozzle"
Index="0">2</Value>
<Value Type="Integer" Caption="Impeller"
Index="1">3</Value>

<Value Type="Integer" Caption="Stator"

Index="2">4</Value>
</ExportComponents>
</BatchAction>

Attribute / Node Value optional Description

Name Export no Action name

WorkingDir <existing yes Folder for exported files

path>

BaseFileName <filename> yes File name without extension

ExportInterfa e.g. "General" no Export interface to use. The following values are
ce valid:

ANSA Neutral3D
AnsysMesher NX
AutoCAD OpenFOAM
AutoGrid PerformanceData
BladeGen Pointwise
Catia Report
CFturboExchange Simerics
CreoParametric SimScale
DesignModeler SolidWorks
DXF SpaceClaim
General StarCCM
GridPro TetraVolMesh
Hexpress TurboGrid
HyperMill TurbomachineryCFD
IcemSTEP VistaTF
IGG ZW3D
Inventor

ExportCompone - yes Components to be exported. Take into account

nts that only components supported by the export
interface will be exported

· Save action

Is used for saving the CFturbo project after applying batch updates. It can also be used for the
automatic conversion of CFturbo files created with older program versions.

<BatchAction Type="Object" Name="Save" Desc="CFT file name of

modified project">
<OutputFile>C:
\Testing\Examples\Impeller\Pump1_new.cft</OutputFile>
</BatchAction>

Attribute / Node Value optiona Description

Name Save no Action name

Desc <string> yes Description of the modified file name

OutputFile <existing no Specifies the path of the file save destination

path>

3.4.1 Example

The example of a CFturbo batch file pump.cft-batch below, changes the number of impeller blades
of the pump.cft example project.

Subsequently the modified impeller (component #2) gets exported for TurboGrid and the project is
saved into the CFturbo project file pump_modified.cft.

During runtime a log-file pump.log is created in the directory of pump.cft-batch:

3.4.2 Exit Codes

CFturbo provides the following exit codes, which report the result of the batch run:

Exit Code Description

0 No errors or warnings occurred during batch run.

1 Last batch run was completed with warnings but no errors.

2 Last batch run was completed with errors.

3.5 Project structure

A CFturbo project describes a complete single-stage or multi-stage machine.

Project types

The following project/ machine types are available:

· Pump

· Fan

· Compressor

· Gas Turbine

· Hydro Turbine

Project structure

A project consists of the global parts

· Project information 106

· Global setup 108

· Performance prediction 115

· Export 127

· Batch mode 199

· Reference components 204

and the single component parts of the assembly. The following components are available:
· Up to 5 Impellers on any position (exception: only 1 runner in Francis turbine project)

· Volute as first/ last component

· any number of Stators (vaned or vaneless)

Components can be added directly in the components view 257 .

Coupling between components

The following coupling types are available:

Coupling in flow direction (Default)

Inlet cross section of a component is defined by the outlet cross

section of previous component.

Coupling reverse flow direction

Outlet cross section of a component is defined by the inlet cross

section of next component.

Uncoupled

Both sides (inlet and outlet of the respective component) are

independent. Gaps between neighboring components are possible. By

default a newly added stator is uncoupled at its outlet. That makes it

easy to add a stator between two adjacent but detached components.

The component coupling can be adjusted in the component view 256 directly at inlet or outlet the
neighboring components.

The impeller as the core component of a machine has primary sides both at inlet and outlet.

3.5.1 Add component

Components can be added to the current project by alternative possibilities:

For new projects without components For projects with existing

components

The menu is displayed automatically for empty Use + button of the currently
projects selected component
o in the Meridian view 257

o in the component list 86 on left

side

In the menu the component type can be selected. Depending on the specific insert position some of
the types can be disabled:
· up to 5 impellers and 30 components in a project

· volute at inlet/ outlet only

· Impeller can be added only if the flow direction on the selected position is suitable to the
impeller geometry.

Please note:
· If you add a component on the first position of the project (in flow direction) then the inlet
conditions defined in the Global setup 108 are applied for this new component.

Duplicate components

CFturbo components can be duplicated within the current

project. The available components of the current project
are listed and can be selected to duplicate.

During the duplicate process, all automatic calculations

will be deactivated to keep the original geometry.

The duplicated components are linked to

their original geometry. They do not have
their own design steps but change
automatically with their master
component.

The linked components are specially

displayed in the Meridian view and have
2 additional context menu items:
· Unlink disconnects the link to the
parent component and makes the
component independent.
· z-position allows to change the inlet
z-position of the linked component

The z-position of a linked component

can be specified by 2 alternative
values:
· Absolute middle position z Abs
· Offset to master z Master

The distance to the neighboring

component at inlet is displayed for
information:
· Neighbor distance at hub z Hub
· Neighbor distance at shroud z Shroud

Import CFturbo components

CFturbo components can be extracted from other CFturbo

projects (*.cft) and inserted in the current project. The
available components of the selected project are listed and
can be selected to import.

During the import process, all automatic calculations will

be deactivated to keep the original geometry.

Import geometry

New components can be created using external geometry description. Reverse engineering process
can be started from here.

Details can be found under Import geometry 50 .

3.5.1.1 Import geometry

This feature allows direct import of external geometry description.

Currently, 3 formats are supported:

· CFturbo Exchange 50 : *.cft-geo
· Ansys BladeGen 51 : *.rtzt
· Reverse Engineering 53 : STEP, IGES, Parasolid, BREP

3.5.1.1.1 Native format

This format (*.cft-geo) can be used to import rotational symmetric components only. It is a XML
format including the following information:

General information (mandatory)

Length unit type LengthMm for millimeters

LengthM for meters
LengthIn for inches

Unshrouded flag Only required for vaned designs. 1 = unshrouded, 0 = shrouded

xTipInlet Only required for vaned and unshrouded designs. Tip length at inlet.

xTipOutlet Only required for vaned and unsrhouded designs. Tip length at outlet.

Meridional contour information (mandatory)

Hub contour Array of curves. At least one curve is required. Each curve contains an array
of 2D-points (r, z coordinates).
Stretches on rotation axis can be specified as part of the hub contour. It is
required, for example, for designs without hub (stators with pipe form).

Shroud contour Array of curves. At least one curve is required. Each curve contains an array
of 2D-points (r, z coordinates).

Blades information (only required for vaned designs)

Mean lines and blade thickness data must be provided for both main and splitter blade. Only
symmetric blades are supported.

Span positions Relative position between hub and shroud (0...1). Array of at least 2 float
numbers.

Mean line data Array of at least 2 curves. Each curve contains an array of 3D-points (r, T, z
coordinates).

Thickness data Array of 2 curves. The first curve defines thickness data on hub, the second
one on shroud. Each curve contains an array of points defined by two
coordinates:

x = relative point position on mean line

y = blade thickness at this position

Thickness data are required at least for both relative positions, 0 (leading
edge) and 1 (trailing edge). The thickness distribution along the mean line is
interpolated using all values.

An example file can be easily generated by exporting 127 any CFturbo component using the "CFturbo
Exchange" export interface.

3.5.1.1.2 RTZT format

This format can be used if the following geometrical data are available on span sections: radius, axial
coordinate, circumferential blade angle and blade thickness.
Values must be separated using spaces.

The file must include the following information:

Possible values Description

Number of blades Positive Integer Number of main blades

Splitters flag 0 or 1 0 if no splitter blades

Pitch fraction Positive float number lower than 1 Position of splitter blades (ignored for main
blade)

Number of layers Integer greater than 1 Number of layers

Thickness flag N or T N = Normal thickness values

T = Tangential thickness values

For more details see Thickness

definition 535 .

Span fraction Float number between 0 and 1 Relative position of a span section

Number of points Integer greater than 1 Number of points describing geometrical

data for a span section

r Nonnegative float number Radial coordinate value for a point

theta Float number Circumferential blade angle value for a

point in radians

z Float number Axial coordinate value for a point

thickness Nonnegative float number Blade thickness value for a point.

Parts of meridional contour without blades

are represented using a zero thickness
value

Information must be written using the following structure:

Global information

Number of blades

Splitters flag

For each blade (main and splitter if exists)

Pitch fraction

Number of layers Thickness flag

For each layer

Span fraction Number of points

For each point

r theta z thickness

An example file can be easily generated by exporting any example using the BladeGen 141 export
interface.

3.5.1.1.3 Reverse Engineering

Reverse Engineering (RE) is the process transforming 3D geometry from neutral file formats (STEP,
IGES, Parasolid, BREP) into a parametric CFturbo model.

The process is semi-automatic and consists of the following basic stages:

1. Creating/opening a CFturbo-project 83 considering the desired machine type
2. Specifying the design point (Global setup 108 )
3. Defining 3D geometry to be redesigned
4. Specifying parameters for automatic computation of the CFturbo model
5. Manual adjusting the CFturbo model to improve alignment with the initial 3D geometry

The stages 1. and 2. serve the purpose of specifying the turbomachinery's operating point as usual.
The stages 3. and 4. are performed inside a separate dialog enabling the user to create a CFturbo
model quickly and efficiently. In stage 5. the user can modify the redesigned CFturbo-model as
needed within the ordinary design process (impellers 277 , stators 602 ).

RE-dialog

The RE-dialog is divided into the following parts:

1. Steps (top)
· selecting the current active RE-step (loading 3D geometry, meridional redesign, blade redesign)

· contains information related to the current step

2. Imported geometry (left)

· loading external 3D geometry

· displaying the imported 3D geometry

· aligning geometry to 3D coordinate system of CFturbo model

· specifying CFturbo semantics for related geometry-elements (e. g. hub, shroud, blade)

3. Redesigned geometry (middle)

· presenting computation results of the CFturbo model as 3D geometry and meridional view

· specifying parameters for computation of the CFturbo model via 2D contour's context menu
inside meridional view

4. Settings (right)
· specifying parameters for computation of the CFturbo model

5. Message tree (bottom right)

· contains information, warnings and errors occurred during the RE-process

Detailed description of the import process

1. Preparing the CFturbo-project

· Creating/opening a CFturbo-project 83 considering the desired machine type

· Within Global setup 108 : Specifying the design point suitable for the model to be redesigned

2. Load external 3D geometry

· Preconditions:

o RE-step Import must be selected at the top

o input geometry must be represented by parametric surface data
(e. g. B-Spline surface, Cylindrical surface, etc.)
o input geometry can be defined within a single or multiple files representing neutral file
formats STEP, IGES, Parasolid or BREP

· Load geometry by clicking Load CAD data button or via drag & drop from a file explorer into
the 3D-view.

· Loaded geometry is displayed in the 3D view and contained geometry elements are listed in the
model tree left.

3. 3D alignment of loaded 3D geometry

· In order to obtain an accurate CFturbo model the loaded geometry has to be aligned sufficiently
to the 3D coordinate system of the CFturbo-model.

· This essentially includes aligning rotation/symmetry axis of loaded geometry with the z-axis of
the global coordinate system.

· Achieving a valid alignment can directly be done inside the Imported geometry section using
Transformation 270 panel.

4. Defining CFturbo-semantics on geometry elements

· In order to compute a CFturbo model from external 3D geometry a classification of imported 3D

faces representing a specific CFturbo model part (e. g. hub, shroud, blade) must be applied
(mapping).

· Mappings are applied context sensitive related to the currently selected RE-step (Meridian:
Hub, Shroud/Tip, Blade: Main blade, Splitter blade) at the top.

· This can be achieved by selecting a single or multiple 3D face(s) in the 3D view or model tree
and using one of the following options:
o opening the context menu by clicking right mouse button and selecting an appropriate
CFturbo model part (see first image below)
o clicking buttons representing CFturbo model parts next to the model tree (see first image
below)

· Mappings of 3D face(s) to CFturbo-model parts are represented by an information in the model

tree of the Imported geometry section and by explicit nodes in the model tree of the
Redesigned geometry section.

· Mappings can be deleted using one of the following options:

o opening the context menu of the related tree node in the Redesigned geometry section and
choosing the option Remove mapping
o clicking button Remove mapping next to the model tree

5. Computation of CFturbo model

· Updating redesigned model:

o within RE-step Meridian: computation of the CFturbo model is performed automatically

related to user inputs
o within RE-step Blade: computation of the CFturbo model is started manually by pressing
Update design in the Settings section or is performed automatically related to user inputs in
case of activated Automatic design update
o Automatic computations are triggered by adding/removing assignments of 3D-faces to
CFturbo model parts and by changing parameters in the Settings section and in the context
menu of 2D meridional contours

· Parameters:

RE-step Parameter Description

Import Rotation direction Defines impeller's rotation direction

[Impeller only]

Meridian Unshrouded Closed (shrouded) or open (unshrouded) geometry at

blade tip side

Tip clearance Gap between blade tip and casing

Define extension Hub/Shroud can be extended to user-defined z,r

[context menu of contour coordinates at the inlet/outlet. This can be applied in
end points] case the user-defined 3D-geometry of Hub/Shroud
results in too short contours in order to obtain a valid
Meridian.

Remove extension Removes user-defined Hub/Shroud extension at the

[context menu of contour inlet/outlet.
end points]

With blades [Stator only] Definition of a vaned or vaneless stator

Blade Number of blades Defines the number of blades of the CFturbo model.

Splitter blades Defines whether geometry has splitter blades.

Number of spans Defines number of intersections of the user-defined

blade geometry used for blade profile computation.

Offset Hub/Shroud/Tip Blade intersections are evenly distributed between Hub

and Shroud. The area of intersections can be limited
by offsets on Hub- and on Shroud-/Tip-side in order to
avoid inaccurate blade profiles due to blade root fillets.

Suggestion: Remove blade root fillets from initial CAD-

data, if possible.

Blade edge shape Defines the shape of the Leading/Trailing edge of the
(Leading/Trailing edge) user-defined blade geometry (blade profile computation
depends on shape of blade's Leading/Trailing edge).

· Results of computations are displayed inside the Redesigned geometry section:

o 2D contours in z,r coordinate system inside 2D meridional view:

§ Hub / Shroud / Tip contours

§ Blade's Leading / Trailing edge

§ Spans (light grey: contours for blade intersection; black: valid blade intersection; orange:
invalid blade intersection)
o 3D design model in the 3D-view (incl. model tree)
o Indication of validity of user-defined input geometry assigned to CFturbo model parts by
model tree node color
(green: valid, red: invalid/incomplete)
o Warnings/Errors during computation inside the message list bottom right

6. Finalization of import process

· After computation of a valid CFturbo model the Reverse engineering dialog can be closed by
pressing OK button (irreversible)

· Now the CFturbo project contains the new component which has to be activated 89 finally

Example

In this section the RE-process from initial input geometry to a CFturbo design is documented for a
mixed-flow pump exemplarily. Any redesigned CFturbo model can further be modified as needed
inside the ordinary design process.

1. Preparing the CFturbo-project

· Creating 83 a new CFturbo-project

· Specifying the design point within Global setup 108

· Adding a new component 46 and specifying the import-format 50

2. Loading and preparing external 3D geometry

· load external 3D geometry from neutral 3D file formats

· align loaded geometry with the coordinate system of the CFturbo model

o collinear alignment of rotation axis with the z-axis

o fluid flow direction in positive z-axis direction (for turbines: opposite direction!)

· define desired rotation direction of the loaded geometry

3. Meridional redesign

· Selection of Step Meridian

· Map 56 3D-faces to Hub / Shroud

· It's not necessary to select all 3D-faces representing the complete hub-/shroud-surface. Instead
a single face covering the surface from inlet to outlet is sufficient.

4. Blade redesign

· Selection of Step Blade

· Map 56 3D-faces of a single blade to Blade

· select the Blade edge shape of the loaded blade geometry (Rounded, Blunt)

· choose sufficient Blade intersection parameters

o default Number of spans is sufficient in general

o offsets can be increased in case of large blade root fillets (optional)

· press Update design in order to compute the redesigned geometry

5. Finalization
· close RE-dialog by pressing OK after a valid design model is computed
(initially opened/created project now contains the redesigned CFturbo-model)

· activate 89 the redesigned component (in order to modify the design)

· save the created design by saving the project

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Hub / Shroud: Rotation axis not collinear with global z-axis for [faces].

3D-alignment of specified Hub/Shroud faces is Update 3D-transformation of imported geometry

inaccurate. Symmetry axis is not collinear with by aligning symmetry axis to global z-axis.
global z-axis.

Hub / Shroud: No rotation axis information available for [faces].

The specified Hub/Shroud faces contain no In case of erroneous meridional contours

information about a symmetry axis, which can improve alignment ensuring symmetry axis
be used to align the geometry with global z-axis. being collinear with global z-axis.
Insufficient alignment with global z-axis can
result in erroneous meridional contours.

Calculation of following blade profile(s) failed: [span number(s)].

Cutting selected blade faces by span surfaces Ensure there are no gaps between specified
results in open blade profile(s). Redesigned blade faces in the range of span surfaces.
blade shape may differ significantly from given
blade faces.

Problem Possible solutions

Improve redesigned blade shape manually in the

ordinary design process after finishing the RE-
process.

M-distribution of following meanline(s) is not strictly increasing: [span number(s)].

Unsupported meanline shape (no strictly Improve redesigned blade shape manually in the
increasing m-distribution in m,t-coordinate ordinary design process after finishing the RE-
system). Redesigned blade shape may differ process.
significantly from given blade faces.

Hub / Shroud / Blade tip is invalid.

A valid 2D meridional contour couldn't be Ensure all specified faces represent the Hub /
computed from given 3D-faces (e. g. self- Shroud / Blade tip of the model.
intersections).
Ensure correct 3D-alignment of specified faces
with the global coordinate system of the CFturbo
model.

Reduce tip clearance.

Adjust defined extensions of hub/shroud

contours.

Primary flow path could not be computed.

A valid 2D meridional flow path couldn't be Ensure specified faces for Hub and for Shroud/
computed from given 3D-faces Blade tip are not connected and do not intersect
(e. g. intersecting contours). each other.

Ensure all specified faces represent the Hub /

Shroud / Blade tip of the model.

Apply or adjust extensions of hub/shroud

contours.

Computing spans for blade surface intersection failed.

Span surfaces used for blade surface Ensure no undulations are present in hub and in
intersection could not be computed from given shroud/tip contours due to insufficient input
hub and shroud/tip contours. geometry or insufficient 3D-alignment.

Problem Possible solutions

Calculation of blade profiles failed.

A redesigned blade could not be computed due Ensure there are no gaps between specified
to too less successfully computed blade profiles blade faces in the range of span surfaces.
(at least two valid blade profiles must be
available). Ensure all specified faces represent the
Main/Splitter blade of the model.

Ensure blade does not exceed meridional

boundaries.

Unconnected blade faces selected.

There are blade faces specified not being Ensure specified blade faces are connected to
connected to others. each other.

3.5.2 Geometric coupling

The sketch illustrates the general layout of the geometric coupling of two neighboring components in
case they are coupled:

Primary / Secondary

In a group of two neighboring components that are coupled, one is primary always, the other one is
secondary. The secondary side is aligned to the primary side. Only the secondary side can define an
offset to the neighboring component.

If the geometry of the primary component is changing, the component at the secondary side is
adjusted automatically. If a component is deactivated (see Active/ Rename/ Delete 89 ), no
adjustment will be effected - therefore an overlapping of neighboring components is possible, which is
illustrated by a warning (see Components 256 ). The same applies if neighboring components are not
coupled.

Coupling definition

The coupling definition at volute inlet 621 as well as at stator inlet 609 and outlet 609 is made in a
uniform manner.

Coupling
Information about coupling direction

Neighboring component's inlet/ outlet

Inlet/ outlet position at hub and shroud side
Coordinate transfer from neighboring
component (if that is primary)

Inlet/ outlet
Geometry definition optionally by
- Points on Hub & Shroud
- Point on Center line, width and angle

Alternatively absolute coordinates or an

Offset can be used, which are automatically
converted into each other.

Rotor-Stator-Interface

Rotor-Stator-Interface (RSI) at impeller outlet can be defined in the CFD-Setup 580 of the impeller,
otherwise it's located directly on the impeller outlet.

Flow direction (angle)

Beside the geometrical information the flow direction is an important property. The flow direction at
the component inlet is defined by the flow direction at the outlet of the upstream component
(predecessor). Outlet flow direction of a component is determined by its blade or by constant swirl for
vaneless components.

The first component of the project has no predecessor and gets the flow direction information from
pre-swirl definition in the Global setup 108 .

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Flow inlet does not match previous outlet

Flow outlet does not match next inlet

Inlet and outlet of flow region Check both sides (components) if the hub and shroud points are
of two neighboring identical and no gap between the components exists.
components are not
matching. For stators, the "Inlet + Outlet" mode is more suitable to define
exact geometry endpoints. For "Center line" specifications, one of
the pre-defined angle definitions should be used if possible.

Please note that for volutes the inlet is always axis-parallel. An

upstream stator can only match the volute inlet if its outlet is also
axis-parallel.

For impellers, an existing gap of the flow region can alternatively

be closed by
· secondary flow path 449 design in the meridional contour
design step
· extension 585 (with option "connected") or RSI connection 587 in
the CFD setup

3.5.3 Automatic calculations

Some component design steps contain automatic calculations.

Currently these are:

· Impeller main dimensions 278 : calculation of empirical parameters and efficiencies, calculation
of dimension values

· Impeller blade properties: calculation of blade angles 479 ,

B1 B1
(meanline design mode) or
profile properties 567 (airfoil/ hydrofoil design mode)
· Impeller mean lines: some input values for the Blade loading 507 design mode
· Volute development areas 641 : calculation of spiral contour using updated inlet flow properties

These automatic calculations can be activated or deactivated. Both approaches have their specific
advantages and disadvantages:

· Automatic calculation:
It's assured that the calculation results are up-to-date based on the latest input parameters.
The formerly used values could be be modified.

· No automatic calculation:
It's assured that the exact original values are used, which were calculated or specified formerly,
including optional manual adjustment.
The values could be not suitable to any modifications of input parameters or modified geometry
parts.

When opening older CFturbo projects containing automatic calculations the calculated values can
deviate from the original values due to the re-calculation - therefore the geometry could be modified
slightly compared to the original one. Generally it's recommended to deactivate all automatic
calculations after the design process is finished and the CFturbo file is archived.

If a CFturbo project was created by an older version and contains automatic calculations the user will
be asked for deactivating it when opening such a file. This should assure identical geometry over
several CFturbo versions.

3.6 Drag & Drop

CFturbo supports drag & drop operations for files to make the handling easier in the following
situations:

· Main window

o Open Project 105

open CFturbo projects (.cft)
identical to menu "File/ Open project"

o "Meridian" view 256

see "All diagrams" item below

o "3D Model" view 259

import of 3D models (.step, .stl, .igs, .x_t, .cft, ...)
identical to menu "3D MODEL/ Load CAD data"

· Reference designs window 204

add CFturbo projects (.cft) as reference to compare with the currently opened project
identical to "Add" button top left

· Batch mode window 199

open CFturbo batch files (.cft-batch)

identical to "Load" button top left

· All diagrams 94

load any point data defining curves (.cftcv)

identical to context menu item "Load extra polyline"

3.7 Windows Explorer integration

CFturbo offers a Windows Explorer integration to support the user handling CFturbo design files by
offering information on the content without the need to open it.

There are 3 different ways in which information is displayed, described in detail below.

Preview

The preview pane of the Windows Explorer can be used to display a preview of the content of a file. It
can be enabled on the view ribbon/menu of Windows Explorer or by pressing Alt + P and will show
an excerpt of the report and an image of the meridian shape of the design.

Note: Previews are only available for CFturbo design files created or modified with CFturbo 10.2 and
newer.

Property sheet

For CFturbo design files a property sheet is available in the file properties (right click on file) showing
the project information.

Additional columns and Windows Search

In Windows Explorer additional columns are available for CFturbo design files:
· Title
· Author
· Comment
· File version
· Classification
· Project type
· Creation date
· Modification date
· Component count

Columns can be added to the details view by using the context menu of a column header (right click
on header) and selecting "More..." from the menu. It's possible to select multiple columns at once.
After confirming the selection, the new columns will show up in the Windows Explorer view.

The columns can be used for sorting.

The information from this columns is also indexed by the Windows Search, allowing you to find your
CFturbo design files not only based on their file name but also based on these values.

The general Indexing Options of Windows can be set using Windows system settings. The folders
containing your files should be included in the list of locations for them to get indexed. Usually it can
take some time for the indexer to add new files. In the advanced Indexing Options you can also force
a rebuild of the index.

For further details about the Windows Explorer and Windows Search see the Windows
documentation.

3.8 Logging
CFturbo provides logging information when running.

File location

The resulting log file is saved in the following directory, depending on the run mode:

· Interactive:
C:\Users\<user name>\AppData\Local\Temp\CFturbo\<Version>\Log
The log file is deleted at program shutdown if it does not contain any error messages.
Otherwise, old files are deleted automatically if they are older than 7 days.
· Batch mode:
directory of batch file *.cft-batch

Message levels

The log file contains logging information in the following levels:

· Information

· Warning

· Error

File format

The log file is a simple text file. A single line in the log file has the following format:

<Date> <Time> [<Message level>] <Message category> <Message>

Example:
2020-05-27 17:01:07 [ERROR] ProjectManager - Requested project type not supported.

3.9 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides information on how problems can be handled:

¢ Error reporting 76

¢ Emergency recovery 79

¢ Known problems 80

3.9.1 Error reporting

CFturbo includes an error reporting function which helps you to send the relevant information to the
support team.

As bug reports help us to find and solve problems, we always recommend to send the report and
include as much information as you can provide to reproduce the error.

If an error occurred a window will appear that informs you about the error and provides 3 options:

· Send bug report

Follow the Send assistant to add user and contact information as well as configuring the
bug report. Finally, the report will be sent to our web server encrypted.

· Show bug report

View collected information that will be included in the bug report.

· Continue application (Default)

Continue working with CFturbo without sending the bug report.

Send assistant

The Send assistant will guide you sending the bug report.

In the first step, you will be asked for your contact information so that the support team is able to
contact you if additional information is needed or a solution for the problem is available.

The second step asks you for the details of the situation, the error occurred in. Please note that it is
extremely helpful if the error can be reproduced.

Here you also can choose, if the currently loaded project should be attached to the bug report.

Finally you can choose if a screenshot should be attached. If Continue is clicked, the report will be
sent encrypted to our web server.

If automatic sending fails, e.g. due to missing network connection, a mail with all details and
attachments will open in your default mail client and you have to send it manually.

Detail view

The detail view shows you the information that is collected about the error and the current state of
CFturbo. Also basic system information is included.

3.9.2 Emergency recovery

If CFturbo terminates abnormally the last project state is still available and can be restored at next
program start.

In this case the following message is displayed and one can open this last project state optionally.

The last project state is the newest item of the Undo 125 list of the previous project.

3.9.3 Known problems

The following table lists known problems together with their possible solutions:

Problem Possible solutions

When CFturbo is started, the following error message is Update the graphics card driver.
displayed:

LoadLibrary failed on Window s 10

The anti-aliasing of the 3D model does not work. Anti-aliasing (MSAA) settings of
CFturbo should not be overridden by
graphics card driver. Change your
driver settings to use application
settings.

Without anti-aliasing

With anti-aliasing

IV
Getting started 83

4 Getting started
This chapter describes how to start using CFturbo:

¢ Start 83

¢ Opened project 85

¢ Component design process 87

¢ Activate/ Rename/ Delete components 89

¢ Remove design steps 91

4.1 Start
After starting the program you see the following screen:

Create new project

Here you can create a new project by selecting the desired machine type:

§ Fan

§ Pump

§ Compressor

§ Gas Turbine

§ Hydro Turbine

These 4 buttons correspond to the menu item File/ New 102 .

After creating a new project the Global Setup 108 dialog is starting
automatically.

Afterwards several components can be added to the project.

Open existing project

Here you can select existing projects:

Open any CFturbo project (*.cft) via file opening dialog

(corresponds to the menu item "File/ Open" 105 )

Here you can select one of the 10 recently used projects. The full
filename is displayed as a hint if you move the mouse cursor over
any item.

By right click on any item you can

open the corresponding directory,
remove the item or clear the entire
list.

Open one of the CFturbo sample projects from the installation

directory.

Alternatively, a CFturbo project can be opened by drag & drop the corresponding *.cft file.

For Recent projects and Sample projects, a preview of the corresponding project is available for
the item under the mouse cursor if there is enough space to the right of the lists.

4.2 Opened project

After creating a new design or opening an existing project the main window looks as shown below:

On top you can find the ribbon style menu 101 providing access to all functionality. Some of the
ribbon pages are context sensitive.

The CFturbo application window is divided into three main areas:

a) Component list on the left side

This ordered list contains an icon for each component of the project. The currently selected
component is framed.

Clicking on the icon selects the component (alternatively you can click on component in the
meridional view 256 ).

At inlet or outlet side of the selected component you can add additional components by the
buttons.

After selecting a component, the ribbon changes to the specific tab for this component type. The
context menu of the icons allows (de)activating, renaming and deleting the component.

The following component types are possible:

Centrifugal or mixed-flow impeller

Axial impeller

Stator (vaned or unvaned)

Volute

b) Three alternative views in the central part

see Views 255

c) Message panel on the right side

The message panel shows errors, warnings and information for all components of the project. The
design step causing the message is also displayed by icon.
It depends on the opinion of the user to accept warnings or to modify the design by adequate actions
to avoid them. Reasons for errors should be eliminated.

The overall number of errors, warnings and

information is displayed above, where you
can filter according to these categories.

If a help link is available providing additional

information concerning the message, a
question mark is shown next to the cursor.
The help can then be opened by clicking
on the message.

4.3 Component design process

The design process for CFturbo project components requires the completion of a specific sequence
of obligatory design steps for each component type (see impeller 277 , volute 620 , stator 602 ).
After completing a components basic design process, optional design steps related to model
finishing 590 and CFD setup 580 become available.

Each design step comes with its own dialog that can be accessed via the component specific
menus 251 or the components context menu 257 in the meridian view.
If the design step is executed for the first time, CFturbo generates an initial design automatically.

Title bar controls

In addition to the "Search the manual" edit field (see General handling 93 ), some more features are
available in the title bar.

Undo = Ctrl Z
Redo = Ctrl Y

the last action, which is displayed as hint

Menu with additional options:

Restore from project

Restore previous project state (current modifications are lost)

Reset to default
Reset to CFturbo default settings (current modifications are lost)

Design step dialog controls

Generally, dialogs in CFturbo provide the following standard controls:

OK Closes the dialog and saves user changes into the project.

Cancel Closes the dialog and discards all changes made.

Help Opens the help topic related to the current design step.

Fast Navigation and Automated component design

Dialogs that are part of the basic component design process provide navigation buttons:

This feature enables you to quickly and comfortable navigate to any other design steps.

Any existing design step can be selected as well as the next design step for new designs by

· Left mouse button: close current design step with <OK> (save user changes into the
project)
· Right mouse button: close current design step with <Cancel> (ignore user changes)

Currently not existing design steps are disabled.

Complete all design steps

· For new design steps this button closes the dialog and saves user changes into the project.
Finally, it completes all subsequent mandatory design steps of the selected component with
default values.

· This option is only available if the selected component has a next design step that has never
been completed.

· You may use this option as soon as the main dimensions of a component are defined to
278

get to a preliminary automatic design within seconds. You can change all design
parameters according to your requirements later on.

· The automatic design may fail or lead to unsatisfactory results if global project settings
and/or previously completed design steps are unsound. In this case you will be informed
about the issue via warnings in the message panel 86 or a message box.

Update Messages

After any modification the current design step is checked for information/ warnings/ errors.

These messages are displayed close to the

<OK> button of the design step dialog.

Usually you can find more information about a

message in the online help by clicking on its
text.

If the design step dialog is closed by <OK> then this information as well as the messages of all
other design steps is is also displayed in the Messages area right in the main form.

See also Opened project/ message panel 86 . Usually you can find more information about a
message in the online help by clicking on its text.

After any design step modification all dependent design steps are updated automatically.

4.4 Component handling

The general component handling can be executed in the following manner alternatively:

· Context menu of the component left in panel Components

· Context menu of the component right in the Meridian view

Active

An inactive component is read-only and also not going to be updated automatically. Inactive
components are colored gray in all views.

Rename

Change the caption of a component. The caption is displayed left in the components list as a hint
when moving the mouse cursor on the icon, in the Meridian view, the 3D view and the report.

Delete

The selected component is deleted. If the Meridian view is selected, the <Del> key on the keyboard
can be used alternatively.

Color

A component color can be selected from 15 predefined colors.

The color is used left in the components list and in the Meridian view. Furthermore it's used for text
color in the report 274 , the 3D model tree 268 and the export 127 window.

Additional menu items are available for duplicated components 47 .

4.5 Remove design steps

IMPELLER/ STATOR/ VOLUTE | Additional | Remove design steps

If you make any design modifications on the current component then all following design steps are
adapted automatically (parametric model).

However, if you would like to start with an automatic generated CFturbo initial design, certain design
steps can be removed manually. Then CFturbo continues with new initial design data. For that
purpose you have to select the appropriate design step to be removed and then press the OK-button.

Of course, all following design steps after the selected one are removed too.

4.6 Handling
This chapter contains some general information about program handling:

¢ General handling 93

¢ Graphical dialogs 94

¢ Progression dialog 96

¢ Polyline to Bezier 97

¢ Edit fields with empirical functions 98

4.6.1 General handling

Search the manual

Many project and design step related windows have a search edit field in their title bar. Here the user
can enter any keyword to search for it in the manual.
If an internet connection exists, the results of the manual search is displayed in a web-browser.
Otherwise, the installed manual (.chm) is used.

Value input

Value input in
· Edit controls and
· String grids

is not applied automatically, but by

Pressing <Enter> or
Leaving the focused control by selecting another one by
mouse-click or by pressing <Tab>

(behavior like in Microsoft Excel)

Miscellaneous

· Position and size of dialogs are saved to restore it in the same way when they are called
again.

4.6.2 Graphical dialogs

Most component design step dialogs contain 2D graphical representation. The user interface is
uniform concerning the following topics.

Diagram popup menu

All graphical representations are made in diagrams that are automatically scaled according to
displayed objects. All diagrams have a popup menu (right click on empty diagram area) with basic
functions. Alternatively you can use the buttons on the top side of the diagram:

· Zoom window by mouse (<Ctrl> + left mouse button)

· Fit view (double click middle mouse button)
· Lens magnification at mouse cursor position
· Copy diagram to clipboard
· Save diagram as BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG or WMF
· Print diagram
· Paste points from clipboard into an extra polyline
· Add any polyline from file 96 (x,y points) to compare different curves (alternatively
by drag & drop)
· Remove all imported polylines
· Measure distance (<Alt> + left mouse button): use left-click to define start position
and keep the button pressed until the mouse cursor reached the end position
· Configure diagram

Context sensitive popup menus

If the mouse cursor is moved over a graphical object (e.g. polyline, Bezier point) then this is
highlighted by color or by increased line width. Right mouse click is now related to this object and
does open a special popup menu or a small dialog window for data input.

Bezier curves are used for geometrical contours by default. This continuous polylines are described
by the position of a few Bezier points. Therefore a simple modification of the curve is possible but on
the other hand the numerical representation of the curve is accurate. For Bezier curves, popup
menus are available for special actions concerning the curve.

In addition to specific curve features, the context menu always contains

some general features:
· Duplicate curve: The selected curve is duplicated to better illustrate
subsequent modifications of the original curve.

· Copy curve: 100 points (1 point per line, x and y separated by tab) of
the selected curve are copied into the clipboard for further processing in
other applications.
· Save curve: 100 points (1 point per line, x and y separated by tab) of
the selected curve are saved into a text file.

An alternate method to specify control points position by the mouse, you

may enter the accurate coordinates of the point in a small dialog window
that appears by clicking the right mouse button on the chosen control
point.

One or two coordinate values can be entered in dependence of geometrical boundary conditions. As
a rule these values are normalized relative values describing the position of the point between
extreme values left or bottom (0) and right or top (1). Normalized relative coordinates are giving the
advantageous possibility of an automatic update of the entire design if a parameter is modified.

Display options

Some diagrams (both main and additional progression diagrams) have several
display options to switch on/off some elements. These display options can be
handled by a menu in the lower left corner of the diagram.

The state of each display option is saved internally and restored next time.

Miscellaneous

· Coordinates of mouse cursor are displayed in format x:y bottom left in the status bar.

Auto fit view (for docking diagrams)

For docking diagrams, automatic fit view can be switched on/off in the upper
right corner when moving the mouse over the diagram.

4.6.3 Progression dialog

This dialog allows to set different progression types for a given variable.

Availability

The Progression dialog can currently be used for the following variables:

· Angular positions, in Blade mean lines 495

Visibility of the single progression types depends on the specific context of use.

Import polyline

If the option Polyline is selected, a text file containing a user defined progression can be imported.

Text file format:

# cross section distribution

· All lines starting with a "#" symbol are
# start/end tangential,
comments. All other lines contain the numerical
# midsection linear

# (spline interpolation 9 points)

values.
0.00 0.00000
0.04 0.01728
· x and y coordinate values can be separated by
0.08 0.03830
"comma", "semicolon", "space" or "tabulator".
0.12 0.06368
0.16 0.09404
· "Dot" character is required to be used as decimal
0.20 0.13000
separator.
0.24 0.17164
0.28 0.21687
· Values are imported in the currently active units
0.32 0.26314
of the diagram axes.
0.36 0.31018
0.40 0.36000
· The file can have any or no filename extension.
0.44 0.41404
0.48 0.47102
A sample file can be generated by right clicking the
0.52 0.52898
progression curve and selecting “Save curve”.
0.56 0.58596
0.60 0.64000
0.64 0.68982
0.68 0.73686
0.72 0.78313
0.76 0.82836
0.80 0.87000
0.84 0.90596
0.88 0.93632
0.92 0.96170
0.96 0.98272
1.00 1.00000

4.6.4 Polyline to Bezier

In several design steps, imported polylines can be converted into Bezier curves for further
modifications.

The approximation window can be started via the context menu of the curve, typically.

First the desired polyline is imported via "Import

polyline".

The imported curve is displayed in red color, the

original curve in black.

By pressing the "Start!" button, the position of the

Bezier points is calculated in order to approximate
the imported polyline as exact as possible.

The Bezier points can be adapted for better

matching the imported curve.

4.6.5 Edit fields with empirical functions

Some edit fields are connected with empirical functions 226 . This becomes visible when activating the
edit field by mouse click.

Default
Default appearance of edit field.

Mouse-over
Appearance if the mouse cursor is over the edit
field. Min. and max. values are displayed if a
recommended range exists.

Focused
Appearance, if the edit field is focused (mouse
click into the field). If a recommended range
exists, min. and max. values are displayed as
well as a sliding bar below.

Default value
The default value can be selected by pressing the
arrow button left. The numerical default value is
displayed as hint.

Empirical function
The connected empirical function can be
displayed by pressing the settings button on the
right side. Furthermore the currently selected
function is visible as hint of this button.

V
Menu 101

5 Menu
In CFturbo all menus of the main window are located in a ribbon with tabs. Every tab page contains
groups with control elements.

Hints

The buttons have hints if they are not self-

explanatory. The hint becomes visible when
the mouse cursor is on the button.

Keyboard shortcuts

Key tips are displayed, when you press and

release the ALT key.

In order to execute a command, you have to

press the the ALT key and the shown key(s)
one after another.

In the title bar the quick access toolbar is placed. It can be customized by using the context menu of
any element in the ribbon.

The file menu 102 left in the ribbon contains basic file handling operations.

The tab pages contain control elements grouped by functionality:

page visible

PROJECT 106

always
SETTINGS 209

HELP 250

IMPELLER 251 impeller 277

STATOR 251 if the selected component is a stator 602

VOLUTE 251 volute 620

3D MODEL 252

3D view 259

3D-MODEL - BLADES 252 if the corresponding view is

selected
Report
REPORT 253
view 274

5.1 File
The file menu can be found on the left border of the ribbon and contains the basic file operations.

Right behind the menu buttons you can

open one of the recently used files by
selecting it from the list.

This list is also available in the main

window directly after starting the program
(see Start 83 ).

5.1.1 Create new design

File | New

When creating a new project one of the following project types can be selected:
§ Pump

§ Fan

§ Compressor

§ Gas Turbine

§ Hydro Turbine

Equivalent to using this menu, the buttons in the Create new project area can be used, see
Start 83 .

The Global Setup 108 dialog will be started automatically right after creating a new project.

After finishing the Global Setup you will see an empty project where you can add components.

More information

· General information about adding new components: see Add component 46

· Specific for multi-stage machines: see Stage designer 104

5.1.1.1 Stage designer

Using the stage designer is an alternative method of creating multi-stage machines.

The number of stages can be specified and for each impeller the shape and the type can be
selected. The distribution of the energy transmission defined in the Global Setup 108 to the individual
stages can be relative or absolute. As a result, the corresponding impellers are created with their
Main dimensions and Meridional contour.

On the right side a meridional preview is available as well as a table with the most important
thermodynamic values of each impeller.

The space between the designed impellers can be filled with vaned or vaneless stators afterwards.

Each impeller created by the stage designer is considered to have no inlet swirl. That is to say its
property consider upstream swirl is false by default, see page Setup on Main dimensions 278 .
Normally there will be vaned stationary components located between adjacent impellers that will
change the swirl in a certain way. Very often that change will result in a zero inflow swirl for the next
impeller.

5.1.2 Open/ Save design

File | Open/ Save/ Save as

CFturbo projects are saved as *.CFT files (XML file format).

The user can modify the filename by the Save as- function in order to save modified designs under
different file names.

A list of recently used files is available by selecting the menu File | Recent projects. Alternatively
you can select the design directly from the list Recent Projects if no design is opened, see Start 83
.

5.2 PROJECT
A project can consist of several components (see Project structure and interfaces 43 ). All
components can be designed separately, whereas they influence each other on the interfaces due to
geometrical constraints and fluidic coupling.

The Project menu is split into general 106 and additional 126 functions.

5.2.1 General

PROJECT | General

The group General contains all those actions that are related to the whole project.

¢ Project information 106

¢ Global setup 108

¢ Performance prediction 115

¢ Undo 125

5.2.1.1 Project information

PROJECT | General | Project Information

For identification of the project can be specified:

· Project title

· Classification (e.g. version or sub name)

· Author

· Comments

This information is not mandatory and should support the identification of CFturbo projects &
sessions.

The working directory, the creation date and the date of last modification are displayed too.

5.2.1.2 Global setup

PROJECT | General | Global setup

Here the global project settings are defined valid for all components.

Depending on the project type different input parameters are required (see below). As examples you
see the Global setup dialog for pumps on the left side, for compressors on the right side.

Design point

Here you have to enter the design point data:

(1) Flow rate:

· for pumps, fans, hydro turbines: volume flow Q

or mass flow

· for compressors: mass flow or volume flow

Q (referring to total state on suction side)

· for gas turbines: mass flow

(2) Energy transmission:

· for pumps: head H or total pressure difference

· for fans: total pressure difference pt

· for compressors: total pressure ratio t

or total
pressure difference pt or specific work Y

· for gas turbines: total pressure ratio tt

or
total-to-static pressure ratio pts

· for hydro turbines: head H

(3) Number of revolutions n

Energy transmission and number of revolutions can be specified separately for each impeller in the
project, see Main dimensions 416 .
The sum of energy transmissions of all impellers in multi-stage machines should be equal to the
Global Setup value.

Fluid

Here the fluid has to be defined.

One has to select one of the predefined fluids. The list of existing fluids can be modified in the Fluid
manager 229 .

For compressors and turbines the gas model has to be specified additionally: Perfect, Redlich-
Kwong, Aungier/ Redlich-Kwong, Soave/ Redlich-Kwong, Peng-Robinson or CoolProp.

For pumps the fluid properties can be determined by using the CoolProp 235 library if the fluid is listed
there. If this is not the case the model User defined is available only, i.e., a constant density is
applied.

Inlet conditions

Here the total state at the inlet - total pressure pt and total temperature Tt - has to be defined. The
latter applies only for compressors and turbines. For pumps and fans the inlet total pressure is not
design relevant but will be used within the interfaces for the CFD export as well as for the calculation
of informative values at the interfaces of any component.

Optional

Here some optional parameters can be defined. Their default values remain unchanged normally.

· Direction of impeller rotation, seen in negative axis direction.

· Additional efficiency, which contains all additional (non-typical) flow losses in impeller and casing
parts of the machine. This efficiency value is used for impeller dimensioning as well as overall
efficiency calculation in addition to the efficiency values specified in the impeller design.

· Pre-Swirl [ for pumps, fans, compressors only ]

Here you may define the inflow swirl at hub and shroud. The following definitions are available:

Flow angle Swirl number Swirl energy number

Positive swirl < 90° r

<1 Y
>0

Negative swirl > 90° >1 <0

r Y
= 90°
No swirl =1 =0
r Y

Negative swirl is increasing the head and may often have no good affect to the suction behavior.
Inflow through a straight pipe usually leads to swirl-free flow.

The different parameters can be converted:

cm 4Q
r  1   1
u tan   dS  dH2 d n tan 
2 2

Y Y u2 1  r 
r  1  2 Y 
u Y

The conversion dr - a is only valid for certain diameters dH and dS.

Values

Except for radial-inflow turbines the general meridional shape of the machine, depending on the
specific speed, is displayed in the right Values area:

centrifugal mixed-flow axial

(radial) (diagonal)

Furthermore some calculated variables are displayed:

Specific speed points to machine type and general shape of impeller

(see Specific speed 217 definitions)

Specific energy Y Pumps, Fans, Hydro Turbines:

Y = gH = pt /

Compressors, Gas Turbines (perfect gas model):

1
 
Y   tt 
 1 c p Tt
 

Power output PQ PQ  m
Y

Pumps, Fans:
PQ = r gHQ

Mass flow m Pumps, Fans, Hydro Turbines:

  Q
m

Compressors:
&  Qt  t p t ,Tt 
m
(density according to gas model)

Total pressure difference Dpt Pumps, Fans:

Dpt = r gH

Compressor:

m&
Volume flow (total) Qt 
t p t ,Tt 
(density according to gas model)

Inlet speed of sound (total) at    RGas  Z  Tt

(perfect gas model)

Inlet density (total) t  t p t ,Tt 

(density according to gas model)

Outlet pressure (total)

Outlet temperature (total,

isentropic) (perfect gas model)

Gas Turbine:

m&
Volume flow (total) Qt 
t p t ,Tt 
(density according to gas model)

Inlet speed of sound (total) at    RGas  Z  Tt

(perfect gas model)

Inlet density (total) t  t p t ,Tt 

(density according to gas model)

p t2  p t p t1, tt 
Outlet pressure (total) or

static p2  p p t1, ts 

1

Outlet temperature (total, Tt2is  Tt  tt 

(perfect gas model)
isentropic) or
1
static, isentropic T2is  Tt  ts 
(perfect gas model)

Hydro Turbine:

Net head

Cordier

The Cordier diagram contains relationship between specific speed and specific diameter.

See Cordier 418 .

General remarks

· In general for cost reasons single-stage and single-intake machines are preferred covering a range
of about 10 < nq < 400.

· In exceptional cases it may become necessary to design an impeller for extremely low specific
speed values (nq < 10). These impellers are characterized by large impeller diameters and low
impeller widths. The ratio of free flow cross section area to wetted surfaces becomes unfavorable
and is causing high frictional losses. To prevent this one may increase either rotational speed n or
flow rate Q if possible. An alternative solution could be the design of a multi-stage machine
reducing the energy transmission of the single-stage.

· If especially high specific speed values (nq > 400) do occur one can reduce rotational speed n or
flow rate Q if feasible. Another option would be to operate several single-stage machines - having a
lower nq - in parallel.

· Please note: CFturbo is preferably used between 10 < nq < 400 – centrifugal, mixed-flow and axial
impellers.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Energy transmission of all impellers is different to globally defined value.

The sum of energy transmission defined for each Check and adapt the energy transmission of the
impeller deviates from the globally defined value impellers (see Main dimensions 278 ) to get
in Global setup. altogether 100% of the initially defined value of
the Global setup.

Total inlet pressure too small.

Hydro turbines only: Head together with the inlet Increase total inlet pressure.
total pressure yields a discharge total pressure
smaller then 0 with:

Pressure and temperature not within the liquid phase of the fluid.

If the fluid model = CoolProp, fluid properties will Increase inlet pressure, decrease inlet
be calculated as function of pressure and temperature.
temperature. In case pressure and temperature
are below the vapor pressure curve pv(T), the
fluid state is not valid 236 .

Pressure and temperature not within the gaseous phase of the fluid.

Applies if the fluid model = CoolProp or Decrease inlet pressure, increase inlet
REFPROP. In case pressure and temperature temperature.
are above the vapor pressure curve pv(T), the
fluid state is not valid 236 .

5.2.1.3 Performance prediction

PROJECT | General | Performance prediction

The Performance prediction is an empirical based estimation of the performance map of the
machine.

The performance prediction is not available for

· incomplete impellers

· impellers in "Manual dimensioning" mode (see Main dimensions/ Setup)

· axial gas turbines

Two approaches are used to estimate the characteristics:

· Euler: 119 Losses are estimated and subtracted from the theoretical Euler-line.

· Casey/Robinson: 124 Characteristics will be derived from similarity considerations. For details
see Casey/Robinson 684 . This model is applicable for compressors only.

Please note: This is an estimation. The actual performance may differ from the prediction.

General

A performance curve of the current design is estimated on the basis of the Euler-Equation:

and respectively.

In these and all the following equations all variables are averaged values. E.g. the circumferential
velocity u2 is calculated with an average impeller diameter dM2 that is the impeller diameter d2 for
centrifugal impeller and the area averaged diameter for axial impeller respectively. The latter reads
as:

Variables

All types of turbo machines have in common: The characteristics can be displayed in a diagram with
dimensions as well as without dimensions.

Varia Pump Fan Compressor Gas Turbine Hydro Turbine

ble

H head - net head

p pressure difference (total-total)

pressure difference
(total-static)
pts - -

work coefficient

H/Hopt head ratio - head ratio

p/
popt total pressure difference ratio

tt - pressure ratio (total-total) -

ts - pressure ratio (total-static) -

efficiency

* efficiency incl. motor -

volumetric
V volumetric efficiency -
efficiency

required driving power power output

P -

volume flow

meridional flow coefficient

flow coefficient

Q/Qop
flow ratio
t

volume flow total

Qt - -

mass flow

reduced mass flow

- -

corrected mass flow

- -

All combinations of flow and energy variables are possible.

It is common practice in the case of gas turbines - contrary to all other type of turbo machines - that
the flow variable is given as a function of the energy variable. Beyond it characteristics of different
rotational speeds will not be displayed over the whole theoretical pressure interval but only
piecewise.

The choice of the variables is to be made in the tab "Variables".

Reference curves

For comparison purposes with the present design saved designs can be loaded (soft
button"configure").

Information

On the right hand site in the panel information some design point information can be found. Beyond
it also the mass flow (or equivalent) for the tangential (shockless) flow towards the leading edge of
the impeller blades as well as its relative deviation from the design point is given. The value of the
shockless flow is also represented as a vertical line in the performance diagram. The visibility of that
line can be toggled by the display options ( lower corner in the left).

5.2.1.3.1 Euler based

The Euler-based performance prediction is available for all types of turbomachines.

Kinds of losses

There are different kinds of losses that are considered in different curves:

Kind Description Parameter

Based on the Euler-Equation and the

decreased power that is calculated in the
Blade properties 453 . In the design point the cl:
decreased power line is shifted by a
Decrease pressure head loss equivalent to the cl = 1...parallel position,
d power decreased power (HDecr=Hth- HDecr). The
cl = 0...intersection with Euler-Line at
decreased power line can be parallel to the p = 0.
Euler-Line as well as positioned that way,
that it intersects the Euler-Line at p = 0.

zh:
Based on the Euler-Line including the
decreased power minus the losses due to
Hydraulic General approach:
friction. Yields a downwards opened F:
losses
parabola, that touches the decreased power
curve at Q = 0. H Hydr  h  F  Q 2 Flow factor that
considers the
geometry of the
Includes all the effects listed above plus component (inlet
Shock turbulence and separation losses at the inlet zs: and outlet area)
losses (by and outlet. Yields a downwards opened
turbulence parabola. It touches the curve, in which General approach: 100
and decreased power and hydraulic losses are F
g2  0.5  A in  A out 
2
separation considered, in the point of shockless flow
Qopt . Here the flow direction is tangential HShock  s  F  Q  Qopt 
)
towards the leading edge.

The display of resulting performance curves can be toggled by the check box "All performance
curves" ( display options lower corner in the left). In case the curves are to be hidden only the
actual performance curve (red color) considering all losses will be visible.

A loss coefficient, that describes the hydraulic losses, can be calculated by pressing "Calculate in
a way, that as a result the actual performance curve (red) of the flow efficiency will go through the
best point. For this calculation the ratio between the loss coefficients is important. This ratio zh/zs
can be set in the panel Parameter, see table below, second column.

Settings

Energy and flow rate variables Coefficients influencing the Additional curves with
plus flow rate limits (for decreased power (cl) and the different speeds and

turbines additionally a max hydraulic as well as shock diameter plus system

pressure ratio) losses (zh, zs) characteristic

The two quadratic approaches towards the description of the hydraulic as well as shock losses (i.e.
turbulent and separation losses) tend to generate characteristics that have their efficiency maximum
at flow values smaller than the design flow. To overcome or mitigate this certain parameters can be
adjusted.

The general approach for the hydraulic losses is extended by an extra offset that is caused by a
blind flow QBlind due to recirculation at a flow of Q = 0. This blind flow QBlind is determined with:

QDesign
QBlind 
2  v ol
.

Herewith the hydraulic losses become:

where weight can be influenced by the weight factor in the panel Parameter, see table above,
second column.

To influence the determination of shock losses at Q < Qopt a second weight factor cw is available.
With the help of this parameter the shock losses become:

2
HShock  cw  s  F  Q  Qopt 
.

Surge [ for fans, compressors only ]

The prediction of surge line is based on the following model: The pressure difference between outlet
and inlet yields a back flow within the compressor. Amongst pressure difference and back flow a
correlation exits, that can be found in the table "Kinds of losses", column "Hydraulic losses". Within
the applied model the compressor is thought as a parallel connection between a flow source and a
hydraulic resistance. Then, surge will occur when the back flow in the hydraulic resistance becomes
as big as the flow in the flow source.

The surge line can be controlled by the loss coefficient "Surge loss coefficient". Of course it is
impossible to consider non-steady effects that are characteristic for the onset of the surge with this
model. The surge line can be displayed only in case dimensional variables has been chosen and the
checkbox "Surge line" has been set ( display options lower corner in the left).

With centrifugal fans surge may only happen if the pressure difference is big enough (~0.3 bar).

Choke [ for compressors only ]

Choked flow will happen if the flow reaches sonic speed somewhere in a duct. As the rothalpy is
constant at any point in the flow channel the temperature (critical temperature within the narrowest
cross section) at a flow at sonic speed can be calculated by:

u2c
cp T01 
Tc  2
Z   R
cp 
2
and critical sonic speed becomes:

ac  Z    R  Tc

With an approximation of the critical density and the influence of the boundary layer blockage the
choked mass flow is:

The blockage of the boundary layer is expressed by the factor B that is 0.02 by default. This
theoretical choke line can be displayed when the checkbox "Consider choke" has been set (
display options lower corner in the left).

Characteristics with different rotational speeds

With the current set of parameters performance curves with different rotational speeds can be
calculated and displayed. This procedure is feasible only if the rotational speeds are not too far from
the design point. If they are, similarity relations are not valid any longer.

Running a turbomachines with a speed different from the design point the resulting efficiency will be
smaller as the design point efficiency. To take this into account losses are scaled with the help of a
Speed/diameter correction factor nD, see table Settings 120 , last column. The resulting losses will
be:

   
2
n
Lossn  LossnDesign  1  nD  1   
  n 
 Design  
 .

Characteristics with different diameters [ for pumps, compressors only ]

Performance curves for impellers with decreased diameter can be calculated and displayed too. The
decrease of the impellers means that the geometric similarity is not given anymore. Therefore
performance curves are calculated by the following empirical correlations: H' = H (d'/d)mH and Q' = Q
(d'/d)mQ. The exponent mH should be within 2..3, mQ should be 1 or slightly bigger.

Similar to the correction of characteristics with different speeds those with different diameters will be
corrected with:

   
2
D
LossD  LossDDesign  1  nD  1   
  D  
  Design  
.

System characteristic [ for pumps, compressors only ]

An operating point, in which a turbo machine could possibly run, can be determined by a fictive
system characteristic. The display of a system characteristic can be controlled by the checkbox
"System Characteristic". The system characteristic consists of a static and a dynamic part. The
static part is dependent on the parameter "Geodetic Head" (pumps only) and "Static part"
respectively, whereas the dynamic part is dependent on the parameter "System hydraulic
resistance". The system characteristic can only be displayed if head or total pressure difference have
been chosen as variable.

5.2.1.3.2 Casey/Robinson

The Performance prediction by Casey/Robinson can be chosen by clicking at the appropriate

button. It is available for centrifugal compressors only.

Settings

Energy and flow rate variables Diverse coefficients influencing Additional curves with different
plus flow rate limits (reset default Euler work (disk friction speeds and diameter plus
coefficient), location of surge and system characteristic
flow rate with )
choke as well as efficiency

5.2.1.4 Undo

PROJECT | General | Undo

The design history can be opened by clicking the undo-button. It contains all modifications from
opening of the project or session in chronological order.

By selecting a list entry, this design step and all following ones are removed. Prior to that you can
save the current design optionally.

5.2.2 Additional

PROJECT | Additional

¢ Export 127

¢ Batch mode/ Optimization 199

¢ CFturbo BLADERUNNER 204

¢ Reference components 204

¢ Model finishing
208

5.2.2.1 Export

PROJECT | Export

The Export offers the designed geometry to be exported in standard file formats or for several CAE
applications.

For geometry export you have to:

1. Select interface in panel Interfaces

2. Select component(s)
3. Set export settings
4. Press Export data button

Export interfaces

Available interfaces are grouped into three blocks: Basic 133 , CAD, CAM 138 and CFD, FEA 176 .

Generally, there are three export types available:

· 3D model export
all parts of the 3D model according to a pre-defined model state

· Predefined 3D model export

flow domain or material domain as solid faces

· Point based export

pre-defined set of points/ splines (independent of the 3D model)

For 3D model exports, the formats IGES, STEP, STL, Parasolid and BREP can be selected. The
point density can be configured in the Model settings/ 3D model of each component (Impeller 588 ,
Stator 618 , Volute 678 ). The export unit is mm always.

For point based exports, the point density and export unit can be configured in the Model settings/
Point export of each component (Impeller 588 , Stator 618 , Volute 678 ). If the blade shape 453 is ruled
surface then points of mean lines as well as profiles (pressure and suction side) are not affected by
the model settings 588 for the point based export.
Please note: The results of surface-based operations, e.g. fillets, cannot be exported to point-based
formats.

Components

The list contains all components of the project. If the interface supports multi-component export then
you can select multiple components, otherwise only a single one. For 3D model exports, no
component can be selected because the geometry to be exported is defined by its visibility in the 3D
model.

Some of the interfaces support special component types only, e.g impellers. Therefore some of the
components could be deactivated.

Settings

Additional parameters depending on the selected export interface can be specified on the right side
of the window.

Export

Above the log area the export destination and the base name of exported files can be specified.

By pressing the Export data button the export procedure is started. Some logging information are
displayed in the log area.

For some CAD and CFD applications the exported geometry can be opened in the target application
automatically. The product version has to be selected from a list or the installation directory can be
defined manually.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

CFD setup Blade tip projection to casing recommended (see CFD setup).

Blade tip projection not accomplished. Check "Blade projection" in CFD

setup 581 .

Gap between leading/trailing edge and inlet/outlet required.

Select stator on inlet/outlet side.
Alternatively, the CFD extension can be activated (see CFD setup).

Some space around blade edges is Try to increase the distance between
required for meshing. This can be leading/ trailing edge and meridional
generated by creating a CFD extension inlet/ outlet by
or by selecting a neighbouring stator
a) moving leading/ trailing edge in
component.
meridional contour if edge is not fixed
Note for TurboGrid: a vaneless stator on inlet/ outlet 441 .
has to be selected, which has to be
b) selecting a neighbouring stator if
considered as part of the rotating
possible.
domain in TurboGrid.
or
c) activating CFD-Extension in CFD
setup/ Extension 585 .

Gap between leading/trailing edge and inlet/outlet recommended.

CFD extension can be activated (see CFD setup).

Some space around blade edges is Try to increase the distance between
recommended. leading/ trailing edge and meridional
inlet/ outlet by
a) moving leading/ trailing edge in
meridional contour if edge is not fixed
on inlet/ outlet 441 .

Problem Possible solutions

or
b) activating CFD-Extension in CFD
setup/ Extension 585 .

Small gap between blade/leading edge and inlet/outlet may cause

problems.
Increase it in case of import problems.

See message. Try to increase the distance between

leading/ trailing edge and meridional
inlet/ outlet by
a) moving leading/ trailing edge in
meridional contour if edge is not fixed
on inlet/ outlet 441 .
or
b) activating CFD-Extension in CFD
setup/ Extension 585 (only for
impellers).

Finishing Beware: "Solid" and "Solid faces" are handled differently in various
target systems.

To be taken into account if a mixed -

selection of solids and solid faces was
selected in the 3D model tree 268 .

Finishing not supported

For point-based export formats, the 3D Accept the limitation or select another
operations of the finishing 590 process 3D export format, which supports
are not available. finishing.

Blades Blades with thickness definition "perpendicular to mean surface" are not
supported.

See message. Choose another blade thickness

definition method (see thickness
definition 535 in Blade Profiles).

Volute "Flow domain" export may not work.

The STEP export of "Flow Select "Spiral.Surface" instead in the

domain.Solid" or "Flow domain.Solid 3D model tree 268 .
faces.Spiral" might be defective if the

Problem Possible solutions

spiral face spans a wrap angle of 360°.

This occurs for internal volutes.

Model Model geometry does not fit a cube of size (-500, -500, -500) to (500, 500,
settings 500).
Choose another export unit to scale geometry appropriatly.

A geometry can be correctly Change length unit in export parameters

represented only if it is fully included in dialog for selected export interface.
a cube between the points (-500,-500,-
500) and (500,500,500) due to a
Parasolid™ library limitation.

Current point export settings may cause problems in Autodesk Inventor

due to high number of points.

See message. Change number of points in Model

settings/Point export 588 .

General Completion of all design steps required.

Only for CFD-Applications. One or more Complete all design steps.

design steps were not finished.

Special license for this interface required.

License for this interface not found. Check the license information in
SETTINGS/ Licensing 209 .

Export not possible due to license restrictions.

The corresponding module is not Only designs corresponding with

licensed or CFturbo is running with a licensed modules or unmodified default
trial license. examples using a trial license can be
exported.

Material domain is not available

Components without material domain The material domain is created with

are not supported by this interface.
· Hub/Shroud materials 445 designed in
the Meridian design step
· Blade solids

For unvaned stators, the material

domain cannot be created because

Problem Possible solutions

hub/shroud solids are not connected by

the blade solid.

Model state contains no geometry for export.

See message. Select via "Set parameters" a proper

model state containing desired parts to
be exported.
Imports can only be exported via the
context menu of the 3D model tree.

Invalid viscosity value.

See message. Set a valid viscosity value in fluid

manager 229 .

Some objects didn't get meshed properly: [Face names]

The exported mesh is not watertight Check the specified faces in the 3D-
due to some invalid areas inside the model due to invalid geometry.
mesh. These areas are equivalent to the
Vary the meshing parameters.
specified faces in the warning message.

The exported mesh has overlapping Vary the meshing parameters (finer as
triangles. In this case, the number of well as coarser parameters might solve
overlapping triangles is specified in the the overlapping).
warning message.
If it can't be resolved through varying
Usually, there are just a few triangles meshing parameters, then attention
overlapping. should be paid on the generation of the
volumetric mesh in CFD-applications.
Mesh irregularities might be handled
during the pre-processing, too.

5.2.2.1.1 Remarks

Virtual and real geometry

Some export interfaces allow the export of real and virtual geometry (if available). Depending on the
selected option, some messages will be displayed for the respective components in the export's
component tree.

See the virtual geometry 582 chapter for more information.

Export limitations

· Rental or Permanent license

When using CFturbo with a normal license (rental or permanent) the export is not restricted in
any way.

· Demo/ Trial license

Export functionality can be restricted when using CFturbo with a Demo/ Trial license.
Data export can then be disabled for all individually designed components. To demonstrate the
performance of the export interfaces, the data export is enabled for CFturbo default examples only.
These default examples can be found in the CFturbo installation directory, sub-directory
Examples.

5.2.2.1.2 Basic

PROJECT | Export | Basic

Under Basic the basic export interfaces are grouped which are available independently of the
component type.

Export preconditions

The Basic export interfaces are available always.

[ I = Impeller S = Stator V = Volute MC = Multi-Component export supported ]

Menu item Description Component type

General *.geo-txt plain text file or

I S V MC
geometry *.geo-xml XML file

File contains detailed geometry data of the design for any further
processing.
Impeller/stator:
Meridional section:
z, r of hub, shroud, leading edge
Blade mean lines, Blade profiles:
x, y, z: cartesian coordinates
r: radius
t: angle
T: tangential length
m: meridional radius based length
m/mTE: meridional radius based length (0..1)
M: meridional absolute length
M/MTE: meridional absolute length (0..1)
blade angle
s: blade thickness
L: 3D length
la: lean angle
Volute:

Spiral cross sections, Diffuser cross sections:

x, y, z (cartesian coordinates)
Contour lines in circumferential direction:
x, y (cartesian coordinates)

CFturbo *.cft-geo XML file I S V MC

exchange
File contains geometry data that can be re-imported in CFturbo
(component data exchange format)
see Add component 46

Design .html, .rtf, design report

I S V MC
report *.csv, *.txt

Design information as text file;

Summary of most important design parameters
see Report 274

DXF *.dxf neutral format

I S V MC
(Drawing Interchange File Format)

File contains designed geometry of the selected component as

3D polylines.

Tetrahedral .msh, .vol, available file formats: I S V MC

volume polyMesh Fluent, Netgen, OpenFOAM, Abaqus
mesh 137
File or folder contains designed geometry as tetrahedral volume
mesh for simulation.

Performanc *.cft-pp XML file

e data The project is
File contains results of Performance prediction 115 . Two curves always exported in
are exported: versus and St versus . Units are those in its entirety
accordance to preferences 214 .

5.2.2.1.2.1 STL

Some parameters are available in the Settings area to influence the quality / resolution of the STL
geometry.

STL write mode: Format (Binary / ASCII) for writing STL files.

Minimum element length: Minimum mesh element length.

Maximum element length: Maximum mesh element length.

Granularity: Policy of mesh element construction. 5 levels from very coarse to very fine are
available.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solution

Model state contains no surfaces and no solids.

See message. STL files describe triangulated surfaces. Points

and curves cannot be represented. Select via
"Set parameters" a proper model state
containing surfaces or solids to be exported.

5.2.2.1.2.2 Tetrahedral volume mesh

In addition to the settings for triangulation 136 , the following settings are available:

Flow vs. Material domain

The user can select between:

· Flow domain: for CFD purposes, flow domain watertight surfaces are exported

· Material domain: for FEM purposes, material domain watertight surfaces are exported

Export Format

Four export formats can be selected:

Fluent: *.msh file is exported

OpenFOAM: necessary *.gz files and directory structure are exported

Netgen: *.vol file is exported

Abaqus: *.inp file is exported

5.2.2.1.3 CAD, CAM

PROJECT | Export | CAD, CAM

The CAD, CAM group contains the supported CAD, CAM product interfaces.

Export preconditions

The export availability of CAD, CAM interfaces depends on component type and design progress.

Component type Export available from design step

Impeller, stator with blades "Mean lines"

Stator without blades "Meridional contour"

Volute "Spiral development areas"

[ I = Impeller S = Stator V = Volute MC = Multi-Component export supported ]

Menu entry Description Component type

STEP, IGES, .stp; .igs; .stl; .x_t; .x_b; .brep I S V MC

STL, Parasolid...
File contains designed geometry as volume model or
selected model state.
Ansys BladeGen *.rtzt I S V MC

The file contains complete 3D impeller geometry point-by-

point.
· File | Open: select file type „Meanline File (*.rtzt)“
· select *.rtzt file

Ansys .stp; .x_t; *.x_b; I S V MC

DesignModeler
File contains designed geometry as volume model.

Ansys .stp; .x_t; *.x_b I S V MC

SpaceClaim 142
File contains designed geometry as volume model.
· File | Open: select exported file

AutoCAD 149 *-.txt I S V MC

Lisp script xyz2spline (part of CFturbo) creates splines from

imported points.
· Select "AutoCAD Classic" Workspace
· Load "xyz2spline.lsp" under Manage | Load Application
· Run command "xyz2spline" and select *.txt file

CATIA 156 *.catvbs I S V MC

The macro generates a surface model + generating splines.

· Tools | Macro | Macros
· Select macro library and macro, Run

Creo .ibl, .pts I S V MC

Parametric 157
*.ibl contains geometry defined by 3D points.
*.pts files are exported for impellers only and contain
information about blade thickness defined by 2D points
· Home | New | Part <name> (if no file is open)
· Model | Get data | Import
· select *.ibl or *.pts file

hyperMILL *.stp I S V MC

· File | Open

Inventor 173 *.bas I S V MC

The macro generates a surface model + generating splines.

· Tools | Visual Basic Editor
· VB
o File | New project
o File | Import file, select *.bas
o Tools | Macro, select “Main”, Run

NX *.dat I S V MC

Some files per component are created.

· New | New Project file <name> (if no file is open)
· Application | Modeling

To import curves (hub, shroud, material domain, secondary

flow path and volute contour curves):
· File | Import | Points from file
· select *.dat file
· Use "fit curve" to make a spline through desired points
To generate surfaces (blade, volute, diffuser):
· Insert | surface | Through points
· Row degree <= number of blade profile sections
· Column degree <= Row degree-1
· Points from file
· select *.dat file

Please note: If the mentioned menu options are not

available, the appropriate commands have to be created:
a) "Tools/Customize" or right click on any toolbar/menu,
"Customize..."
b) "Commands", "Insert/Curve/Spline..." or
"Insert/Surface/Through Points..."
c) Integrate selected item via Drag and Drop in a menu or
toolbar

SOLIDWORKS *.swb I S V MC

The macro generates a surface model + generating splines.

· Tools | Macro | Run: select *.swb

ZW3D .stp; .x_t; *.x_b I S V MC

File contains designed geometry as volume model.

5.2.2.1.3.1 Ansys BladeGen (Ansys)

Geometry can be exported in two alternative formats:

· RTZT (Camber line data file)

· BGI (Batch input file)

Export format can be selected under Settings:

If the exported RTZT-File is expected to be imported in Ansys BladeGen, enabling cut-off of rounded
edges is recommended, since blade edges shape must be specified using Blade Property Dialog
within Ansys BladeGen. Therefore, the shape of the blade edges designed in CFturbo and the ones
created in Ansys BladeGen could differ substantially depending on these settings. Besides that,
importing rounded blades could fail in Ansys BladeGen.

If the exported RTZT-File is expected to be re-imported in CFturbo, disabling cut-off of rounded edges
is recommended, since whole thickness distribution including rounded edges can be imported in
CFturbo matching the blade shape exactly.

Ansys BladeGen import

In Ansys BladeGen, by choosing Ellipse type and setting a ratio value for leading or trailing edges,
Ansys BladeGen will always apply the elliptic shape to the blade camberline/ thickness definition.
This will override any thickness distribution imported for the region of the ellipse.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solution

Blades with asymmetric thickness distribution not supported.

Blades with asymmetric thickness distribution -

will be imported in Ansys BladeGen in such a
way that the thickness distribution is symmetric
with respect to the camberline.

Edge shape should be specified in Ansys BladeGen.

Ansys BladeGen settings will override any blade -

edges thickness distribution imported from
CFturbo (more information above).

5.2.2.1.3.2 Ansys SpaceClaim (Ansys)

There are 2 alternative methods how to transfer the geometry from CFturbo to Ansys SpaceClaim:

1. Using the "CAD, CAM/ Ansys SpaceClaim" export interface

When using the Ansys SpaceClaim interface, the following files are exported:

· Separate STEP files *.stp for each selected component

The STEP files contain solid bodies for the CFturbo flow or material domain, which can be
selected under "Parameters" in the CFturbo export dialog.
STEP files can be added to the Ansys SpaceClaim project by "Assembly/ File" and will be
displayed in the "Structure" panel:

· One Python script *.py

This script file is used to extract the names of the single solid parts ("Named Selections") from
the STEP files because these names are not detected automatically while opening in Ansys
SpaceClaim.
To run the script:
1) Open the "Script Editor" by "File/ New/ Script"
2) Open and run script:

Hint: It's more easy to select the script file together with the STEP files (see above)

The detected names are visible in Ansys SpaceClaim on the panel "Groups". Ansys
SpaceClaim and Ansys have a full associativity. Therefore, the created groups will be available
as named selections in Ansys Meshing and Ansys CFX.

Click on a specific group to display the objects that are held in this group.

The described procedure is carried out automatically when the option "Open exported files" is
selected in the CFturbo export dialog.

2. Using the "Basic/STEP" export interface

When using the generic STEP export interface all parts currently displayed in the CFturbo 3D
view 259 are exported.

Names are visible in Ansys SpaceClaim only if solid faces are selected in the CFturbo 3D view. The
disadvantage in this case is that the Ansys SpaceClaim model contains only surfaces and no solid
bodies.

Following settings should be checked under Ansys SpaceClaim Options in order to allow the
recognition of names for each imported surface:

· When importing the geometry files and the Python script together, there is a chance that
SpaceClaim will automatically activate the “record” function in the script editor. It is strongly
advised to check and deactivate this feature, to ensure the proper function of the pre-built Python

script.

· Depending on the complexity of the geometry, SpaceClaim may try to simplify the geometry
imports. Any simplification will prevent the Python script from functioning properly. It is therefore
advised to deactivate the “Clean and simplify geometry” option in the SpaceClaim Options under
the “General” entry in the “Import options” section.

· Under certain circumstances SpaceClaim is not able to import a geometry component properly.
This will result in missing faces and the geometry component in being unclosed. This is a known
problem in SpaceClaim, Defect Number: 174865.
As a Result, the affected body will appear transparent.

When running the Python script, it will detect the problematic body, mark it red and ask for a
repair. If the repair suggestion is confirmed, the script tries to create a closed volume body by
rebuilding the missing faces. Since the original geometry information are partially lost, a creation of
named selections for the affected body will not be possible.
After the repair attempt the body will be colored green while repaired faces will be marked red.

· Under certain circumstances some parts of the geometry are missing when forwarding the
geometry from SpaceClaim to Ansys meshing. The critical area is mainly the splitter edge of
double volutes. In SpaceClaim the geometry looks fine. This is a known problem in SpaceClaim
since version 19.2, Defect Number: 130684.
As workaround, you can create a new Windows environment variable with the name
ANS_READER_HEAL and set the value to TRUE.

5.2.2.1.3.3 AutoCAD (Autodesk)

The data import from CFturbo is realized by a LISP-script.

Loading the LISP-Application and Import of the Geometry

· Tools | Load Application (command: _appload)

· Select file "xyz2spline.lsp" from CFturbo-installation directory, load and close dialog

· Execute loaded LISP-application by command xyz2spline

· Select and open *.txt file exported from CFturbo

· Attention: If "; Error: Bad argument type: FILE nil" occurs as error message it can be bypassed by
typing the filename in the open-file-dialog manually instead of selecting the file by mouse click.

Selection of xyz2spline.lsp file

Construction of Impeller

Creating the blades

· Use the command _loft to create surfaces from curves

Sample-view after data import

Blade surface gerated by using the _loft command

Creating rotational surfaces (Hub, Shroud)

· Command _revolve

· Select hub and shroud curves

· Specify axis start point or define axis by [Object/X/Y/Z] <Object>: 0,0,0

· Specify axis endpoint: 0,0,1

· Specify angle of revolution or [STart angle/Reverse/EXpression] <360>:360

Hub and Shroud surfaces

Construction of Volute

Sample-view after data import

Creating the open part of volute geometry

1. Command _loft

2. Select profile-curves to loft (part by part, starting with the open one)

3. Enter an option [Guides/Path/Cross-sections only] <Cross-sections only>: cross-sections only

Settings for lofted surface

4. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for remaining parts of the volute

5.2.2.1.3.4 CATIA (Dassault Systèmes)

The data-import is realized by a macro that is created for each geometry individually by CFturbo. The
macro is loaded and executed in Inventor.

Open the macro dialog

· Tools | Mak ro | Mak ros or <Alt> + <F8>

· Select an existing macro library

· Create a new macro library: <Mak robibliothek en…>, add directory which contains the macro files
created in CFturbo (<Vorhandene Bibliothek hinzufügen…>)

· Select macro library and execute macro

5.2.2.1.3.5 Creo Parametric (PTC)

The following files are exported by CFturbo for impellers:

· -hub.ibl, -shroud.ibl: points of hub and shroud

· *-profile.ibl: points for blade profiles

· *.ibl: all points for hub, shroud and blades

The following files are exported by CFturbo for volutes:

· *-contour-line.ibl: spiral contour points

· *-section-closed.ibl: points for all spiral, cut-water and closed diffuser sections

· *-section-open.ibl: points for all open diffuser sections

Import of curves

1. Home | New | Part

2. Model | Get Data | Import. Select .pts or .ibl file

3. In "File" dialog, select desired import options

4. Confirm to finish import process

All curves can be imported in this way

Creating revolution surfaces

1. Model | Datum | Axis: create axis of revolution selecting the two proper datum planes. (Note: use
Ctrl for multi-selection)

2. Model | Datum | Sketch: create a new sketch

· Select the plane containing the curve to be revolved. Reference and orientation items are set
automatically after selection.

· Sketch | Sketching | Project: do a projection of the curve selecting the curve. Select option
"Single" and click on "Close"

· Finalize sketching task by clicking on "OK"

3. Select the curve and click on Model | Shapes | Revolve

4. Click on field "Axis" under tab "Placements" and select the revolution axis. Surface of revolution
will be generated

5. Finalize revolve task by clicking on "OK"

Creating lofted surfaces

Lofted surfaces are created from blade profiles and spiral section curves.

1. Model | Surface | Boundary Blend

2. Select desired curves (use Ctrl for multi-selection)

3. Finalize Boundary Blend task by clicking on "OK"

5.2.2.1.3.6 Inventor (Autodesk)

The data-import is realized by a macro that is created for each geometry individually by CFturbo. The
macro is loaded and executed in Inventor.

To execute a macro it has to be imported into an existing VBA-project.

· Tools | VBA Editor

· Open file-open-dialog by File | Import File... and select *.bas macro-file, possibly a new project has
to be created File | New Project

· Execute imported macro: Run | Run Macro (F5) close dialog by Run

· The time for executing depends on the complexity of the geometry.

Troubleshooting

· Selecting the maximal number of points for one or all components in Model settings/Point
export 588 could cause too large exported files and "Out of memory" error message while importing
in Inventor:

To avoid this problem, reduce the selected number of points.

5.2.2.1.4 CFD, FEA

PROJECT | Export | CFD, FEA

The CFD, FEA group contains the supported CFD and FEA product interfaces.

The next table display a summary of the most important information related to all supported export
interfaces.

[ I = Impeller S = Stator V = Volute MC = Multi-Component export supported ]

Component
Menu entry Description
type

ANSA *.igs I S V MC

· File | Open
· Select *.igs file

Ansys ICEM- .tinXML, .stp I S V MC

CFD 181
A STEP file with named geometries is created. The names
are visible in ICEM-CFD if the file is imported via

Work bench Reader.

Parameters are saved in a separate XML file.

Ansys Mechanical .stp; .x_t; *.x_b I S V MC

Select "Import geometry" in the Mechanical Start screen.

Ansys Meshing 183 .stp; .x_t; *.x_b I S V MC

Ansys Workbench:
· Add "Mesh" container to "Project Schematic"
· Right click on "Geometry" inside the "Mesh" container:
select "Import geometry"
Ansys TurboGrid 184 *.tse or *.inf, *.curve I S V MC

2 alternative formats are available:

a) Session file *.tse (not available within Ansys Workbench)
4 files are created: a session file <filename>.tse and
3 geometry files <filename>_hub.curve,
<filename>_shroud.curve, <filename>_profile.curve.
Load the session file <filename>.tse under Session |
Play Session.
b) Initialization file *.inf
4 files are created: a initialization file <filename>.inf and
3 geometry files <filename>_hub.curve,
<filename>_shroud.curve, <filename>_profile.curve.
Load the initialization file <filename>.inf under File | Load
TurboGrid Init File.
Alternatively you can open the curve files
(<filename>_hub.curve, <filename>_shroud.curve,
<filename>_profile.curve) manually under File | Load Profile
Points. Beside the selection of the *.curve files one has to
specify the number of blades, define the z axis as rotational
axis, select the cartesian coordinate system and the length
unit specified in CFturbo for export

Ansys Vista TF .fil, .con, .geo, .aer, *.cor I S V MC

5 files are created:

- default file <filename>.fil
- control data file <filename>.con
- geometry data file <filename>.geo
- aerodynamic data file <filename>.aer
- correlation data file <filename>.cor

Run compiled executable version of the Vista TF code.

Exported files need to be in the same folder than the
executable file.

CFturbo FEA .cftfea, .step I S V MC

The *.cftfea file contains the project information needed to

load the case in CFturbo FEA. The *.step files contain the
geometry in STEP format.

Fidelity AutoGrid 186 *.geomTurbo I S V MC

· File | New Project

· “Initialize a New Project from a geomTurbo File”
· Select *.geomTurbo file

Fidelity Hexpress *.stp I S V MC

File contains designed geometry as volume.

Fidelity IGG *.dat I S V MC

Multiple data files are generated: section.dat, diffusor.dat,

curves.dat
· File | Import | IGG Data
· Select *.dat file
· Repeat steps for remaining files

Fidelity Pointwise *.step I S V MC

· File | Import | Database

· Select *.step file

GridPro .stp; .stl I S V MC

File contains designed geometry as volume model.

Helyx .helyx, .stl I S V MC

The *.helyx file contains all the CFD project information.

The *.stl files contain the geometry in STL format as
triangulated 3D surfaces.

scFLOW *.step I S V MC

The *.step files contain the geometry in STEP format.

Simerics 189
*.spro, *.stl I S V MC

The *.spro file contains all project information. The *.stl files
contain the geometry in STL format as triangulated
surfaces.

In SimericsMP/ SimericsMP+: Select *.spro file under File |

Open
Simcenter STAR- *.stp I S V MC
CCM+
· File | Import | Import Surface Mesh...
· Select *.stp file

SimScale ssc, .step I S V MC

The *.ssc file contains all project information. The geometry

is exported in *.step format. The case can be transferred to
SimScale and run automatically from CFturbo if desired.

TCFD 198 .tcfd, .stl I S V MC

The *.tcfd file contains all the CFD project information.

The *.stl files contain the geometry in STL format as
triangulated 3D surfaces. The .tcfd file is read and the
simulation is performed automatically.
In TCFD run command:
$ CFDProcessor -setup fan.tcfd -allrun &
More info at CFD support website

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Flow inlet does not match previous outlet.

If possible, activate the RSI connection in CFD

Im peller - Im peller setup of the impeller 587 .

Im peller - Stator

Im peller - Volute

Stator - Im peller

Inlet geometry was defined in such a way that it

Stator - Stator does not match the inlet of the previous
component. See geometric coupling 67 for more
Stator - Volute details.

Flow outlet does not match next inlet.

Problem Possible solutions

Outlet geometry was defined in such a way that

Stator - Stator it does not match the outlet of the next
component. See geometric coupling 67 for more
Stator - Volute details.

5.2.2.1.4.1 Ansys ICEM-CFD

This interface supports the script solution CFturbo2ICEM, a script for automatic geometry generation
and meshing of CFturbo components. Therefore, it should be used only in combination with
CFturbo2ICEM. Detailed information can be found on the CFturbo website.

Two files are exported: a *.tinXML file containing all meshing parameters specified in CFturbo and a
*.stp file containing the designed geometry with specific naming conventions.

For more information about using CFturbo2ICEM please see the available documentation.

5.2.2.1.4.2 Ansys Meshing

Ansys Meshing can be used within Ansys Workbench only. Using the CFturbo Workbench
extension is recommended to create smooth workflows very comfortable.

For manual use of Ansys Meshing the following prerequisite needs to be fulfilled in order to use pre-
defined names for the geometry parts:

· For Ansys Workbench

versions older than
2022R1, the Parasolid
file format should be
selected in CFturbo
instead of STEP,
because Ansys
Meshing is not able to
detect the names from
the STEP file in those
versions.

The export format can

be selected in the
Settings area.

· In Ansys Workbench,
the usage of Named
Selections must be
enabled manually:
- menu Tools/ Options
- select Geometry
Import bottom left
- scroll down to Basic
Options on the right
- Activate Named
Selections option
- set Filtering Prefixes
to NS

5.2.2.1.4.3 Ansys TurboGrid

Troubleshooting

· Surfaces can be described in Ansys TurboGrid by two different options: "Ruled" (linear) or "B-
Spline".
More than 4 sections could result in an oscillating surface if the curves are not located exactly on
the surface.

To avoid the problem you should select the Surface Type 'Ruled' under 'Blade Set' in the Ansys
TurboGrid object tree.

· For open impellers and stators, a small region between leading/ trailing edge and meridional inlet/
outlet could result in the following error message while importing in Ansys TurboGrid:
"Error extending the shroud tip line. Try reducing the "Tip expansion factor" value."
Two options are available to increase this region:
a) moving the leading/ trailing edge in meridional contour. The edge has not to be fixed on inlet/
outlet 441 . This option incurs a geometrical modification
b) activating a CFD extension at inlet (for radial or mixed flow turbine impellers) or outlet (for the
rest of impellers) in CFD setup/ Extension 585 . This option does not incur a geometrical
modification of the component but of the neighboring one if exists.

5.2.2.1.4.4 Fidelity AutoGrid

The geometry data for impeller is exported by CFturbo to „geomTurbo“-files which can be loaded by
AutoGrid.

· Start IGG

· Change to AutoGrid5-mode: Modules | AutoGrid5

· Open a new project: File | New Project

· Close dialog by Initialize a New Project from a geomTurbo File

· If the model have more than one vaned component, add so many rows as additional vaned
components

· Select *.geomTurbo-file

· For unshrouded impellers the tip clearance has to be applied in AutoGrid manually.

5.2.2.1.4.5 Simerics

Geometry settings

In addition to the STL settings 136 , the user can select which files should be exported.

Export all files: Configuration file (*.spro) and STL files and gas property files 196 (compressible
fluids only) are exported .

Export configuration file only: STL files are not exported. This option can be useful for saving
export time if the user wants to generate a new configuration file with different settings (e.g. mesh
parameters, rotational speed, boundary condition values, fluid data etc.). In this case, all geometrical
export requirements (like solid trimming) are disabled in the CFturbo Export window.

Export STL files only: The configuration file is not exported. This option is useful, e.g. if STL files for
some (but not all) components have to be exported again due to an unsatisfactory triangulation. In
this case, the original configuration file, which refers to all components, should not be overwritten.

Mesh settings

Mesh settings are specified globally for all selected CFturbo components to be exported.

The following global mesh parameters are available:

· Min. cell size

· Max. cell size

· Cell size on surfaces

If the user wants to set specific parameters for predefined regions, the option “Use local cell size on
surfaces” must be activated.
If not, the global value “Cell size on surfaces” is used for all regions. Specific mesh parameters can
be set for the following regions:

Rotational symmetric components

Region Description
Hub -
Shroud -
Blade sides Blades suction and pressure sides
Blades LE / TE / Tip Blades edges leading, trailing and tip
Secondary flow path hub Hub material domain surfaces
Secondary flow path shroud Shroud material domain surfaces
Inlet -
Outlet -

For RSI-Connection surfaces, the “Hub” parameters are used for meshing:

Secondary flow path mesh parameters are useful if a fine meshing is necessary in gap zones
between solid bodies and casing.
Enabling the option "Refine casing", local cell sizes set for hub and shroud are also used for the
casing surfaces.

Volutes

Region Description
Spiral -
Diffuser -
Cut-water -
Splitter Volute splitter (double volutes)
Inlet -
Outlet -

For RSI-Connection surfaces, the “Spiral” parameters are used for meshing:

In case the volute extension is exported, “Diffuser” mesh parameters are used for the extension
walls.
“Inlet” and “Outlet” mesh parameters are used for the extension inlet and outlet:

Refinement zones

In some cases mesh refinement zones are more effective than applying local mesh sizes. This might
be true e.g. for secondary flow path simulations where very small gaps have to be meshed. The
images below show a typical case:

Mesh resulting from setting local m esh param eters on hub and shroud as w ell as casing surfaces

Mesh resulting from using refinem ent zones in isolated regions

The use of refinement zones allows for high quality refinement in regions with small gaps, avoiding
high numbers of cells. Refinement zones can be applied within the whole geometry and can be set
by defining the refinement cell size and cylindrical refinement area:

Solver settings

The following parameters are available:

· Solver selection (Simerics-MP or Simerics-MP+)

· Selection of simulation type: Steady or transient
· Number of iterations
· Result saving frequency (only for transient simulations)

For transient simulations, two special parameters are available. These parameters differ from the
Simerics original ones, but are more comfortable for turbomachinery:
· Number of revolutions: number of impeller rotations to be simulated. The original Simerics
parameter “Simulation Time (Duration)” is calculated using this new parameter and the rotational
speed of the impeller. Default value is 3 revolutions.
· Rotation angle per step: number of degrees the mesh is rotated by per step. The original
Simerics parameter “Number of time steps” is calculated using this new parameter and the number
of revolutions to be simulated. Default value is 3 degrees.

· A global value for converge criterion can be set. This value is used for all active modules. In case
the default Simerics value (0.001 for steady simulations and 0.1 for transient simulations) is used,
values are not written in the SPRO-file allowing Simerics to change the values automatically if the
user switches interactively in the Simerics-GUI between steady and transient simulation.
· Numeric scheme and Relaxation values

· Cavitation (activated by default for pumps). Not available for compressible flow (compressors, gas
turbines, fans)
· Reversible pump turbine: enabling this option, adapted boundary conditions are used to
simulate the pump as a turbine.

· Turbomachinery expressions are useful to check the simulation convergence.

IMPORTANT: Plotting of user defined expressions is not supported for Simerics versions lower
than 4.2.8 and can cause problems in these versions.

Real gas

If the fluid to be used in the simulation is compressible, data for density, enthalpy, dynamic viscosity
and thermal conductivity can be exported. Precondition for that is that the gas model is either
CoolProp 235 or REFPROP 239 . In that case the necessary entries will be done in the spro-file. The
data will be derived from the selected gas and its gas model within a pressure and temperature
range. Please note, that the size of this range will influence the computational time necessary to
calculate all data.

Not supported characters

The character "_" is not allowed for component names for the time being.

5.2.2.1.4.6 TCFD

In addition to the Triangulation settings 136 , the following parameters are available:

Files parameters

Allows to define which files should be exported.

Export all files: Configuration file (*.tcfd) and STL files are exported.

Export configuration file only: STL files are not exported. This option can be useful for saving
export time if the user wants to generate a new configuration file with different settings (rotational
speed, boundary condition values, fluid data etc.). In this case, all geometrical export requirements
(like solid trimming) are disabled in the CFturbo Export window.

Full 360° or periodic segment

Allows to define whether the full geometry or only a periodic segment should be exported for selected
rotational symmetric components.

Not supported characters

Following characters are not permitted: 'space' < > [ ] { } ( ) \ ' ; : " ? ! * & ^ % $ # @ ¦ °

5.2.2.2 Batch mode/ Optimization

PROJECT | Batch mode/ Optimization

This feature can be used to prepare batch mode runs of CFturbo for systematic parameter variations
(DoE) or configure optimization jobs, see Batch mode 37 .

Load, Save

The working directory is displayed on top of the dialog.

Complete configurations as batch mode files in XML format (*.cft-batch) can be loaded by Load ...
and saved by Save or Save as... .

The input CFturbo file is the currently opened project always, whose directory is specified in relative
notation by default. A copy of the current CFturbo project is stored in the destination directory of the
batch mode file (*.cft-batch).

If CFturbo is running inside Ansys Workbench, the batch mode configuration is saved
automatically.

More information about CFturbo inside Ansys workbench is available on the CFturbo website:
https://cfturbo.com/software/interfaces-workflows/extension-for-ansys-workbench

Input parameters

All available parameters of the project, which can be modified manually or by an optimization
software directly during a batch run, are displayed in a tree structure according to the components
and design steps.

Save modified CFturbo project [not available inside Ansys Workbench]

If parameters of the CFturbo project will be modified during the batch run, the resulting CFturbo file
(*.cft) can be saved optionally.

Each parameter can be activated or deactivated individually.

For activated parameters the range can be specified optionally either by

· a small dialog (click on the button on right side of the range cell)

· using the following syntax:

Resolution Range

Continuous <Min. value>:<Max. value>

Discrete <Min. value>:<Max. value>:<Count>

<Value1>,<Value2>,<Value3>...

If a discrete range definition was specified a list of the discrete values is displayed as hint when
moving the mouse over the cell.

Output parameters

All parameters, which are a result of any geometry modifications during a batch run, are displayed in
a tree structure according to the components and design steps.
The modified values are saved in the .cft-res file at the end of the batch run for further processing,
e.g. for checking the smallest cross section between neighboring blades or the automatically
calculated blade angles. These values are typically used as constraints during optimization runs.

Export actions

On this page the export actions for the batch run can be specified. Multiple export actions can be
defined by selecting the export formats and the corresponding components on the right side (very
similar to the Export 127 dialog) and pressing the Add button.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solution

Export requirements are not fulfilled.

Some of selected components no longer fulfill Remove or replace the affected export actions.
the export requirements.

Component selection already used.

Applicable only in Ansys Workbench mode. Remove affected export actions.

At least one selected component was already
used for the same export interface in previous
export actions. The critical export item is
highlighted in red.

5.2.2.3 CFturbo BLADERUNNER

PROJECT | CFturbo BLADERUNNER

This feature can be used to start the CFturbo BLADERUNNER application for running multiple CFD
simulations automatically, create performance curves/ maps and compare different designs.
The currently opened project is used in BLADERUNNER for further processing.

More information about BLADERUNNER is available on the CFturbo website.

5.2.2.4 Reference components

PROJECT | Reference components

This functionality can be used for simultaneous display of various designs to compare each other and
for purposeful modification.

Using the Add-button any reference project (*.CFT- file) can be added. All components of the
reference project are grouped under the selected file name.

Each component has its own color and line width (panel Options). Multiple components can be
selected using <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys. Clicking on the group header area selects all components of
the corresponding project, <Ctrl> <A> selects all components.

With the Remove-button the selected reference project with all its components can be deleted from
the list. However single reference components may be deactivated by the check box at the beginning
of the line.

Display in dialogs

Reference geometries are displayed in the dialogs with selected color and line width. Numerical
values appear as small hints on input fields when mouse is moved over it.

Down right in the design step dialog windows you could completely
switch off the display of reference geometries and start the
configuration dialog.

Please note: If you add reference designs in a design step dialog the
imported geometry could be invisible initially if it's far away from the
currently designed geometry. There is no automatic scaling of the
diagram.

Display in 3D-model

Reference geometry is displayed as 3D model

additionally.

All reference geometries are arranged in the

model tree in the region "Reference designs",
whereas the single parts can be configured like
the normal geometry.

5.2.2.5 Model finishing

PROJECT | Model finishing

Model finishing is started globally for all components of the project.

Each vaned component has their own model finishing configuration, see Model finishing for
impeller 590 .

This operation could be time-consuming because the model finishing of a single component takes
10-50 seconds.

5.3 SETTINGS
This menu is used for specifying some general program settings:

¢ Licensing 209

¢ Preferences 209

¢ Approximation functions 226

¢ Fluids 229

¢ Profiles 244

5.3.1 Licensing

SETTINGS | General | Licensing

See General/ Licensing 20

5.3.2 Preferences

SETTINGS | Preferences

This menu item is used for global program options. Alternatively it can be accessed by the File 102

menu.

The dialog contains several topics on the left side and the corresponding settings on the right side.

There are 3 main groups of topics available on the left side:

· General 210

· Units 214

· Impeller/ Stator 220

5.3.2.1 General

SETTINGS | Preferences | General

Topic GENERAL is used for global program options.

Global settings

Language of online help

In this dialog the language of online help can be set. The default is English.

Warning before license expiration

Furthermore you can specify the

number of days for license expiration
warning at startup. Default value is 20
days.

The warning message looks as

follows:

Initial view after loading file

Select which view should be displayed after file loading. Choosing the 3D Model will increase the
time needed for loading, because the model gets updated first.

Reset "Additional Views" configuration

Deletes the configuration of "Additional Views" of all dialogs. The configuration contains the visibility
as well as width and height of the visible elements.

Ask for deactivating automatic calculations when loading older file

3D model

Mouse handling

Here you can assign functions (Rotate, Zoom, Move) to the mouse buttons (Left, Middle, Right) for
handling the 3D model 259 .

Switch to suitable model state after Model finishing

If this option is checked the 3D view will be updated after running Model finishing 590 in order to
visualize related geometry instantly (e. g. Flow domain 591 ).

Program updates

Check for available updates

Optionally, you can check for available updates at program startup. 3 alternative intervals are
available: at each start, weekly, monthly.

An update check can be started directly using the button "Check now..." (see Check for Updates 250

). The date of last update check is displayed for information.

5.3.2.2 Units

SETTINGS | Preferences | Units

Unit settings can be used for selecting the display units in CFturbo.

It's divided in 3 parts:

¢ Basic units : general unit selection

215

¢ Specific speed : selecting a suitable specific speed definition

217

¢ Other units 219 : some additional unit settings, like flow/blade angle and nss definition

5.3.2.2.1 Basic units

Here the physical units used in the dialogs can be set.

Following grouped units are available:

Category Unit Symbo available

Geometry Length L mm, in, m

Area A mm², m², in²

Volume V mm³, m³, in³

Angle °, - (radiant)

Energy Specific energy, Y, h m²/s², J/kg, kJ/kg, Nm/kg, Ws/kg, ft²/s², BTU/lb
Enthalpy

Head H m, ft

Pressure p MPa, PSI, bar, mbar, Pa, kPa, mm H20, mm Hg, in

H20, ft H20

Stress MPa, Pa, PSI

Temperature T °C, K, °F, °R

Power P W, kW, hp

Torque T Nm, lbft, lbin

Force F N, kN, lbf

Flow Volume flow Q m³/h, m³/min, m³/s, l/min, l/s, ft³/min, ft³/s, gpm, gps

Mass flow m kg/s, lb/s

Velocity v m/s, ft/s

Swirl v·r m²/s, ft²/s, in²/s

Fluid Density kg/m³, lb/ft³

Dynamic viscosity Pa·s, cP

Kinematic viscosity m²/s, mm²/s, ft²/s

Heat capacity cp J/(kg·K), BTU/(lb·°F)

Molar weight M kg/mol

Thermal conductivity W/(m·K)

Other Ratio x/y %, - (absolute)

Revolutions n /min, /s

Mass m kg, lb

Time t s, m, h

You can simultaneously change all units to SI or US system by pressing the buttons above.

5.3.2.2.2 Specific speed

Here the specific speed definition can be selected. This definition is mainly used for the
Approximation functions 226 .

The definitions mainly differ in the units used for rotational speed, flow rate and energy transmission.

Following definitions are available:

· General specific speed nq* (dimensionless)

* Q1 2
nq  n
Y3 4

· Type number s
(dimensionless)
Q1 2
s  n s  2n
Y3 4

· Speed coefficient
1 2 Q1 2
  2.11  n
3 4 Y3 4

· European definition nq

Q [m3 s]1 2
n q  n [min 1 ]
H [m]3 4

· US definition Ns

Q [gpm ]1 2
Ns  n [rpm ]
H [ ft ]3 4

· Asian definition nq'

Q [m 3 min]1 2
n q  n [min 1 ]
H [m]3 4

Furthermore it's possible to select an alternatively specific speed definition using the separate units
for Revolutions, Flow rate and Head.

On the bottom side some information for the currently selected specific speed definition is displayed.
The Factor on dimensionless value is the factor used to convert the General specific speed nq* to
the currently selected definition. Furthermore the Typical range of the specific speed definition for
centrifugal, mixed-flow and axial machines is displayed in the table.

5.3.2.2.3 Other units

Here some additional unit settings can be selected.

Blade/flow angle

angles measured against circumferential

direction

(internal angles of the velocity triangle)

allowed range: 0° ... 180°

" cm

angles measured against meridional direction

allowed range: -90° ... +90°

Suction specific speed

There are 3 alternative possibilities to define the suction specific speed for pumps:

· SI definition (dimensionless) nss *

* Q1 2
nss  n 34
g  NPSH 

· European definition nss

Qm3 s
12
nss  n/ min  34
NPSHm

· US definition Nss
12
Qgpm 
Nss  nrpm  34
NPSHft 

5.3.2.3 Impeller/ Stator

SETTINGS | Preferences | Impeller/ Stator

These settings define properties related to stator and impeller design.

It's divided in 3 parts:

¢ Progression diagrams : x-axis definition of the progression diagrams in design step windows
221

¢ Initial default settings : used by default when creating a new impeller

222

¢ Warning level : define recommended range and warning level for some important values
224

5.3.2.3.1 Progression diagrams

At Progression diagrams one can specify, which parameter should be used for the x-axis of the
progression diagrams in the Meridional contour 423 and Blading windows (Meanline 495 , Profiles 538 ,
Edges 541 ,).

· abs. meridional length M

· rel. meridional length M/MMax

· abs. radius based meridional length m

· rel. radius based meridional length m/mMax

· abs. radius r

· rel. radius r/rMax

· abs. axial length z

· rel. axial z/ z Max

· abs. chord length l

· rel. chord length l/lMax

Some constellations may yield undefined x-values due to reference (e.g. rMax , z Max ) values. Those
constellations will be marked in the diagrams. One should use another option in such a case.

5.3.2.3.2 Initial default settings

At Initial default settings one can select which settings should be used by default when creating a
new impeller. Individual settings can be specified for each machine type (Pump, Fan, Compressor,
Turbine), separately for each impeller subtype.

Of course these settings can be modified manually in the design step dialogs if required.

5.3.2.3.3 Warning level

At Warning level one can specify recommended ranges and warning levels for some important
impeller properties.

Blade angle B

Blade angle at leading edge trailing edge B2

The usual and the recommended range can be specified. The displayed error levels cannot
be customized.

Usually, the blade angle values at the outer blade tip/ shroud span of the blade are
checked.
An exception is the outlet side of centrifugal impellers: due to the nearly constant radius the
values at all spans are checked.

Max. difference hub-to-shroud

This max. allowed B

along leading or trailing edge is used to avoid highly twisted blades.

Max. camber angle

This max. allowed value for = B

=| B2
- | is used to avoid too high flow deflection on a
B1
single span.

The values are used to

· colorize the display of resulting blade angle B2
in the main dimensions 291 window of
centrifugal impellers
· create warning messages in the Blade properties 479 window/ design step
· colorize the blade angle values B1
and B2
in the
- Blade properties 479 window
- Blade mean line 495 window
- Blade profile 574 (Airfoil) window

Max. blade blockage

Blade thickness s is blocking a part of the flow passage u = number of blades. The blockage
factor is calculated as F = s / u.
The max. allowed blade blockage factor can be defined.

Blade overlap factor (for centrifugal impellers only)

The overlap factor is defined as F = wrap angle pitch angle t (t = 360°/ number of blades).
Min. and max. limits can be specified to avoid too low overlapping (poor flow guidance) and too high
overlapping (high flow blockage).

Stagger angle (for airfoil/ hydrofoil design only)

Min. and max. limits can be specified to avoid unreasonable blade twist.

Slip angle

Warning and error level can be specified to avoid high deviation between blade and flow direction at
trailing edge.

5.3.3 Approximation functions

SETTINGS | Database | Approximation functions

CFturbo uses many approximation functions. These functions are based on published measurement
data that facilitate the forecast of optimal or accessible values.

In this dialog the approximation functions are displayed graphically and can be customized. If an
open project is available then only the project relevant functions are displayed, otherwise all functions
are available.

Currently about 150 functions are available for the following individual component types and sub-
types:

Axial impeller Centrifugal impeller Casing

· Axial Compressor Impeller · Centrifugal Compressor Impeller · Stator

o Standard o Standard

· Axial Fan Impeller · Centrifugal Fan Impeller · Volute

o Standard o Standard
o Automotive Cooling o Squirrel cage

· Axial Gas Turbine Rotor · Radial Gas Turbine Rotor

o Standard o Standard
o Rocket Engine

· Axial Pump Impeller · Centrifugal Pump Impeller

o Standard o Standard
o Inducer o Wastewater
o Barske (low nq)

· Francis Turbine Runner

o Standard

Each function has a hard coded default function. For each of these functions custom point wise
defined curves can be added alternatively. These custom defined curves are saved in the file
Functions.cftfu that contains the custom defined functions only. The default functions are not saved
in any external file and cannot be deleted. The default functions can only be deactivated by defining
any custom function that is saved in the Functions file.

On the top left at File location, the name of the file is shown that contains all user-defined
functions. In general this file is called Functions.cftfu, and is located in the installation directory of
CFturbo. Modifications to functions are saved automatically if you leave the dialog window by
pressing the OK-button. In case the user has no write permissions one could choose a different
directory to save the file. Changing filename and directory is possible by using the Save as-function.
By clicking the Open-button a previously saved functions file can be opened.

The link to the functions file is part of each major/minor installation (CFturbo x.y). All updates by bug-
fix releases (CFturbo x.y.z) do not modify the link to the existing function file.

The function file will not be overwritten by any update. By default the functions file is located in the
CFturbo installation directory. When you define any user-defined functions it’s recommended to save
the functions file not in the CFturbo installation directory but anywhere in the company network for
two reasons:
· all users can use the same database for their design

· there is no risk of losing data by uninstall older versions of CFturbo

All available functions are listed in a tree structure in the panel Functions left from diagram, sorted
by machine type.

The user must first select the variable under the corresponding machine type. CFturbo’s internal
function is displayed in the diagram in blue color. You can add any user defined function for each
variable. Selected function is displayed in the diagram in addition to CFturbo's internal function.
Function with active check box is used by CFturbo for calculations. If no function has active
checkbox or no additional function is defined at all, then the CFturbo internal function is used.

With these buttons below the tree you can add, delete or rename functions.
Alternatively you can use the context menu by right click on any function.

The following hierarchy exist in the tree:

physical variable
user defined function
parameter curve (available for some functions only)
upper limit curve (optional)

Functions can depend on 2 variables whereas one serves as parameter. Separate curves exist for
each particular parameter value that are used to calculate function values. The parameter value is
displayed on endpoint of the curve in the diagram.

With the upper limit curve you can define a recommended range, which means an area that is
defined by a higher and a lower limit.

In panel Points right from diagram you can edit curve points of selected function. You can add new
points at the end of the table – the points are automatically sorted by x values. To remove a point
you have to delete either x or y value.

These buttons are enabling the user to:

§ import points from file (one point per line)

§ export points to file

§ copy all points to clipboard

§ paste points from clipboard (e.g from Excel)

§ clear the table

On panel Test you can test the active function. Saving of values is possible by clicking OK-button.

5.3.4 Fluids

SETTINGS | Database | Fluids

The window lists all defined fluids. New ones can be added, present fluids can be altered, renamed or
deleted.

In the right panel, the properties of the selected fluid can be defined. The available parameter vary
depending on the medium type (compressible/incompressible).

The buttons for opening and saving offer the possibility of the exchange of fluid data between CFturbo
installations.

New fluids can be added by opening a menu using the plus button . Then

· Existing fluids can be copied and changed (option Generic),

· Fluids can be added using CoolProp 235 library (option CoolProp),

· Fluids can be added using REFPROP 239 library (option REFPROP, only available if REFPROP is
installed),

· Fluids can defined by Gas mixtures 242 manager (option Mixture, gases only).

The available third party libraries (CoolProp and REFPROP) are listed next to the OK button.

Incompressible fluid [ for pumps, fans only ]

Parameters are:

· density

· kinematic viscosity

· thermal conductivity

· heat capacity c p

· vapor pressure pv (only for liquids)

Compressible fluid [ for compressors, turbines only ]

Here some gas properties are required because they are used in the gas models for the descriptions
of the behavior of the gases. Those parameters are:

· gas constant R

· heat capacity c p (perfect gas)

· molar weight M alternatively for R

· critical pressure pcrit , temperature Tcrit and density crit

· acentric factor

· heat capacity coefficients c pi (at zero pressure)

· compressibility factor Z

· kinematic viscosity

· thermal conductivity

Currently the following gas models are implemented. They represent a relation between pressure,
temperature and density (here given with its reciprocal the spec. volume v):

Gas model Approach Annotation Reference (first

published)

Perfect Gas

Redlich, O., Kwong,

Redlich-Kwong
J.N.S. 685

Aungier/Redlich-
Each approach Aungier, R.H. 685
Kwong
has its own set of
coefficients a, b
Soave/Redlich-
and c. Soave, G. 685
Kwong

Peng, D.Y., Robinson,

Peng-Robinson
D.B. 685

CoolProp see reference www.CoolProp.org

REFPROP see reference www.nist.gov/srd/refprop

The implemented gas property models can be tested with user defined data. Those data consists of
a thermodynamic state defined by p1 and T1. Using these values the density 1 and the specific heat
c p will be calculated. The latter is calculated from the following approach at a pressure close to zero:

Also, using a pressure p2 the gas shall be compressed or expanded to an isentropic temperature T2is
will be calculated. A second temperature T2 is calculated under the assumption that the gas shall be
compressed or expanded from state 1 to pressure p2 with an efficiency of The according enthalpy
and entropy values h and s resp. are given too, see h-s-diagram. Note, that arbitrary reference
enthalpy and entropy are the basis of this diagram. Beyond it a p-T diagram is displayed. In both
diagrams an isentropic (dotted black curve) and polytropic (solid black curve) state change is given.

In case the model CoolProp is chosen, additionally the saturation curve psat (T), i.e. the vapor
pressure curve is plotted.

Gas properties can be exported into tables using the export button. Currently data for density,
enthalpy, dynamic viscosity and thermal conductivity can be exported. The data will be derived from
the selected gas and its gas model within a pressure and temperature range. Please note, that the
size of this range will influence the computational time necessary to calculate all data. Two export
formats are available: comma-separated values and Simerics 189 .

5.3.4.1 CoolProp library

If a fluid from the CoolProp library is to be added the following windows will appear:

Incompressible fluid [ for pumps, fans only ]

The constant data needed for the design process will be derived at a temperature T1. Three different
sets of fluids are available: pure fluids, water mixtures and 2 phase fluids. Water mixtures need the
specification of the mass fraction of the added fluid. That means x = 0 is pure water, whereas x = 1
is a mixture without water.

For 2 phase fluids the liquid state shall be used, i.e. p1 > pv and Ttriple < T1 < Tcrit . Triple point
temperature as well as critical temperature are used as range limits for the vapor pressure curve, see
picture below.

If pressure and temperature are not above the vapor pressure curve, the fluid is not valid and cannot
be added to the list of the fluids to be used in a project. In this case the OK-button is deactivated. In
the diagram below the pressure-temperature state is OK.

Compressible fluid [ for compressors, turbines only ]

Constant data as well as pressure and temperature dependent properties are displayed in a table.
The heat capacity coefficients c pi (at zero pressure) are derived at temperatures T1 and T2. A least
square fitting algorithm is used for this purpose.

The gaseous state exists in a certain scope, i.e. p1 < pv and p1 < ptriple and Ttriple < T1. Triple point
temperature as well as critical temperature are used as range limits for the vapor pressure curve, see
picture below. Additionally the heat capacity at zero pressure is given as function of T1 and T2 both
based on CoolProp as well as on the polynomial with the coefficients c pi.

5.3.4.2 REFPROP library

If a fluid from the REFPROP library is to be added the following windows will appear. Precondition for
that is that REFPROP is installed properly on the same computer as CFturbo.

Incompressible fluid [ for pumps, fans only ]

The constant data needed for the design process will be derived at a temperature T1. CFturbo
considers the liquid state only. Therefore, p1 > pv and Ttriple < T1 < Tcrit . Triple point temperature as
well as critical temperature are used as range limits for the vapor pressure curve, see picture below.

Compressible fluid [ for compressors, turbines only ]

The gaseous state exists in a certain scope, i.e. p1 < pv and p1 < ptriple and Ttriple < T1. Triple point
temperature as well as critical temperature are used as range limits for the vapor pressure curve, see
picture below. Additionally the heat capacity at zero pressure is given as function of T1 and T2 both
based on REFPROP as well as on the polynomial with the coefficients c pi.

5.3.4.3 Gas mixtures

Compressible fluid [ for compressors, gas turbines only ]

New gas mixtures can be designed on the basis of gases already defined in the compressible branch
of the fluid manager 229 . The mass and mole ratios resp. of the components will be used to
determine the mixture's properties. The generated mixture can be tested 231 with the calculate button
in the upper right corner.

All mixture parameters apart from kinematic viscosity and thermal conductivity are calculated with
the help of the component's mass fraction wi and parameter fi:

fmix   w i fi .
i

Mixture kinematic viscosity and thermal conductivity are determined by the component's viscosity
and conductivity respectively weighted by the component's mole fraction x i and by a correction factor
ij
(T). Mole fraction and mass fraction are connected by the molar weight M:

1
 x iMi  wi
.
i
M
i i

The correction factor ij

(T) is determined from the component's kinematic viscosity i
and molar
weight Mi according to Mason & Saxena 685 by:

The kinematic viscosity is determined by:

x i   i T 
T    .
i  x i  ij T 
j

The thermal conductivity is determined by:

x i   i T 
T    .
i  x i  ij T 
j

5.3.5 Profiles

SETTINGS | Database | Profiles

The dialog lists all defined profiles. New ones can be added, present profiles can be renamed,
deleted and changed.

In the right panels, the properties of the selected profile can be defined. The available parameter vary
depending on the profile type.

The buttons for opening and saving offer the possibility of the exchange of profile data between
CFturbo installations.

NACA 4 Digit

The NACA 4 Digit wing sections are low cambered profiles. This family of profiles allows a separate
modification of camber and thickness, which is especially advantageous for blade design.

The profile are defined by:

· First digit describing maximum camber as percentage of the chord.

· Second digit describing the distance of maximum camber from the airfoil leading edge in tens of
percents of the chord.

· Last two digits describing maximum thickness of the airfoil as percent of the chord

The thickness distribution is given by:

.
In case the profile is not cambered, its center of gravity is located at x/l = 42.04 %. This is the
default position for the axial positioning in blade position and sweep 577 .

The meanline consists of two parabola arcs, whose transition point is their apex, respectively. The
point is defined by the the first two digits.

f 1  x x  x 2  x xf
yS  2
f
    if 
l  x f 2  l l  l   l l
 
 l 
f 1  xf xf x  x  
2
x xf
yS   1  2  2     if 
l  x f 2  l l l  l   l l
 
 l  .
In addition to the geometric properties lift coefficients and glide numbers need to be set with respect
to the angle of attack.

NACA 65 series

The NACA 65 series is of importance for turbo-machinery because of their systematic cascade
studies. In contrast to NACA 4 digit, their aerodynamic data is also known for more heavy cambered
profiles.

The meanline can be calculated from a theoretical lift coefficient that is calculated from a user-
defined camber angle, see Carolus 681 p. 54, (Eq. 3.11, 3.12):

2 
cfl   tan   mit   B 2  B1
ln 2  4 ,
ys c  x   x  x  x 
  f l 1    ln 1     ln  
l 4  l  l l  l  .
The nose radius can be modified, thickness values have to be changed in the table. One can type in
a camber angle that will result in a cambered profile. This profile can be promoted to Point-based
profiles by pressing convert. Please note that the skeleton design is done in the appropriate design
step 552 . Therefore the camber angle is not part of the profile description and is given here for
informational and conversion reasons.

Point-based

Besides NACA profiles also user-defined profiles are provided. Therefore the lower and upper side of
the profile has to be known. Moreover lift coefficients and glide numbers need to be set with respect
to the angle of attack.

Circular

Circular profiles are constructed by 2 circular arcs, 1 linear piece and a nose with a certain nose
radius. They are described by 3 parameters: profile angle nose radius rN/l and a radius offset. The
construction details are displayed in the sketch below:

5.4 HELP
This menu supports the user on how to use CFturbo.

The following features are available:

Help topics General CFturbo online help, including help index

About CFturbo Information about CFturbo (e.g. version information)

Check for updates 250 Check for updates online

Web Help Show CFturbo help in a web-browser

Show tutorials Show online tutorials for CFturbo

What's new List of main new features in the current version

CFturbo website Open CFturbo website in browser

5.4.1 Check for Updates

Help | Online | Check for updates

Here you can check for available updates on the CFturbo website. Most of all this concerns the
frequently released maintenance versions mainly provided for bug fixing.

The currently running version is displayed as well as the latest available for download. If an updated
version is available a direct link to the download website is displayed. The download access (name +
password) remains valid as long as a maintenance contract is running (time limited rental licenses
include maintenance for the whole leasing period - there is no separate maintenance contract
required).

Update check can be executed automatically. This can be configured in the Preferences 210 .

5.5 Component
These context sensitive menu is used for designing the currently selected component.

A separate tab with the corresponding design steps is available for each component type:

IMPELLER
277

(Mean line 453

design
mode 453 )

(Airfoil/
Hydrofoil
design
mode 552 )

STATOR 602

VOLUTE 620

Menu items and buttons only become active in accordance to the current design state. Each finished
design steps can be opened again whereas all depending design steps and components are updated
automatically. Manual removing of complete component's design steps is possible in order to
continue with CFturbo initial design (see Remove design steps 91 ).

For designing the complete geometry of a single component you have to run through all items of the
appropriate menu step by step.

Alternatively all these menu items can be selected in the Meridian view using the toolbar directly on
the selected component (see Meridian 256 ).

5.6 3D View
This context sensitive menu is used for handling of the 3D model. It becomes visible if the 3D
Model 259 view is currently selected. Detailed description can be found in Views/ 3D Model 259 .

2 tabs are available:

3D MODEL

BLADES

This Menu is used for handling geometries with blades (impeller, vaned stator) in the the 3D model.
Because a project can contain multiple geometries with blades, these settings refer to the currently
selected component.

5.7 Report View

This context sensitive menu is used for handling the project report.

Detailed description can be found in Views/ Report 274 .

VI
Views 255

6 Views
CFturbo offers 3 alternative views on the project in the central part of the main window. The view can
be selected by the buttons underneath the ribbons 101 .

· Meridian 256

The diagram with the meridional view of the components gives an overview of the project and
enables quick access to the components and the Interfaces 43 in between.

· 3D Model 259

Shows the whole project as a 3D model.

· Report 274

Presents a tabular view on the project information and the parameters of the components down
to design step level.

6.1 Meridian
This view consists mainly of a diagram containing the meridional shape of all components.

Active components are displayed with their respective color, inactive components are displayed grey.

Meridional diagram

The diagram depicts the assembled meridional shapes of the project components and their
connecting interfaces
A large arrow on the inlet of the first component illustrate the flow direction.
Captions showing component name and a consecutive number are displayed as well.

The currently selected component is displayed with thick border and can be changed by mouse click
on a component.

Component toolbar

If the mouse moves over the selected

component the components menu is shown in
compact style.

Alternatively you can use the corresponding

ribbon menu (see IMPELLER/ STATOR/
VOLUTE 251 ).

Component context menu

Right clicking on the component opens its

context menu, see Activate/ Rename/ Delete
components 89 .

Adding Components

Via the symbol an additional component can

be added to the project at the symbols
position.
A menu shows the available component types
and the option to import an existing one.

See Add component 46 .

Geometric coupling

The direction of the geometric coupling 43

between components is displayed by small
symbols (see left).
The coupling can be changed by moving the
mouse over a coupling symbol and selecting a
coupling configuration from the appearing menu.

Progression diagram

Below the meridional view, progressions of several physical quantities along the flow direction of all
components can be displayed:

A Cross section area

cm Meridional velocity

cu Circumferential velocity

c Absolute velocity

Flow angle

6.2 3D Model
Tab sheet 3D Model contains the three dimensional representation of the project design state. This
view has its own context sensitive ribbon tab, see 3D View 252 .

The CAD model can be exported as IGES, STEP, STL, Parasolid or BREP - see Export 127 . For
export, only the currently visible geometrical elements are considered.

Navigation

The 3D display can be influenced by mouse:

Rotate Rotation around center of visualized geometry or clicked point on

a 3D-object respectively

The rotation center is visualized by a 3D marker.

Zoom 2 Zoom (also mouse wheel) 1 Rotation around z-axis

Move Move

The functions can be assigned to mouse buttons via Preferences/ General 210 .

Furthermore, the 3D-View is sensitive to mouse movement and mouse clicks in the following
manner:

Mouse movement Activates highlighting of 3D-object under the cursor.

When hovering on the 3D-object, a hint with its name is
displayed.

Left mouse-button Selects and deselects the 3D-object under the cursor,
respectively. When clicking in empty space, all 3D-
objects are deselected.

<Crtl> + left mouse-button Multi-selection of 3D-objects.

Right mouse-button Opens context menu with display properties for all
selected 3D-objects (see Model tree (left) 268 ).

Menus

Above the 3D representation in the menus 3D Model and 3D Model - Blades you can find buttons
which have only an optical effect but do not change the geometry model.

¢ Model display (top) 261

Model tree

Left of the 3D representation is the Model tree. There, all available geometry parts are listed in a
tree structure, whereby they can be configured individually.

¢ Model tree (left) 268

3D-Preview

In many design step dialogs a 3D-Preview of the currently designed part can be displayed via the
Additional views button at the top.

The 3D-Preview behaves in the same way as the 3D Model view described above. For performance
reasons, the 3D objects are displayed with medium resolution, at most.

¢ Problems when generating surfaces/solids 272

¢ Open/ Save design 105

¢ Data export 127

6.2.1 Model display (top)

3D MODEL

The following actions are available by the buttons of the 3D Model tab. They are used for
visualization only and do not affect the geometry model.

General

Copy representation to clipboard

Print representation

Save representation as PNG, JPG, GIF or BMP

Save representation as 3D-PDF

Visible 3D-model data is transfered to a PDF-document, enabling the user to distribute or

archivate a 3D-representation of CFturbo-models.

The PDF-document contains a 3D-viewer, including a model-tree as well as various 3D-

capabilities (e. g. measuring, clipping, display options). It can be opened with PDF-viewers
supporting 3D-content (e. g. Adobe® Acrobat® Reader, not possible in internet-browsers
without certain plugins).

If the PDF-document is opened in a PDF-viewer and a static picture is shown instead of a

3D-model, then:
1) ensure using a PDF-viewer supporting 3D-content
2) ensure activating 3D-content in the settings of the PDF-viewer
3) click on the static picture to switch to the 3D-content

An example of a 3D-PDF visualized in Adobe® Acrobat® Reader DC is shown below:

Import external 3D geometry for visualization

The 3D Import enables the user to view 3D data in IGES, STEP, STL, Parasolid and BREP
format or of CFturbo-projects (*.cft) e.g. for comparison with the current design or for
redesigning. Geometry data is shown in the 3D Model 259 and can be transformed 270 and
exported.

If the import consumes a lot of time, a lower resolution can be selected (see "Settings"
below).

View

Fit view (zoom all geometry to visible region)

Reset view (default position)

Load view from file

Save current view to file

Settings

Switch coordinate system on/off

Switch scale system on/off

Set background color

A uniform rotation of the impeller around the z axis can be generated, whereby the velocity
can be influenced by the track bar.

Select resolution of curves and surfaces (affects display)

Coarse
Middle
Fine
Define line width for points

Define line width for curves

Set number of surface isocurves

Clipping

A clipping plane for x=const., y=const. or z=const. can be defined and optionally displayed. The
position of the clipping plane can be adjusted.

The direction of clipping (visible clipping side) can be switched.

BLADES

These actions are used for visualization only and do not affect model geometry.

Please note: The following options refer to the currently selected component of the project.

Single blade

Blade passage

Display a single blade passage bordered by 2 neighboring blades.

All blades

Display all blades of the selected impeller or vaned stator.

Area

Display an approximately perpendicularly flown through area between hub, shroud and two
neighboring blades for the currently selected component. The position of this area can
optionally be fixed to the location of the throat area (Fix to minimum). Otherwise, it can be
slided to any reasonable position within the blade to blade channel with the help of the
track bar Section Position.

By pressing the button Show progression a window is opened, in which the value of the
cross section is displayed in dependence on the position of the overlapping area of 2
neighboring blades (0-100%). The current position as well as that of the throat area and the
maximum sphere diameter are marked with special symbols. In the lower part of the
window some measures for the current position are displayed.

Sphere

The sphere represents a particle with the highest possible

diameter that can be conveyed through the blade passage.

6.2.2 Model tree (left)

The model tree contains all available

geometry parts listed in a tree structure,
whereby their visibility can be switched on
or off alternatively.

All visible elements are exported, if the

model is saved as IGES, STEP, STL,
Parasolid or BREP - see Export 127 .

Display properties

The elements selected in the model tree are highlighted in the 3D view. The selection can be cleared
by pressing the <Esc> key.

The attributes can be defined by right click:

• Display mode: Wireframe, Shaded surface, Shaded surface with

edges

• Material

• Color and transparency

• Check/ uncheck all sub-elements of the selected element

• Show geometric properties of selected element in extra dialog:

o volume, density, mass, center of gravity and static moments of
inertia for solids
o area for surfaces
o length for edges

• Export selected element as IGES, STEP, STL, Parasolid or

BREP.
Imported geometry will be exported in its transformed state (this
option is not available for STL imports)

For elements in the Imports section only:

• removes selected element(s) from model tree and 3D view

• renames selected element inside model tree

Model tree structure

The model tree has 3 main sections:

1) Section Components

contains all components of the project with the following sub elements:

Impeller/Stator Volute
Meridian Spiral
Mean surface Diffuser
Blade Cut-water
CFD setup 580 CFD setup 677

If an element contains child elements, it can be expanded by clicking on the collapsed element
symbol ( ).

Each single element without child elements can be selected ( ) or unselected ( ).

Each single element with child elements can have 3 states:

The element and all child elements are

selected.

The element and not all child elements

are selected.

The element is unselected. Child

elements might be selected.

An element is visible in the 3D view, if it is selected and all its parent elements are also
selected.

Note: If the <Ctrl> key is pressed while selecting an element, all child elements are selected, too!

2) Section Geometry

contains all basic geometrical types:

· Points

· Curves

· Surfaces

· Solid faces

· Solids

This allows:

· to select all objects of a certain geometrical type. In the 3D view, only those elements
become visible, whose parent elements are selected also.
· to modify the display properties of all currently visible objects of a certain geometrical type.

3) Sections Imports and Reference designs

These sections contain imported geometric models: imported 3D models from neutral 3D file
formats 261 and CFturbo components of reference projects 204 .

Visibility and render properties for imported models can be modified in the same way as for models
of section Components.

Selecting a model tree node of an imported model enables the 3D-transformation of the entire model.
For that purpose the panel Transformation is displayed at the bottom side of the model tree. This
can be used to align imported models with the project model for visual comparisons of the model
shapes.

The Transformation panel allows the application of five different

types of geometric transformations:

· Translations can be applied iteratively along the coordinate

axes.
· Rotations can be applied iteratively around the coordinate axes.

· Uniform model scaling is applied in absolute (percentage)

terms.
· Mirroring is toggled for the models coordinate system in all
three coordinate directions.
· Z-Axis alignment applies to the selection of a single or multiple
face(s) containing rotational properties (e. g. cylinder, cone) and
aligns the related rotational axis collinear to the global z-axis.

To apply a transformation to the selected parts, select a transformation type, set its parameters and
hit <Enter>.

The model transformation can be reset to the state which it was imported with by clicking the reset
button on top right.

Useful transformations for an imported model can be saved for later use by exporting the model with
its current transformation via the context menu (Export).

Model states

Model states contain the properties of all tree elements (except imports). Several model states can
be managed via the controls above the model tree.

Select existing model state

Save model state

Rename selected model state

Add new model state

Delete selected model state

The following predefined model states cannot be modified:

· "Default" The default model state

· "Default + CFD setup" The default model state with CFD setup visible

· "Flow domain solids" Only solids are visible that belong to the flow domain

· "Material domain solids" Only solids are visible that belong to the material domain

· "Component colors" Every component is displayed with the color defined in the Components
view 256

For performance reasons, model states do not contain the state of each individual 3D object, but
only to the level of distinction between different geometrical types (points, curves, surfaces).
Therefore, e.g. all curves that belong to a "Curves" object share the same properties.

6.2.3 Problems when generating the 3D model

Information about 3D-Errors

If any errors occur while generating geometrical elements then the

corresponding part in the model tree is marked by red color.

Furthermore, a corresponding error message is displayed in the message panel 86 .

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

3D-Error: Could not create solid.

Distance tolerance is too low or too high Change the distance tolerance

(see Model settings 588 )

Problem Possible solutions

Number of data points is disadvantageous Change the number of data points for the 3D
(seldom) model

(see Model settings 588 )

Eliminating errors during surface generation

For eliminating errors during surface generation there exist the following possibilities:

· try a different number of data points for the 3D model (see Impeller- 588 or Volute-
Settings 678 )

· try a different display resolution (see Model display (top) 261 )

The pictures illustrate

the possible influence of
point density on the
surface generation of the
blade.

Surface display errors

It may occur that a surface is not displayed although it exists.

You can recognize such cases by selecting the surface in the model tree and choosing a high
number of isocurves (see Model display (top) 261 ).

Normally, choosing another resolution (see Model display (top) 261 ) solves this problem.

Slow 3D model

If the handling of the 3D model is very slow, normally an update of the graphic card driver is
helpful.

Visualization errors

Visualization errors and artifacts can often be resolved by updating the graphic card driver.

Save report as HTML, RTF, CSV or TXT

Print report

Copy the content to the clipboard

All marked rows are copied. If nothing is marked then all content is copied.
Marking can be done by mouse, <Crtl> <A> marks all.
Content will be pasted in MS Word/Excel as table.

Expand nodes to several levels

VII
Impeller 277

7 Impeller

Impeller

This chapter describes in detail the design process for all impeller
type components featured in CFturbo.

The content reflects the design steps in the sequence they are
encountered during the design process.

Design steps

¢ Main dimensions 278

¢ Meridional contour 423

¢ Mean line design 453

¢ Blade properties 453

¢ Blade mean lines 495

¢ Blade profiles 533

¢ Blade edges 541

¢ Airfoil/ Hydrofoil design 552

¢ Blade properties 552

¢ Blade profiles 574

¢ Blade sweep 577

¢ CFD setup 580

¢ Model settings 588

¢ Model finishing 590

¢ Remove design steps 91

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Neighboring blades are intersecting each other.

(see message) Numerous details of the design influence the

blade shape. Some examples for possible
solutions:

· Modify main dimensions

· Reduce number of blades

· Reduce blade wrap angle

· Reduce blade thickness

7.1 Main dimensions

IMPELLER | Main dimensions

The Main Dimensions menu item is used to define main dimensions of the impeller.

Details by impeller type

¢ Centrifugal/ Mixed-flow Pump/ Fan 280

¢ Axial Pump / Fan 300

¢ Centrifugal Compressor 325

¢ Radial-inflow Gas Turbine 345

¢ Axial Gas Turbine / Compressor 364

¢ Francis Turbine 386

Automatic calculation of impeller diameter depending on rotational speed

The automatic calculations can be easily used to determine the influence of the rotational speed on
the impeller diameter, e.g. to find the required rotational speed to account for a certain limited design
space.
To do this, both the Automatic parameter estimation (page Parameters) and the Automatic main

dimension calculation (page Dimensions) must be activated. If you then change the Alternative
speed 416 on page Setup, the resulting impeller diameter can be checked on the Dimensions page
and/ or in the Meridian diagram.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Automated Main dimensions are active.

Dimensions are not fixed and may adapt to input parameters.

Main dimensions are updated automatically if To fix the main dimensions you could uncheck
any input parameters are modified. the "Automatic" calculation. Then you have to
manually start the calculation if required.

Specific speed of impeller is beyond the supported range.

The specific speed nq of the impeller is much Modify specific speed defined by n, Q, in the
too low or too high. The supported range is nq = impeller Main dimensions 416 and/or in the
5 ... 500. Global Setup 108 .

In some cases it may be necessary to select a

different impeller type according to the specific
speed.

Specific speed of impeller is beyond the recommended range.

The specific speed is lower or higher then the Modify specific speed defined by n, Q, in the
recommended values. impeller Main dimensions 416 and/or in the
Global Setup 108 .
This warning is generated for
In some cases it may be necessary to select a
· centrifugal/ mixed-flow impellers with specific
different impeller type according to the specific
speed nq < 10 or nq > 160
speed.
· axial impellers with specific speed nq < 100 or
nq > 400

High pre-swirl numbers are unusual.

The impeller is the first component of the project Adapt pre-swirl in the Global setup 108

and the inflow swirl is defined by the Global

setup 108 . With very high pre-swirl an impeller
design might be impossible.

7.1.1 Centrifugal, Mixed-flow Pump/ Fan

Impeller | Main dimensions

The Main Dimensions menu item is used to define main dimensions of the impeller. Main
Dimensions are forming the most important basis for all following design steps.

The real flow in an impeller is turbulent and three-dimensional.

Secondary flows, separation and reattachment in boundary
layers, cavitation, transient recirculation areas and other features
may occur. Nevertheless it is useful - and it is common practice
in the pump design theory - to simplify the realistic flow applying
representative streamlines for the first design approach.

Employing 1D-streamline theory the following cross sections are

significant in particular:
· suction area/ inlet (index 1)
· leading edge (index LE)
· discharge side/ outlet (index 2)

Details

¢ Setup 281

¢ Parameters 284

¢ Dimensions 291

7.1.1.1 Setup

On page Setup you can specify some basic settings.

General

· Manual dimensioning
In manual dimensioning mode the main dimensions and blade angles are not calculated by
CFturbo. All these values are user-defined input values.

· Splitter blades (not for axial machines)

Design impeller with or without splitter blades.

· Material density 415

The material density of the impeller is an informational value that is not relevant for the
hydraulic design but is used for the calculation of moments of inertia. Density values can be
directly entered or selected from a list by pressing the settings button next to the input
area.

· Unshrouded
Design a shrouded (closed) or unshrouded (open) impeller.
For an unshrouded impeller you have to define the tip clearance, optional different values at

inlet and outlet.

· Impeller type
Beside Standard impeller type the following special impeller types are available with their
specific parameters and default settings:
- for pumps:
* Wastewater You have to specify the desired number of blades used for some specific
empirical correlations.
* Barske (low nq) A flow factor FQ can be specified to use the so called "Enlarged Flow
Method" in order to get a higher efficiency. Typical range of FQ is between 1.3 and 1.7.
- for fans: Squirrel cage

· Inflow swirl
Either the outlet swirl of the upstream component will be used for the determination of the inlet
swirl or the absolute inlet flow angle.

Multi stage

For a multi stage design the panel Multi stage options 416 is available.

Initial default setting

When creating a new design the initial default settings for some important properties are displayed in

the panel Initial default settings. These settings are used in further design steps and can be
modified by selecting the Change settings button. Of course these default settings can be modified
manually in the appropriate design steps. See Preferences: Impeller/ Stator settings 220 for more
information.

Information

Some design point values are displayed in the right Information panel when selecting the page
Values (see Global setup 108 ).

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Inconsistent inflow swirl in ‹Setup› part:

Option ''..." yields a highly deviating inlet swirl compared with the upstream component
or design point.

A pre-swirl might by generated by the upstream If setting was chosen by purpose the warning
neighboring component or may be defined by the can be ignored. Otherwise the local settings
Global setup 108 . This definition will be should be adjusted (e.g. inlet flow angle ).
considered if inflow swirl = Upstream swirl. Alternatively, the upstream component can be
Otherwise local settings will be used delivering a altered.
different inflow swirl.

7.1.1.2 Parameters

On page Parameters you have to put in or to modify parameters resulting from approximation
functions in dependence on specific speed nq or flow rate Q.
See Approximation functions 226 .

For details of how to handle the parameter edit fields please see Edit fields with empirical
functions 98 .

Parameter and efficiency values can be handled manually

or can be switched to automatic update by the checkbox
on top of the page. Then the default values are used
always, even after design point modifications (see Global
setup 108 ).

If the automatic mode is not selected the current default values can be specified by one of the
following options:

globally by the button on top of the page

regionally by the default button within the Parameters or Efficiency region

individually by the default button within the input field when selected

Parameters

The panel Parameters allows defining alternative parameters in each case

for the calculation of the following impeller main dimensions:

for pumps for fans

suction diameter dS LE diameter dLE

LE width bLE

impeller diameter d2

impeller width b2

For dS-calculation (pumps)

§ Ratio between meridional inflow velocity and specific energy

  c0 2Y
Intake coefficient § 0.05…0.4 (rising with nq)

§ (k m1 at Stepanoff)

§ high ® smaller dimensions, lower friction losses

Rel. inlet flow angle § < 20° ® prevent the risk of cavitation
b1
§ > 15° ® with regard to efficiency

§ 12°...17° ® recommended for good suction capability

§ small friction and shock losses

§ only if no cavitation risk !

Minimal relative
velocity w § fdS=1.15...1.05 standard impeller, nq=15...40

§ fdS=1.25...1.15 suction impeller

Q m3 s 
nSS  n min 1  34
NPSHR [m]
(European definition for illustration)

suction specific Standard suction impeller u1<50 m/s 160...220

speed nSS Suction impeller, axial inflow u1<35 m/s 220...280
Suction impeller, cont. shaft u1<50 m/s 180...240
High pressure pump u1>50 m/s 160...190
Standard inducer u1>35 m/s 400...700
Rocket inducer >>1000

cm12 w2
NPSHR   c  w 1
2g 2g

Min. NPSH § lc suction pressure coefficient for absolute velocity c (inflow acceleration
and losses): 1.1 for axial inflow; 1.2…1.35 for radial inflow casing

§ lw suction pressure coefficient for relative velocity w (pressure drop at

leading edge): 0.10…0.30 for standard impeller; 0.03…0.06 for inducer

for dLE calculation (fan)

Diameter ratio dLE/d2

for bLE calculation (fan)

Merid. deceleration
c m2/c mLE

For d2-calculation

§ dimensionless expression for the specific energy:

Work coefficient

(= pressure and head 0.7 ...1.3 centrifugal impeller

coefficient) 0.25...0.7 mixed-flow impeller
0.1 ...0.4 axial impeller

§ high ® small d2, flat characteristic curve

low ® high d2, steep characteristic curve

Specific diameter § according to Cordier diagram (see Dimensions 291 )

Rel. outlet flow angle

§ 6°...13°: recommended for stable performance curve (with nq rising)
b2

bB2 = 90° § empirical factor k d2 = 1.15 ... 1.29

for impeller type
"Barske (low nq)"
only

For b2-calculation

Outlet width ratio

§ 0.04...0.30 (rising with nq)
b2/d2

for pumps:

Mer. deceleration § 0.60...0.95 (rising with nq)

c m2/c m1

§ Ratio between meridional outlet velocity and specific energy

 2  cm2 2Y
for pumps:

Outlet coefficient § 0.08…0.26 (rising with nq)

§ (k m2 at Stepanoff)

for fans:
Shroud angle Shr

Efficiency

In panel Efficiency you have to specify several efficiencies. You have to distinguish between design
relevant efficiencies and efficiencies used for information only:

Design relevant

· hydraulic efficiency h

· volumetric efficiency v

· tip clearance efficiency T

· additional hydraulic efficiency h

+
(displayed for information only, see Global setup 108 )

Information only

· side friction efficiency S

· mechanical efficiency m

· motor efficiency mot

+
The additional hydraulic efficiency h
is used additionally for impeller dimensioning in order to
compensate the flow losses.

The losses resulting in energy dissipation from the fluid form the internal efficiency.


I  hv ST h

Internal and mechanical efficiency form the overall efficiency (coupling efficiency) of the stage St
.

*
When considering motor losses additionally the overall efficiency of the stage incl. motor St
is
defined.

PQ PQ: pump output, see above

St   Im
PD
PD : mechanical power demand (coupling/ driving power)

Pel: electrical power demand of motor

The following summary illustrates the single efficiencies and their classification:

Relevant for
classification efficiencies
impeller design

+
h additional hydraulic

yes: for energy

h hydraulic
transmission

T tip
internal
stage
V volumetric yes: for flow rate

S side friction

m mechanical no: for overall

information only

stage incl.
electrical mot motor
motor

The obtainable overall efficiency correlates to specific speed and to the size and the type of the
impeller as well as to special design features like bypass installations and auxiliary aggregates.
Efficiencies calculated by approximation functions 226 are representing the theoretical reachable
values and they should be corrected by the user if more information about the impeller or the whole
pump are available.

The hydraulic efficiency (or blade efficiency) describe the energy losses within the pump caused by
friction and vorticity. Friction losses mainly originate from shear stresses in boundary layers.
Vorticity losses are caused by turbulence and on the other hand by changes of flow cross section
and flow direction which may lead to secondary flow, flow separation, wake behind blades etc.. The
hydraulic efficiency is the ratio between specific energy Y and the energy transmitted by the impeller
blades:

Y
h  ~    0.850.93
Y

The volumetric efficiency is a quantity for the deviation of effective flow rate Q from total flow rate

inside the impeller which also includes the circulating flow within the pump casing:

(rising with impeller size)

The tip clearance efficiency is only relevant for unshrouded impellers. It contains losses due to the
flow through the gap between blade tips and housing from the pressure to the suction side of the

blades. The flow losses mainly depend on the tip clearance distance x T and decrease with rising
number of blades and rising blade outlet angle b2.

T  1  f A Ratio f  f n q , A Ratio  A Ratio  x T b 2

The side friction efficiency contains losses caused by rotation of fluid between hub/ shroud and
housing:

PS 0.5  0.985 für n q  40

S  1  
P 0.985  0.995 für n q  40

The mechanical efficiency mainly includes the friction losses in bearings and seals:

Pm
m  1   0.95  0.995
P (rising with impeller size)

Hydraulic and volumetric efficiency as well as the tip clearance efficiency are most important for the
~ ~
impeller dimensioning because of their influence to Y and/or Q . Mechanical and side friction
efficiency are affecting only the required driving power of the machine.

If the check box "Use for main dimensions" is set, then main dimension calculation is done on
the basis of Yef f = 0.5(Y/ +Y). Otherwise Y - specific work without losses - is used.

Information

In the right area of the register Parameter you can find again some calculated values for
information:

PQ
Required driving power PD 
St

Power loss PL  PD  PQ  PD 1  St 

Internal efficiency

Stage efficiency

* PQ
Stage efficiency incl. motor St   Stmot
Pel

7.1.1.3 Dimensions

In the panel Shaft, the required shaft diameter is computed.

¢ Shaft/ Hub 418

The hub diameter is determined by the user and depends on the shaft-hub connection.

The main dimensions can be seen on Main dimensions panel. They can be recomputed by
pressing the Calculate-button. The computation is based on "Euler's Equation of
Turbomachinery", on the continuity equation and the relations for the velocity triangles as well
as on the parameters given in the tab sheets Setup and Parameters.

Individual main dimensions can be calculated separately using the button inside the value field.

You may accept the proposed values or you can modify them slightly, e.g. to meet a certain
normalized diameter.

In case the checkbox Automatic is activated a new calculation will accomplished after any change
of parameter. Then the manual alteration of the main dimensions is not possible.

Due to the Euler equation the impeller diameter d2 and the blade angles bB2 are coupled (see Outlet
triangle 485 ). Lower d2 values result in higher bB2 (higher blade loading) and vice versa. For that
reason the resulting average bB2 value is displayed for information right beside the calculated/
specified d2 value.

You can select a value for the diameters dS from standard

specifications. For that purpose you have to press the settings
button right beside the input field.

The small dialog gives you the possibility to select a diameter

from several standard specifications. If material, standard name
and pressure range are selected the lower panel shows all
diameters of the chosen standard. One diameter is highlighted as
a proposal. Nominal diameter, outside diameter and wall
thickness for the marked entry is displayed. Using of and
buttons additional standard specifications and user defined
diameters can be added or existing parameters can be removed
from the list.

At File location the name of the file containing the diameters is

shown. The file is originally called Diameter.cftdi and is located
in the installation directory of CFturbo. Modifications of the list will
be saved if the user is leaving the dialog window by clicking the
OK-button. In case there are no write permissions the user can
choose another directory to save the file. Renaming of files is
possible by Save as- functionality. By clicking the Open-button
a previously saved file can be opened.

Neighboring components

In specific cases the dimensions of the neighboring components at inlet and/ or outlet can be used
to get exactly matching geometry.

This feature is available only for explicitly uncoupled 67 components or side-by-side impellers.

Information

In the right panel of any tab sheet an information panel is situated, which holds the computed
variables in accordance to the actual state of design, the resulting Meridional section 296 as well as
the Cordier-Diagramm 297 with the location of the best point. These three sections can be chosen by
the appropriate soft buttons in the heading.

In the Value section the following variables are displayed for information which result from calculated
or determined main dimensions:

Flow properties at:

- impeller inlet static pressure p

- impeller outlet total pressure pt

volume flow Q
mass flow
swirl s

Velocity triangles at: velocities u, c m , c m *, c u, c, wu, w

- impeller inlet
- impeller outlet flow angles

Work coefficient

Flow coefficient

Meridional flow coefficient

Specific diameter

Inlet velocity

Inlet velocity (net)

Outlet velocity

Outlet velocity (net)

Outlet width ratio

Meridional deceleration

Estimated axial force

Reynolds number with d1 = highest diameter at inlet

with b1 = width at inlet

with d2 = highest diameter at outlet

with b2 = width at outlet

NPSHR estimation (Available at inlet)

(Pumps only)

Available head level distance to vaporization at

impeller inlet (pv = fluid vapor pressure)

Lobanoff/ Ross

see diagram below this table

Pfleiderer

with loss coefficients

c
= 1.1 … 1.35, w = (0.03) 0.1 … 0.3

Gülich

with suction specific speed nSS = 160…280

Stepanoff

with cavitation number = 1.22 10-3 nq4/3

Petermann

with suction number Sq = (0.2) 0.4…0.6 (2.0)

Europump

NPSHR
prediction
according to
Lobanoff/ Ross

The Meridional preview is until now based on the main dimensions only.

The Cordier diagram can be used for checking the impeller diameter d2.

See Cordier 418 .

The Velocity triangles are the result of a mid-span calculation and are based on the design
point 108 and the main dimensions.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Use of dS/d2 requires dH=0.

This applies for fans only. If the suction Select a different parameter for the calculation of
diameter dS is calculated by diameter ratio dS/d2, the suction diameter dS (see Parameters 284 ).
then the hub has to be planar, i.e. hub diameter
dH = 0. Otherwise the empirical correlations are
invalid.

Fluid state cannot be calculated at inlet/outlet. Consider change of main dimensions.

This may occur if the meridional velocity of the You may change the in/outlet geometry or
fluid at the specified location is invalid. A reason ignore the warning because the real cross
could be a cross section area of 0. section will be estimated based on the
meridional contour 423 in subsequent design
steps.

In/outlet cross section ratio is unusual.

Meridional contour should be defined with an appropriate in/outlet width.

Inlet and outlet cross section area are not in the You may change the in/ outlet geometry or
same order of magnitude. The ratio A2/A1 is ignore the warning because the real cross
outside the range of 0.1 to 10. sections will be estimated based on the
This can result in high level of meridional meridional contour 423 in subsequent design
acceleration or deceleration. steps.

Inlet/ Outlet: Pressure and temperature not within the liquid phase of the fluid.
Check inlet condition and geometry.

If the fluid model = CoolProp, fluid properties will Increase main dimensions (width, diameter etc.)
be calculated as function of pressure and or change Global setup 108 (e.g., decrease mass
temperature. In case the local pressure and flow, increase pressure, decrease temperature).
temperature are not above the vapor pressure
curve, the fluid state is not valid 236 .

7.1.2 Axial Pump / Fan

Impeller | Main dimensions

The Main Dimensions menu item is used to define main dimensions of the axial impeller. Main
Dimensions are forming the most important basis for all following design steps.

The real flow in an impeller is turbulent and three-dimensional. Details

Secondary flows, separation and reattachment in boundary layers,

cavitation, transient recirculation areas and other features may ¢ Setup 301

occur. Nevertheless it is useful - and it is common practice in the

pump design theory - to simplify the realistic flow applying ¢ Pump: Parameters 304

representative streamlines for the first design approach.

¢ Fan: Parameters 311

Employing 1D-streamline theory the following cross sections are

significant in particular: ¢ Dimensions 318

· suction area/ inlet (index 1)

· discharge side/ outlet (index 2)

7.1.2.1 Setup

On page Setup you can specify some basic settings.

General

· Manual dimensioning
In manual dimensioning mode the main dimensions and blade angles are not calculated by

CFturbo. All these values are user-defined input values.

· Splitter blades (not for axial machines)

Design impeller with or without splitter blades.

· Material density 415

· Unshrouded
Design a shrouded (closed) or unshrouded (open) impeller.
For an unshrouded impeller you have to define the tip clearance, optional different values at
inlet and outlet.

· Impeller type
Beside Standard impeller type the following special impeller types are available with their
specific parameters and default settings:
- for pumps: Inducer
- for fans: Automotive cooling

· Inflow swirl
Either the outlet swirl of the upstream component will be used for the determination of the inlet
swirl or the absolute inlet flow angle.

· Blade design mode

Airfoil/ Hydrofoil 552 : Design according to Airfoil/Hydrofoil design theory.
Mean line 453 : Design using Euler's equation on mean lines.
A completed Airfoil/ Hydrofoil design can be automatically converted to Mean line to allow more
design flexibility. In contrast, when switching from Mean line design mode to Airfoil/ Hydrofoil
the component has to be re-designed starting from Blade properties 552 .

Multi stage

For a multi stage design the panel Multi stage options 416 is available.

Initial default setting

When creating a new design the initial default settings for some important properties are displayed in
the panel Initial default settings. These settings are used in further design steps and can be
modified by selecting the Change settings button. Of course these default settings can be modified
manually in the appropriate design steps. See Preferences: Impeller/ Stator settings 220 for more
information.

Information

Some design point values are displayed in the right Information panel when selecting the page
Values (see Global setup 108 ).

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Inconsistent inflow swirl in ‹Setup› part:

Option ''..." yields a highly deviating inlet swirl compared with the upstream component
or design point.

7.1.2.2 Parameters Pump

On page Parameters you have to put in or to modify parameters resulting from approximation
functions in dependence on specific speed nq or flow rate Q.
See Approximation functions 226 .

For details of how to handle the parameter edit fields please see Edit fields with empirical
functions 98 .

Parameter and efficiency values can be handled manually

or can be switched to automatic update by the checkbox
on top of the page. Then the default values are used
always, even after design point modifications (see Global
setup 108 ).

If the automatic mode is not selected the current default values can be specified by one of the
following options:

globally by the button on top of the page

regionally by the default button within the Parameters or Efficiency region

individually by the default button within the input field when selected

Parameters

The panel Parameters allows defining alternative parameters in each case for the
calculation of the following impeller diameters:

inlet outlet

dS1, dH1 dS2, dH2

The following is focusing on normal axial pumps - for inducers 309 special correlations are used.

For dS2-calculation

Work coefficient § dimensionless expression for the specific energy:

Y  2 and   Yef f  2

2 2
u2 u2
0.7 ...1.3 centrifugal impeller
(= pressure and head 0.25...0.7 mixed-flow impeller
coefficient) 0.1 ...0.6 axial impeller
§ high ® small dS2, flat characteristic curve
low ® high dS2, steep characteristic curve

Specific diameter § according to Cordier diagram (see Dimensions 318 )

For dH2 calculation

dH2
 0.4 ... 0.9
dS 2

If the check box " H2 = 90°" is set the diameter ratio is set to:
Diameter ratio dH2/dS2
dH2 Y

dS 2 u S 2

Under the assumptions: c u·u = Y = const.

For dS1/dH1-calculation

Meridional velocity
ratio c m2/c m1

strictly axial dH2 = dH1 and dS2 = dS1

Diameter ratio
dH1/dS1 const. at hub dH2 = dH1

const. at mid-span dM2 = dM1

const. at shroud dS2 = dS1

Efficiency

In panel Efficiency you have to specify several efficiencies. You have to distinguish between design
relevant efficiencies and efficiencies used for information only:

Design relevant

· hydraulic efficiency h

· volumetric efficiency v

· additional hydraulic efficiency h

+
(displayed for information only, see Global setup 108 )

Information only

· mechanical efficiency m

· motor efficiency mot

+
The additional hydraulic efficiency h
is used additionally for impeller dimensioning in order to
compensate additional flow losses.

The losses resulting in energy dissipation from the fluid form the internal efficiency.


I  h  v  h

Internal and mechanical efficiency form the overall efficiency (coupling efficiency) of the stage St
.

*
When considering motor losses additionally the overall efficiency of the stage incl. motor St
is
defined.

PQ PQ: pump output, see above

St   Im
PD
PD : mechanical power demand (coupling/ driving power)

* PQ
St   Stmot Pel: electrical power demand of motor
Pel

The following summary illustrates the single efficiencies and their classification:

Relevant for
classification efficiencies
impeller design

+
stage internal h additional hydraulic yes: for energy
transmission

h hydraulic

V volumetric yes: for flow rate

m mechanical
no: for overall
information only
stage incl.
electrical mot motor
motor

The volumetric efficiency is a quantity for the deviation of effective flow rate Q from total flow rate
~
inside the impeller Q :

Q
V  ~  0.70 ... 0.95
Q (rising with decreasing tip clearance)

The mechanical efficiency mainly includes the friction losses in bearings and seals:

Pm
m  1   0.95 ... 0.995
P (rising with impeller size)

Total-total and volumetric efficiency are most important for the impeller dimensioning because of their
~ ~
influence to Y and/or Q . The mechanical efficiency is affecting only the required driving power of
the machine.

If the check box "Use for main dimensions" is set, then main dimension calculation is done on
the basis of Yef f = 0.5(Y/ +Y). Otherwise Y - specific work without losses - is used.

Information

In the right area of the register Parameter you can find again some calculated values for
information:

PQ
Required driving power PD 
St

Power loss PL  PD  PQ  PD 1  St 


Internal efficiency I  h  v  h

PQ
Stage efficiency St   Im
PD

* PQ
Stage efficiency incl. motor St   Stmot
Pel

7.1.2.2.1 Inducer

Inducers are placed in front of centrifugal pump impellers normally in order to improve the suction
performance (reduce NPSHR ) of the pump.

For inducers the inlet section is the primary one. The important suction diameter dS1 is calculated
using the meridional flow coefficient m
:

Q 4Q c
m    m1  tan  0S
A SuS1 dS1  dH1  dS1n uS1
2 2

In CFturbo the so called Brumfield curve is used to estimate an appropriate m

value to achieve a
required level of suction performance. Input values is the suction specific speed nss :

Q m 3 s
nSS  n min 1  34
NPSHR [m]
(or the US definition Nss , see Preferences/Units/Other 219 )

The Brumfield curve can be displayed and also modified if necessary by clicking on the function
button just right of the nss edit field.

The m
value can be calculated automatically from the given nss value or modified manually. There is
a limit of m
0.06, lower values will result in backflow at blade tip and cavitation induced flow
instability.

Alternatively you can specify the rel. inlet flow angle 1S

or the meridional flow coefficient m
directly.
Furthermore the parameters for classic axial pump 304 design could be used alternatively.

The inlet hub diameter dH1 is calculated using the diameter ratio 1
:

dH1
1   0 .2  0 .4
dS1

Typical for inducers is a constant tip (shroud) diameter. The hub diameter can increase from inlet to
outlet slightly in order to use centrifugal effect for energy transmission. The meridional velocity ratio
between inlet and outlet can be used to estimate the outlet cross section:

Alternatively the diameter ratio 2

=dH2/dS2 at outlet similar to the inlet side can be used.

7.1.2.3 Parameters Fan

On page Parameters you have to put in or to modify parameters resulting from approximation
functions in dependence on specific speed nq or flow rate Q.
See Approximation functions 226 .

For details of how to handle the parameter edit fields please see Edit fields with empirical
functions 98 .

Parameter and efficiency values can be handled manually

or can be switched to automatic update by the checkbox
on top of the page. Then the default values are used
always, even after design point modifications (see Global
setup 108 ).

If the automatic mode is not selected the current default values can be specified by one of the
following options:

globally by the button on top of the page

regionally by the default button within the Parameters or Efficiency region

individually by the default button within the input field when selected

Parameters

The panel Parameters allows defining alternative parameters in each case for the
calculation of the following impeller diameters:

inlet outlet

dS1, dH1 dS2, dH2

For dS2-calculation

§ dimensionless expression for the specific energy:

Work coefficient

(= pressure and head 0.7 ...1.3 centrifugal impeller

coefficient) 0.25...0.7 mixed-flow impeller
0.1 ...0.6 axial impeller

§ high ® small dS2, flat characteristic curve

low ® high dS2, steep characteristic curve

Specific diameter § according to Cordier diagram (see Dimensions 337 )

§ dimensionless flow rate

Flow coefficient j
§ high ® small dS2, flat characteristic curve
low ® high dS2, steep characteristic curve

For dH2 calculation

Can be estimated under assumption 2

= 90° @ hub and c u·u = const. by:

Diameter ratio dH2/dS2 d H2 


dS2 2

For dS1/dH1-calculation

Meridional velocity
ratio c m2/c m1

strictly axial dH2 = dH1 and dS2 = dS1

Diameter ratio
dH1/dS1 const. at hub dH2 = dH1

const. at mid-span dM2 = dM1

const. at shroud dS2 = dS1

Efficiency

In panel Efficiency you have to specify several efficiencies. You have to distinguish between design
relevant efficiencies and efficiencies used for information only:

Design relevant

· total-total efficiency tt

· volumetric efficiency v

+
· additional total-total efficiency tt
(displayed for information only, see Global setup 108 )

Information only

· mechanical efficiency m

· motor efficiency mot

+
The additional total-total efficiency tt
is used for impeller dimensioning in order to compensate
additionall flow losses .

The losses resulting in energy dissipation from the fluid form the internal efficiency.


I  tt  v  tt

Impeller and mechanical efficiency form the overall efficiency (coupling efficiency) of the stage St
.

*
When considering motor losses additionally the overall efficiency of the stage incl. motor St
is
defined.

PQ PQ: power output, see above

St   Im
PD
PD : mechanical power demand (coupling/ driving power)

* PQ
St   Stmot Pel: electrical power demand of motor
Pel

The following summary illustrates the single efficiencies and their classification:

Relevant for
classification efficiencies
impeller design

+ additional total-
tt
total
yes: for energy
stage impeller
transmission
tt total-total

V volumetric yes: for flow rate

m mechanical
no: for overall
information only
stage incl.
electrical mot motor
motor

The volumetric efficiency is a quantity for the deviation of effective flow rate Q from total flow rate
~
inside the impeller Q :

Q
V  ~  0.70 ... 0.95
Q (rising with decreasing tip clearance)

The mechanical efficiency mainly includes the friction losses in bearings and seals:

Pm
  1  0.95 ... 0.995
P (rising with impeller size)

If the check box "Use for main dimensions" is set, then main dimension calculation is done on
the basis of Yef f = 0.5(Y/ +Y). Otherwise Y - specific work without losses - is used.

Information

In the right area of the register Parameter you can find again some calculated values for
information:

PQ
Required driving power PD 
St

Power loss PL  PD  PQ  PD 1  St 

Internal efficiency lm  tt V

PQ
Stage efficiency St   Im
PD

* PQ
Stage efficiency incl. motor St   Stmot
Pel

Assembly Pressure difference Remark


p tt  p tt,Imp   D   GV  c 2m2
2
  d   d 4 
2 inline installation,
 D  0.1   2  H2    H2  
  dS2   dS2   resistance coefficients according
 
to Wallis 682
 c2 
 GV  0.1   1  2u 2 
 c m2
 


p tt  p tt,Imp   D   GV  c 2m2
2
inline installation, Carnot type
    d H2 diffuser
  d H2  
2 4
  d H2
 D   1   0.5  0.95     2     
  
  d S2     d S2   d S2  
resistance coefficients according
 c 2
 to Wallis 682
 GV  0.1   1  2u 2 
 c m2 


inline installation, swirl assumed

to dissipate in duct pseudo
total-to-total pressure rise

resistance coefficients according

to Wallis 682


p ts  p tt, A   D ca2
2
  d 2 
ca  c m2  1   H2  
  dS2  
 


p ts  p tt,B   D ca2
2
  d H2 
2
 exhaust installation
ca  c m2  1    
  dS2  
  potential pressure recovery in
exhaust jet not taken into account
 
p ts  p tt,Imp   GV c 2m2  c 2m2
2 2
 c2 
 GV  0.1   1  2u 2 
 c m2 


 
p ts  p tt,Imp  c 2m2  c 2u 2
2 2

7.1.2.4 Dimensions

Individual main dimensions can be calculated separately using the button inside the value field.

You may accept the proposed values or you can modify them slightly, e.g. to meet a certain
normalized diameter.

In case the checkbox Automatic is activated a new calculation will accomplished after any change
of parameter. Then the manual alteration of the main dimensions is not possible.

Neighboring components

In specific cases the dimensions of the neighboring components at inlet and/ or outlet can be used
to get exactly matching geometry.

This feature is available only for explicitly uncoupled 67 components or side-by-side impellers.

Information

In the Value section the following variables are displayed for information which result from calculated
or determined main dimensions:

Flow properties at: static pressure p

- impeller inlet total pressure pt
- impeller outlet volume flow Q
mass flow
swirl s

Velocity triangles at: velocities u, c m , c m *, c u, c, wu, w

- impeller inlet
- impeller outlet flow angles

Work coefficient

Flow coefficient

Meridional flow coefficient

1/ 4
1/ 4  Y 
Specific diameter   1.05 d2S  
t
1/ 2 Q 2 
 tS 

Q
Average inlet velocity c m1 
 4 d2S1 d2H1 

Inlet abs. circ. velocity component

Inlet relative velocity

Q
Average outlet velocity c m2 
 4 d 2
S2  d2H2 

1
Outlet circ. velocity component c u2  Y  u 1c u1 
u2

Outlet relative velocity

Meridional velocity ratio

Relative velocity ratio

Axial force (thrust)

Reynolds number with d1 = highest diameter at inlet

with b1 = width at inlet

with d2 = highest diameter at outlet

with b2 = width at outlet

NPSHR estimation (Available at inlet)

(Pumps only)

Available head level distance to vaporization at

impeller inlet (pv = fluid vapor pressure)

Lobanoff/ Ross

see diagram below this table

Pfleiderer

with loss coefficients

c
= 1.1 … 1.35, w = (0.03) 0.1 … 0.3

Gülich

with suction specific speed nSS = 160…280

Stepanoff

with cavitation number = 1.22 10-3 nq4/3

Petermann

with suction number Sq = (0.2) 0.4…0.6 (2.0)

Europump

NPSHR
prediction
according to
Lobanoff/ Ross

The Meridional preview is until now based on the main dimensions only.

The Cordier diagram can be used for checking the impeller diameter d2.

See Cordier 418 .

The Velocity triangles are the result of a mid-span calculation and are based on the design
point 108 and the main dimensions.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

In/outlet cross section ratio is unusual.

Meridional contour should be defined with an appropriate in/outlet width.

7.1.3 Centrifugal Compressor

Impeller | Main dimensions

The Main Dimensions menu item is used to define main dimensions of the impeller. Main
Dimensions are forming the most important basis for all following design steps.

The real flow in a compressor impeller is turbulent and three-

dimensional. Secondary flows, separation and reattachment in
boundary layers, transient recirculation areas and other features
may occur. Nevertheless it is useful - and it is common practice
in the compressor design theory - to simplify the realistic flow
applying representative streamlines for the first design
approach.

Employing 1D-streamline theory the following cross sections

are significant in particular:
· suction area/ inlet (index 1)
· leading edge (index LE)
· discharge side/ outlet (index 2)

Details

¢ Setup 327

¢ Parameters 330

¢ Dimensions 337

7.1.3.1 Setup

On page Setup you can specify some basic settings.

General

· Manual dimensioning
In manual dimensioning mode the main dimensions and blade angles are not calculated by
CFturbo. All these values are user-defined input values.

· Splitter blades (not for axial machines)

Design impeller with or without splitter blades.

· Material density 415

area.

· Unshrouded
Design a shrouded (closed) or unshrouded (open) impeller.
For an unshrouded impeller you have to define the tip clearance, optional different values at
inlet and outlet.

· Inflow swirl
Either the outlet swirl of the upstream component will be used for the determination of the inlet
swirl or the absolute inlet flow angle.

Multi stage

For a multi stage design the panel Multi stage options 416 is available.

Initial default setting

Information

Some design point values are displayed in the right Information panel when selecting the page
Values (see Global setup 108 ).

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Inconsistent inflow swirl in ‹Setup› part:

Option ''..." yields a highly deviating inlet swirl compared with the upstream component
or design point.

7.1.3.2 Parameters

On page Parameters you have to put in or to modify parameters resulting from approximation
functions in dependence on specific speed nq or flow rate Q.
See Approximation functions 226 .

For details of how to handle the parameter edit fields please see Edit fields with empirical
functions 98 .

Parameter and efficiency values can be handled manually

or can be switched to automatic update by the checkbox
on top of the page. Then the default values are used
always, even after design point modifications (see Global
setup 108 ).

If the automatic mode is not selected the current default values can be specified by one of the
following options:

globally by the button on top of the page

regionally by the default button within the Parameters or Efficiency region

individually by the default button within the input field when selected

Parameters

The panel Parameters allows defining alternative values in

each case for the calculation of the following impeller main
dimensions:

· suction diameter dS

· impeller diameter d2

· impeller width b2

For d2-calculation

§ dimensionless expression for the specific enthalpy his =Y

Work coefficient and h=Yef f resp.

(= pressure and head coefficient)

§ high ® small d2, flat characteristic curve

low ® high d2, steep characteristic curve

§ dimensionless flow rate

Flow coefficient j

0.01 narrow centrifugal impeller, untwisted blades

0.15 mixed-flow impeller, twisted blades

Specific diameter § according to Cordier diagram (see Dimensions 337 )

§ dimensionless peripheral speed of impeller related to total

inlet speed of sound
Machine Mach number Mau u2
Mau 
at ,S

Peripheral speed u2 § Limiting values due to strength as a function of the material

For b2-calculation

Outlet width ratio b2/d2 § 0.01...0.15 (with nq rising)

§ dimensionless flow rate

Q2 c
m   2m
Meridional flow coefficient jm d2b2u2 u2

0.10...0.50 (with nq rising)

Abs. outlet flow angle 2 § 16°...30°

For dLE-calculation (optional)

Diameter ratio dLE/d2 dLE/d2=0.3...0.8

Relative deceleration w2/wLE w2/wLE>0.7 or f(b2/d2)

For bLE-calculation (optional)

Meridional deceleration c m2/c mLE c m2/c mLE = 0.8...1.25

for dS-calculation

Meridional deceleration c mLE/c m1 c mLE/c m1 = 0.9...1.1

or c m2/c m1 c m2/c m1 = 0.7...1.3

Relative inlet flow angle 1

Relative inlet Mach number MwS

Diameter ratio dS/d2 dS/d2 = 0.65...0.8

Efficiency

In panel Efficiency you have to specify several efficiencies. You have to distinguish between design
relevant efficiencies and efficiencies used for information only:

Design relevant

· total-total efficiency tt

· volumetric efficiency v

+
· additional total-total efficiency tt
(displayed for information only, see Global setup 108 )

Information only

· mechanical efficiency m

· motor efficiency mot

+
The additional total-total efficiency tt
is used for impeller dimensioning in order to compensate
additional flow losses.

The losses resulting in energy dissipation from the fluid form the internal efficiency.


I  tt v tt

Impeller and mechanical efficiency form the overall efficiency (coupling efficiency) of the stage St
.

*
When considering motor losses additionally the overall efficiency of the stage incl. motor St
is
defined.

PQ PQ: output power, see above

St   Im
PD
PD : mechanical power demand (coupling/ driving power)

* PQ
St   Stmot Pel: electrical power demand of motor
Pel

The following summary illustrates the single efficiencies and their classification:

Relevant for
classification efficiencies
impeller design

yes: for energy

stage C additional casing
transmission

tt total-total

impeller V volumetric yes: for flow rate

no: for overall

m mechanical
information only

stage incl. motor electrical mot motor

The impeller efficiency htt describes the energy losses caused by friction and vorticity. Friction
losses mainly originate from shear stresses in boundary layers. Vorticity losses are caused by
turbulence and on the other hand by changes of flow cross section and flow direction which may lead
to secondary flow, flow separation, wake behind blades etc.. The impeller efficiency is the ratio
between the actual specific energy Y and the energy transmitted by the impeller blades without any
losses:

Y
tt  ~
Y

The volumetric efficiency is a quantity for the deviation of effective flow rate Q from total flow rate
~
inside the impeller Q which also includes the circulating flow within the casing:

Q
v  ~  0.930.99
Q (rising with impeller size)

The mechanical efficiency mainly includes the friction losses in bearings and seals:

Pm
m  1   0.95...0.995
P (rising with impeller size)

Impeller efficiency and volumetric efficiency are most important for the impeller dimensioning
~ ~
because of their influence to Q and/or Y . The mechanical efficiency is affecting only the required
driving power of the machine.

If the check box "Use for main dimensions" is set, then main dimension calculation is done on
the basis of 0.5( his / + his ). Otherwise his - the isentropic specific enthalpy - is used.

Information

In the right panel of the tab sheet Parameter you can find again some calculated values for
information:

Required driving power

Power loss PL  PD  PQ  PD 1  St 

Internal efficiency Im  ttv

PQ
Stage efficiency St   Im
PD

* PQ
Stage efficiency incl. motor St   Stmot
Pel

 1  2 
t   1  c2   1
 2cp TtS 
ts  
Total-to-static efficiency
t  1

(perfect gas model)

n
p  n  1

Polytropic efficiency  1

(n .. polytropic exponent

.. isentropic exponent)

7.1.3.3 Dimensions

In the panel Shaft, the required shaft diameter is computed.

¢ Shaft/ Hub 418

The hub diameter is determined by the user and depends on the shaft-hub connection.

Individual main dimensions can be calculated separately using the button inside the value field.

You may accept the proposed values or you can modify them slightly, e.g. to meet a certain
normalized diameter.

In case the checkbox Automatic is activated a new calculation will accomplished after any change
of parameter. Then the manual alteration of the main dimensions is not possible.

Neighboring components

In specific cases the dimensions of the neighboring components at inlet and/ or outlet can be used
to get exactly matching geometry.

This feature is available only for explicitly uncoupled 67 components or side-by-side impellers.

Information

In the Value section the following variables are displayed for information which result from calculated
or determined main dimensions:

Flow properties at: density r

- impeller inlet static pressure p
- impeller outlet temperature T
total density r t
total pressure pt
total temperature Tt
volume flow Q
mass flow
swirl s

Velocity triangles at: velocities u, c m , c m *, c u, c, wu, w

- impeller inlet flow angles
- impeller outlet Mach numbers Mac , Maw, Mau

Work coefficient

Flow coefficient

Meridional flow coefficient

Specific diameter

Tangential force coefficient

Outlet width ratio b2/d2 = 0.01...0.15

Diameter ratio dS/d2

2 2
w mS  w uS
Relative Tip Mach number Ma wS   0.75  0.85
RZT S

Machine Mach number

Degree of Reaction

Reynolds number with d1 = highest diameter at inlet

with b1 = width at inlet

with d2 = highest diameter at outlet

with b2 = width at outlet

In the impeller outlet (cross section 2) two different total pressure values are given: pt2 and pt2Imp.
This is based upon the following assumption: All non-rotating components of the project are
considered as being loss-less. An additional efficiency can be defined in the global setup 108 .
Additional losses connected to this additional efficiency are considered within the impeller. That is to
say, straight after the trailing edge an adiabatic expansion takes place reducing the total pressure of
the impeller pt2Imp to the value at the inlet of the next non-rotating component pt2. In accordance to
following diagram these two different pressure values are calculated (assuming perfect gas behavior)
by:

 

a  h t 2 sImp   1  h ts   1
 ht 2s 
n p t 2Imp  p t1    p t1 1  
 1
p t 2  p t1    
  h t1   h t1  tt 
 h t1  d
.

All thermodynamic values are calculated on the basis of the total pressure pt2Imp in cross section 2.

If a stator is located prior the impeller, boundary conditions for the determination of the main
dimensions will be calculated on the basis of the thermodynamic state at the outlet of this stator. In
case of an undefined thermodynamic state at this location the inlet boundary conditions (i.e. total
pressure and temperature as well as swirl) will be taken from the global setup and a warning is
generated.

It might be that for the chosen configuration of global setup and main dimensions a reasonable
thermodynamic state cannot be calculated. This may be the case if e.g. the mass flow is too high for
the chosen cross sections. Then again a warning is generated.

The Meridional preview is based on the until now designed main dimensions.

The Cordier diagram can be used for checking the impeller diameter d2.

See Cordier 418 .

The Velocity triangles are the result of a mid-span calculation and are based on the design
point 108 and the main dimensions.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Thermodynamic state cannot be calculated at inlet/outlet.

Possible reason: choked flow. Consider change of main dimensions or Global setup.

The dimensions might be too tight for the Increase the dimensions (width, diameters etc.)
specified mass flow and inlet conditions. In other or change the Global setup 108 (e.g. decrease
words the mass flow is higher than the choked mass flow, increase pressure, decrease
mass flow rate for the particular inlet condition temperature).
and the respective cross section.

In/outlet cross section ratio is unusual.

Meridional contour should be defined with an appropriate in/outlet width.

Inlet/ Outlet: Pressure and temperature not within the gaseous phase of the fluid.
Check inlet condition and geometry.

If the fluid model is CoolProp or REFPROP, fluid Decrease main dimensions (width, diameter
properties will be calculated as function of etc.) or change Global setup 108 (e.g., increase
pressure and temperature. In case the local mass flow, decrease pressure, increase
pressure is not below the vapor pressure at the temperature).
temperature, the fluid state is not valid 236 .

7.1.4 Radial-inflow Gas Turbine

Rotor | Main dimensions

The Main Dimensions menu item is used to define main dimensions of the rotor. Main Dimensions
are forming the most important basis for all following design steps.

The real flow in a turbine rotor is turbulent and three-dimensional.

Secondary flows, separation and reattachment in boundary layers,
transient recirculation areas and other features may occur.
Nevertheless it is useful - and it is common practice in the turbine
design theory - to simplify the realistic flow applying representative
streamlines for the first design approach.

Employing 1D-streamline theory the following cross sections are

significant in particular:
· inlet (index 1)
· outlet/ suction side (index 2)

The cross section 2 is situated at the suction side in the connection

flange of the component following the turbine.

Details

¢ Setup 347

¢ Parameters 350

¢ Dimensions 350

The design of the main dimensions has to be made in a strict order. This will be secured by the
following:One step within the design has to be finished completely before the next can be
accomplished. That is to say, the changeability of a tab sheet will be disabled by CFturbo until all
necessary parameters have been specified.

7.1.4.1 Setup

On page Setup you can specify some basic settings.

General

· Manual dimensioning
In manual dimensioning mode the main dimensions and blade angles are not calculated by
CFturbo. All these values are user-defined input values.

· Splitter blades (not for axial machines)

Design impeller with or without splitter blades.

· Material density 415

The material density of the impeller is an informational value that is not relevant for the
hydraulic design but is used for the calculation of moments of inertia. Density values can be

directly entered or selected from a list by pressing the settings button next to the input
area.

· Unshrouded
Design a shrouded (closed) or unshrouded (open) impeller.
For an unshrouded impeller you have to define the tip clearance, optional different values at
inlet and outlet.

· Inflow swirl
Either the outlet swirl of the upstream component will be used for the determination of the inlet
swirl, the relative inlet flow angle 1, the outlet circumferential velocity c u2, or the degree of
reaction (the latter only if total-to-static pressure ratio pts is specified, see global setup 108 ).

Multi stage

For a multi stage design the panel Multi stage options 416 is available.

Initial default setting

manually in the appropriate design steps. See Preferences: Impeller/ Stator settings 220 for more
information.

Information

Some design point values are displayed in the right Information panel when selecting the page
Values (see Global setup 108 ).

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Inconsistent inflow swirl in ‹Setup› part:

Option ''..." yields a highly deviating inlet swirl compared with the upstream component
or design point.

7.1.4.2 Parameters

On page Parameters you have to put in or to modify parameters resulting from approximation
functions in dependence on specific speed nq or flow rate Q.
See Approximation functions 226 .

For details of how to handle the parameter edit fields please see Edit fields with empirical
functions 98 .

Parameter and efficiency values can be handled manually

or can be switched to automatic update by the checkbox
on top of the page. Then the default values are used
always, even after design point modifications (see Global
setup 108 ).

If the automatic mode is not selected the current default values can be specified by one of the
following options:

globally by the button on top of the page

regionally by the default button within the Parameters or Efficiency region

individually by the default button within the input field when selected

Parameters

The panel Parameters allows defining alternative values in

each case for the calculation of the following rotor main
dimensions:

· suction diameter dS2

· hub diameter dH2

· rotor diameter d1

· inlet width b1

For details of how to handle the parameter edit fields please see Edit fields with empirical
functions 98 .

The diameter coefficient is a parameter for the Balje diagram 419 but not a design parameter. With its
help suggestions for isentropic velocity ratio total-static ts as well as for the inlet width ratio b1/d1
can be get (only if total-to-static pressure ratio pts is specified, see global setup) 108 .

One of the following parameters has to be specified for the calculation of the rotor diameter d1.

Coefficient of a flow force pointing in tangential direction

Tangential force coefficient
3 ... 4 Francis high-speed turbine
4 ... 8 Normal-speed turbine
8 ...10 Low-speed turbine

Ratio of work to the square of the meridional speed

Coefficient ratio
6 ...10 Francis high-speed turbine
10...12 Normal-speed turbine
12...30 Low-speed turbine

u1: Peripheral velocity at inlet

Isentropic velocity ratio total-static c 0: spouting velocity

Defaults by Balje diagram 419 (only if total-to-static

pressure ratio pts is specified, see global setup) 108

Between the work coefficient the relative flow angle b1 and the tangential force coefficient / m
there is the following relation:

One of the following parameters has to be specified for the calculation of the rotor inlet width b1.

Default according to equation above:

Meridional flow coefficient

Inlet width ratio

Defaults by Balje diagram 419 (only if total-to-static
pressure ratio pts is specified, see global setup) 108
b1/d1

For all further geometric variables guess values have to be given:

Diameter ratio d2/d1 ~0.5

Meridional acceleration
c m2/c m1 1.005..1.05

Meridional acceleration (suction

1.005..1.05
side) c mS/c m2
or
Diameter ratio dS/d1 ~0.7

Diameter ratio dH /dS ~0.3

There are three modes for the definition of the hub diameter dH2:

· Direct input in the tab sheet Dimensions 356 (check box "Calculate hub diameter"
deactivated)

· Combo box option "Diameter ratio dH /dS": automatic calculation with dH2 = dH /dS * dS2.

· Combo box option "Diameter ratio d2/d1": automatic calculation with dH2 = dH /dS * dS. Here
the diameter ratio dH /dS will be adjusted in a way that the guideline of the geometrical
ratios 360 will be met.

With option "diameter ratio dS/d1" for the dS2-calculation the option "Diameter ratio d2/d1" is not
available.

Efficiency

In the group Efficiency the following efficiencies need to be given:

Design relevant

· Rotor efficiency tt
(total-total: pressure ratio ptt specified in global setup) 108 or

· Rotor efficiency ts
(total-static: pressure ratio pts specified in global setup) 108

Information only

· Mechanical efficiency m

Internal and mechanical efficiency form the overall efficiency (coupling efficiency):

PD PQ: (isentropic) Rotor power

ttSt   tt m
PQ
PD : Power output (coupling/ driving power)

The rotor efficiency (or blade efficiency) tt

describes the energy losses within the turbine caused by
friction and vorticity. Friction losses mainly originate from shear stresses in boundary layers.
Vorticity losses are caused by turbulence and on the other hand by changes of flow cross section
and flow direction which may lead to secondary flow, flow separation, wake behind blades etc.. The
rotor efficiency is the ratio between the actual specific work Y and the specific work at loss less
transmission:

~Y
tt 
Y

The mechanical efficiency mainly includes the friction losses in bearings and seals:

Pm
m  1   0.95...0.995
P (rising with impeller size)

If the check box "Use for main dimensions" is set, then main dimension calculation is done on
the basis of h= his · . Otherwise his - the isentropic specific enthalpy - is used.

Information

In the right panel of the tab sheet Parameter some variables are displayed for Information:

Actual Power PD PD = PQ· ttSt

Power loss PL PL = PQ - PD

calculated with total density in the outlet:

Flow Q

Total pressure inlet pt1 pt1 = p×pt2

Pressure ratio total-total

Pressure ratio total-static  ts

Stage efficiency total-total ttSt

Isentropic efficiency total-static ts


p    1
n
Polytropic efficiency n 1

(n .. polytropic exponent

.. isentropic exponent)

In general for cost reasons single-stage & single-intake machines are preferred covering a range of
about 10 < nq < 400. In exceptional cases it may become necessary to design a rotor for extremely
low specific speed values (nq < 10). These rotors are characterized by large rotor diameters and low
rotor widths. The ratio of free flow cross section area to wetted surfaces becomes unfavorable and is
causing high frictional losses. To prevent this one may increase either rotational speed n or mass
flow rate if possible. An alternative solution could be the design of a multi-stage turbine reducing
the pressure drop of a single-stage. If especially high specific speed values (nq > 400) do occur one
can reduce rotational speed n or mass flow rate if feasible. Another option would be to operate
several single-stage turbines - having a lower nq - in parallel.

Please note: CFturbo is preferably used between 10 < nq < 150 – radial and mixed-flow rotors.

7.1.4.3 Dimensions

In the panel Shaft, the required shaft diameter is computed.

¢ Shaft/ Hub 418

Individual main dimensions can be calculated separately using the button inside the value field.

You may accept the proposed values or you can modify them slightly, e.g. to meet a certain
normalized diameter.

In case the checkbox Automatic is activated a new calculation will accomplished after any change

of parameter. Then the manual alteration of the main dimensions is not possible.

Neighboring components

In specific cases the dimensions of the neighboring components at inlet and/ or outlet can be used
to get exactly matching geometry.

This feature is available only for explicitly uncoupled 67 components or side-by-side impellers.

Information

In the Value section the following variables are displayed for information which result from calculated
or determined main dimensions:

Flow properties at: density r

- impeller inlet static pressure p

- impeller outlet temperature T
total density r t
total pressure pt
total temperature Tt
volume flow Q
mass flow
swirl s

Velocity triangles at: velocities u, c m , c m *, c u, c, wu, w

- impeller inlet flow angles
- impeller outlet Mach numbers Mac , Maw, Mau

Work coefficient

Flow coefficient

Meridional flow coefficient

1
h ttis 4
Specific diameter   1.054  d1  1
Q tS 2

Peripheral speed at inlet u1    d1  n

Machine Mach Number

Blade width at inlet b *1

Peripheral speed at outlet u 2    d2  n

Mean diameter at outlet

Width at outlet

Ratio Width-diameter at inlet b1/d1 guideline: 0.05..0.15

d2/d2min with:
guideline:
Diameter ratio
1.005..1.05

guideline:
Ratio radius-width at outlet
1.005..1.05

u1
Isentropic velocity ratio  ts 
2his

Reynolds number with d1 = highest diameter at inlet

with b1 = width at inlet

with d2 = highest diameter at outlet

with b2 = width at outlet

The guidelines given in the last column should be matched within the design.

The Meridional preview is based on the main dimensions designed until this point.

The Cordier diagram can be used for checking the impeller diameter d2.

See Cordier 418 .

The Velocity triangles are the result of a mid-span calculation and are based on the design
point 108 and the main dimensions.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

differs by more than 25° from the flow imposed by the upstream component.

differs by more than 25° from 1mean.

differs by more than 25° from the flow imposed by the degree of reaction.

The dimensions and the design point yield an Change the dimensions (width, diameters etc.)
estimated average relative inlet flow angle 1 that or change the Global setup 108 (e.g. mass flow,
differs by more than 25° from the relative inlet pressure ratio) or change inlet swirl in the
flow angle imposed by the either of Setup 347 by either of parameters given on the
· swirl of the upstream component left hand side.

Problem Possible solutions

· 1mean
· degree of reaction R
see Setup 347 .

Thermodynamic state cannot be calculated at inlet/outlet.

Possible reason: choked flow. Consider change of main dimensions or Global setup.

In/outlet cross section ratio is unusual.

Meridional contour should be defined with an appropriate in/outlet width.

Inlet/ Outlet: Pressure and temperature not within the gaseous phase of the fluid.
Check inlet condition and geometry.

7.1.5 Axial Gas Turbine / Compressor

Rotor | Main dimensions

The Main Dimensions menu item is used to define main dimensions of the axial rotor. Main
Dimensions are forming the most important basis for all following design steps.

The real flow in the impeller/rotor is turbulent and three- Details

dimensional. Secondary flows, separation and reattachment in
boundary layers, transient recirculation areas and other features ¢ Setup 366

may occur. Nevertheless it is useful - and it is common practice in

the turbine design theory - to simplify the realistic flow applying ¢ Parameters Gas
representative streamlines for the first design approach. Turbine 369

Employing 1D-streamline theory the following cross sections are ¢ Parameters

significant in particular: Compressor 375

· inlet (index 1)
· outlet (index 2)
¢ Dimensions 380

7.1.5.1 Setup

On page Setup you can specify some basic settings.

General

· Manual dimensioning
In manual dimensioning mode the main dimensions and blade angles are not calculated by
CFturbo. All these values are user-defined input values.

· Splitter blades (not for axial machines)

Design impeller with or without splitter blades.

· Material density 415

· Unshrouded

Design a shrouded (closed) or unshrouded (open) impeller.

For an unshrouded impeller you have to define the tip clearance, optional different values at
inlet and outlet.

· Impeller type
Turbine only: select either Standard or Rocket engine rotor type.

· Inflow swirl
Either the outlet swirl of the upstream component will be used for the determination of the inlet
swirl or the absolute inlet flow angle or the degree of reaction (the latter only t if total-to-static
pressure ratio pts is specified, see global setup 108 ). If the absolute inlet flow angle was chosen
it is to be specified whether the inlet flow is sub or super sonic.

· Blade design mode

Multi stage

For a multi stage design the panel Multi stage options 416 is available.

Initial default setting

Information

Some design point values are displayed in the right Information panel when selecting the page
Values (see Global setup 108 ).

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Inconsistent inflow swirl in ‹Setup› part:

Option ''..." yields a highly deviating inlet swirl compared with the upstream component
or design point.

7.1.5.2 Parameters Gas Turbine

On page Parameters you have to put in or to modify parameters resulting from approximation
functions in dependence on specific speed nq or flow rate Q.
See Approximation functions 226 .

For details of how to handle the parameter edit fields please see Edit fields with empirical
functions 98 .

Parameter and efficiency values can be handled manually

or can be switched to automatic update by the checkbox
on top of the page. Then the default values are used
always, even after design point modifications (see Global
setup 108 ).

If the automatic mode is not selected the current default values can be specified by one of the
following options:

globally by the button on top of the page

regionally by the default button within the Parameters or Efficiency region

individually by the default button within the input field when selected

Parameters

The panel Parameters allows defining alternative parameters in each case for the
calculation of the following impeller diameters:

inlet outlet

dS1, dH1 dS2, dH2

The diameter coefficient is a parameter for the Balje diagram 419 but not a design parameter. With its
help suggestions for isentropic velocity ratio total-static ts as well as for the inlet width ratio b1/d1 or
the diameter ratio dH /dS can be get (only if total-to-static pressure ratio pts is specified, see global
setup) 108 .

One of the following parameters has to be specified for the calculation of the mean inlet diameter
0.5(dS1+dH1).

Isentropic velocity ratio total-total u: Peripheral velocity at inlet

c t0: spouting velocity

tt
= u/c t0 c t0  2  htt
(only if total-to-total pressure ratio ptt is specified, see
global setup) 108

u: Peripheral velocity at inlet

Isentropic velocity ratio total-static c 0: spouting velocity

ts
= u/c 0 c 0  2  hts
Defaults by Balje diagram 419 (only if total-to-static
pressure ratio pts is specified, see global setup) 108

One of the following parameters has to be specified for the calculation of the rotor inlet width b1.

Inlet hub diameter dH1

Diameter ratio

dH /dS dH1  dH dS1

Inlet width ratio h: inlet width

Defaults by Balje diagram 419 (only if total-to-static
h/dS1 pressure ratio pts is specified, see global setup) 108

For dS2/dH2-calculation

strictly axial dH2 = dH1 and dS2 = dS1

Meridional velocity const. at hub dH2 = dH1

ratio c m2/c m1

const. at mid-span dM2 = dM1

const. at shroud dS2 = dS1

Efficiency

In the group Efficiency the following efficiencies need to be given:

Design relevant

· Rotor efficiency tt
(total-total: pressure ratio ptt specified in global setup) 108 or

· Rotor efficiency ts
(total-static: pressure ratio pts specified in global setup) 108

htt
ts  
htsis

Information only

· Mechanical efficiency m

Internal and mechanical efficiency form the overall efficiency (coupling efficiency):

PD PQ: (isentropic) Rotor power

 ttSt    tt m
PQ
PD : Power output (coupling/ driving power)

The rotor efficiency (or blade efficiency) tt

describes the energy losses within the turbine caused by
friction and vorticity. Friction losses mainly originate from shear stresses in boundary layers.
Vorticity losses are caused by turbulence and on the other hand by changes of flow cross section
and flow direction which may lead to secondary flow, flow separation, wake behind blades etc.. The
rotor efficiency is the ratio between the actual specific enthalpy difference and the ideal (isentropic)
specific enthalpy difference at loss less transmission:

htt
tt  
httis

The mechanical efficiency mainly includes the friction losses in bearings and seals:

Pm
m  1   0.95...0.995,
P

rising with impeller size.

Information

In the right panel of the tab sheet Parameter some variables are displayed for Information:

actual Power PD PD = PQ· ttSt

Power loss PL PL = PQ - PD

calculated with total density in the outlet:

Flow Qt 
m
Qt 
t2

Pressure ratio total-total  tt

Pressure ratio total-static  ts

Efficiency total-total tt

Efficiency total-static ts


p    1
n
Polytropic efficiency n 1

(n .. polytropic exponent

.. isentropic exponent)

In general for cost reasons single-stage & single-intake machines are preferred covering a range of
about 10 < nq < 400. If especially high specific speed values (nq > 400) do occur one can reduce
rotational speed n or mass flow rate if feasible. Another option would be to operate several single-
stage turbines - having a lower nq - in parallel.

7.1.5.3 Parameters Compressor

On page Parameters you have to put in or to modify parameters resulting from approximation
functions in dependence on specific speed nq or flow rate Q.
See Approximation functions 226 .

For details of how to handle the parameter edit fields please see Edit fields with empirical
functions 98 .

Parameter and efficiency values can be handled manually

or can be switched to automatic update by the checkbox
on top of the page. Then the default values are used
always, even after design point modifications (see Global
setup 108 ).

If the automatic mode is not selected the current default values can be specified by one of the
following options:

globally by the button on top of the page

regionally by the default button within the Parameters or Efficiency region

individually by the default button within the input field when selected

Parameters

The panel Parameters allows defining alternative parameters in each case for the
calculation of the following impeller diameters:

inlet outlet

dS1, dH1 dS2, dH2

For dS2-calculation

§ dimensionless expression for the specific energy:

Work coefficient 0.1 ...0.6 axial impeller

§ high ® small dS2, flat characteristic curve
low ® high dS2, steep characteristic curve

Diameter coefficient § according to Cordier diagram (see Dimensions 337 )

For dH2 calculation

Can be estimated under assumption 2

= 90° @ hub and c u·u = const. by:

Diameter ratio dH2/dS2 d H2 


dS2 2

For dS1/dH1-calculation

Meridional velocity
ratio c m2/c m1

strictly axial dH2 = dH1 and dS2 = dS1

Diameter ratio
dH1/dS1 const. at hub dH2 = dH1

const. at mid-span dM2 = dM1

const. at shroud dS2 = dS1

Efficiency

In panel Efficiency you have to specify several efficiencies. You have to distinguish between design
relevant efficiencies and efficiencies used for information only:

Design relevant

· total-total efficiency tt

Information only

· mechanical efficiency m

· motor efficiency mot

Impeller and mechanical efficiency form the overall efficiency (coupling efficiency) of the stage St
.

*
When considering motor losses additionally the overall efficiency of the stage incl. motor St
is
defined.

PQ PQ: power output, see above

St   tt m
PD
PD : mechanical power demand (coupling/ driving power)

* PQ
St   Stmot Pel: electrical power demand of motor
Pel

The following summary illustrates the single efficiencies and their classification:

Relevant for
classification efficiencies
impeller design

yes: for energy

tt total-total
transmission
Stage

m mechanical
no: for overall
information only
stage incl.
electrical mot motor
motor

The total-total efficiency describe the energy losses within the compressor. Friction losses mainly
originate from shear stresses in boundary layers. Vorticity losses are caused by turbulence and on
the other hand by changes of flow cross section and flow direction which may lead to secondary
flow, flow separation, wake behind blades etc. This impeller efficiency is the ratio between the ideal
(isentropic) specific enthalpy difference at loss less transmission and the actual specific enthalpy
difference :

The volumetric efficiency is a quantity for the deviation of effective flow rate Q from total flow rate

inside the impeller :

(rising with decreasing tip clearance)

The mechanical efficiency mainly includes the friction losses in bearings and seals:

Pm
  1  0.95 ... 0.995
P (rising with impeller size)

If the check box "Use for main dimensions" is set, then main dimension calculation is done on
the basis of Yef f = 0.5(Y/ +Y). Otherwise Y - specific work without losses - is used.

Information

In the right area of the register Parameter you can find again some calculated values for
information:

PQ
Required driving power PD 
St

Power loss PL  PD  PQ  PD 1  St 

Internal efficiency I  tt

PQ
Stage efficiency St   Im
PD

* PQ
Stage efficiency incl. motor St   Stmot
Pel

7.1.5.4 Dimensions

Individual main dimensions can be calculated separately using the button inside the value field.

You may accept the proposed values or you can modify them slightly, e.g. to meet a certain
normalized diameter.

In case the checkbox Automatic is activated a new calculation will accomplished after any change
of parameter. Then the manual alteration of the main dimensions is not possible.

Neighboring components

In specific cases the dimensions of the neighboring components at inlet and/ or outlet can be used
to get exactly matching geometry.

This feature is available only for explicitly uncoupled 67 components or side-by-side impellers.

Information

In the Value section the following variables are displayed for information which result from calculated
or determined main dimensions:

Flow properties at: density r

- impeller inlet static pressure p
- impeller outlet temperature T
total density r t
total pressure pt
total temperature Tt
volume flow Q
mass flow

swirl s

Velocity triangles at: velocities u, c m , c m *, c u, c, wu, w

- impeller inlet flow angles
- impeller outlet Mach numbers Mac , Maw, Mau

Work coefficient

Flow coefficient

Meridional flow coefficient

1
h ttis 4
Specific diameter   1.054  dS1  1
Q t1 2

u1
Isentropic velocity ratio  ts  only turbines
2h ttis

Pressure rise coefficient only compressor

Suction capacity only compressor

Reynolds number with d1 = highest diameter at inlet

with b1 = width at inlet

with d2 = highest diameter at outlet

with b2 = width at outlet

The Meridional preview is based on the main dimensions designed until this point.

The Cordier diagram can be used for checking the impeller diameter d2.

See Cordier 418 .

The Velocity triangles are the result of a mid-span calculation and are based on the design
point 108 and the main dimensions.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Thermodynamic state cannot be calculated at inlet/outlet. Possible reason: choked flow.

The "cu,cm"-specification will not be available.

The dimensions might be too tight for the Increase the dimensions (diameters etc.) or
specified mass flow and inlet conditions. In other change the Global setup 108 (e.g. decrease
words the mass flow is higher than the choked mass flow, increase pressure, decrease
mass flow rate for the particular inlet conditions temperature).
and the respective cross section.
As a result, the cu,cm-specification in the Blade
properties will not be available.

In/outlet cross section ratio is unusual.

Meridional contour should be defined with an appropriate in/outlet width.

Inlet boundary conditions do not fit previous component.

If a stator is located prior the impeller or rotor, Adjust the stator geometry (dimensions or blade
boundary conditions for the determination of the angles) or change the Global setup 108 (e.g.
main dimensions will be calculated on the basis decrease mass flow).
of the thermodynamic state at its outlet. In case
of an undefined thermodynamic state at this
location the inlet boundary conditions (i.e. total
pressure and temperature) will be taken from the
global setup.

Inlet/ Outlet: Pressure and temperature not within the gaseous phase of the fluid.
Check inlet condition and geometry.

7.1.6 Francis Turbine

Runner | Main dimensions

The Main Dimensions menu item is used to define main dimensions of the runner. Main Dimensions
are forming the most important basis for all following design steps.

The real flow in a Francis turbine runner is turbulent and

three-dimensional. Secondary flows, separation and
reattachment in boundary layers, transient recirculation
areas and other features may occur. Nevertheless it is
useful - and it is common practice in the turbine design
theory - to simplify the realistic flow applying representative
streamlines for the first design approach.

Employing 1D-streamline theory the following cross sections

are significant in particular:
· inlet (index 1)
· outlet (index 2)

Details

¢ Setup 388

¢ Parameters 390

¢ Dimensions 390

The design of the main dimensions has to be made in a strict order. This will be secured by the
following: One step within the design has to be finished completely before the next can be
accomplished. That is to say, the changeability of a tab sheet will be disabled by CFturbo until all
necessary parameters have been specified.

7.1.6.1 Setup

On page Setup you can specify some basic settings.

General

· Manual dimensioning
In manual dimensioning mode the main dimensions and blade angles are not calculated by
CFturbo. All these values are user-defined input values.

· Splitter blades (not for axial machines)

Design impeller with or without splitter blades.

· Material density 415

· Unshrouded

Design a shrouded (closed) or unshrouded (open) impeller.

For an unshrouded impeller you have to define the tip clearance, optional different values at
inlet and outlet.

· Inflow swirl
For the determination of the inlet swirl either of the following options can be used:
§ outlet swirl of the upstream component,
§ absolute inlet flow angle 1,
§ relative inlet flow angle ,
1
§ outlet swirl velocity c u2 in accordance to the Euler equation: .

Initial default setting

Information

Some design point values are displayed in the right Information panel when selecting the page

Values (see Global setup 108 ).

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Inconsistent inflow swirl in ‹Setup› part:

Option ''..." yields a highly deviating inlet swirl compared with the upstream component
or design point.

7.1.6.2 Parameters

On page Parameters you have to put in or to modify parameters resulting from approximation
functions in dependence on specific speed nq or flow rate Q.
See Approximation functions 226 .

For details of how to handle the parameter edit fields please see Edit fields with empirical
functions 98 .

Parameter and efficiency values can be handled manually

or can be switched to automatic update by the checkbox
on top of the page. Then the default values are used
always, even after design point modifications (see Global
setup 108 ).

If the automatic mode is not selected the current default values can be specified by one of the
following options:

globally by the button on top of the page

regionally by the default button within the Parameters or Efficiency region

individually by the default button within the input field when selected

Parameters

The panel Parameters allows defining alternative parameters in each case

for the calculation of the following impeller diameters:

inlet outlet

dS1, dH1, b1z dS2, dH2

For dS1-calculation

§ dimensionless expression for the specific energy:

Y  2 and   Yef f  2
Work coefficient 2 2
u2 u2

For dH1 calculation

Diameter ratio dH1/dS1

For dS2 calculation

Diameter ratio dS2/dS1

For b1z calculation

width ratio b1z/dS1

Efficiency

In panel Efficiency you have to specify several efficiencies. You have to distinguish between design
relevant efficiencies and efficiencies used for information only:

Design relevant

· hydraulic efficiency h

· volumetric efficiency v

Information only

· mechanical efficiency m

The losses resulting in energy dissipation from the fluid form the internal efficiency.


I  h  v  h

Internal and mechanical efficiency form the overall efficiency (coupling efficiency) of the stage St
.

PD PQ: Runner power

St   Im
PQ
PD : Power output (coupling/ driving power)

The following summary illustrates the single efficiencies and their classification:

Relevant for
classification efficiencies
impeller design

+
h additional hydraulic
yes: for energy
transmission
internal h hydraulic

stage
V volumetric yes: for flow rate

no: for overall

m mechanical
information only

The obtainable overall efficiency correlates to specific speed and to the size and the type of the
runner as well as to special design features like bypass installations and auxiliary aggregates.
Efficiencies calculated by approximation functions 226 are representing the theoretical reachable
values and they should be corrected by the user if more information about the impeller or the whole
turbine are available.

The hydraulic efficiency (or blade efficiency) describe the energy losses within the turbine caused by
friction and vorticity. Friction losses mainly originate from shear stresses in boundary layers.
Vorticity losses are caused by turbulence and on the other hand by changes of flow cross section
and flow direction which may lead to secondary flow, flow separation, wake behind blades etc.

The volumetric efficiency is the ratio of the flow striking the runner and the flow through the turbine
Q:

The mechanical efficiency mainly includes the friction losses in bearings and seals:

Hydraulic and volumetric efficiency are most important for the runner dimensioning because of their
influence to and/or . The mechanical efficiency is affecting only the actual output power of the
machine.

Information

In the right area of the register Parameter you can find again some calculated values for
information:

Torque

Actual power output PD = PQ· St

Power loss PL  PQ  PD


Internal efficiency I  h  v  h

PD
Stage efficiency St   Im
PQ

7.1.6.3 Dimensions

In the panel Shaft, the required shaft diameter is computed.

¢ Shaft/ Hub 418

The hub diameter is determined by the user and depends on the shaft-hub connection.

The main dimensions can be seen on Main dimensions panel. They can be recomputed by

pressing the Calculate-button. The computation is based on "Euler's Equation of

Turbomachinery", on the continuity equation and the relations for the velocity triangles as well
as on the parameters given in the tab sheets Setup and Parameters.

Individual main dimensions can be calculated separately using the button inside the value field.

You may accept the proposed values or you can modify them slightly, e.g. to meet a certain
normalized diameter.

In case the checkbox Automatic is activated a new calculation will accomplished after any change
of parameter. Then the manual alteration of the main dimensions is not possible.

Neighboring components

In specific cases the dimensions of the neighboring components at inlet and/ or outlet can be used
to get exactly matching geometry.

This feature is available only for explicitly uncoupled 67 components or side-by-side impellers.

Information

In the Value section the following variables are displayed for information which result from calculated
or determined main dimensions:

Flow properties at: static pressure p

- impeller inlet total pressure pt
- impeller outlet volume flow Q
mass flow
swirl s

Velocity triangles at: velocities u, c m , c m *, c u, c, wu, w

- impeller inlet
- impeller outlet flow angles

Work coefficient

Flow coefficient

Meridional flow coefficient

Specific diameter

Inlet velocity

Inlet velocity (net)

Outlet velocity

Outlet velocity (net)

Outlet width ratio

Meridional velocity ratio

Reynolds number with d1 = highest diameter at inlet

with b1 = width at inlet

with d2 = highest diameter at outlet

with b2 = width at outlet

The Meridional preview is until now based on the main dimensions only.

The Cordier diagram can be used for checking the impeller diameter d2.

See Cordier 418 .

The Velocity triangles are the result of a mid-span calculation and are based on the design
point 108 and the main dimensions.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Inlet/ Outlet: Pressure and temperature not within the liquid phase of the fluid.
Check inlet condition and geometry.

In/outlet cross section ratio is unusual.

Meridional contour should be defined with an appropriate in/outlet width.

In/outlet cross section ratio is unusual.

Meridional contour should be defined with an appropriate in/outlet width.

acceleration or deceleration. steps.

7.1.7 Kaplan Turbine

Runner | Main dimensions

The Main Dimensions menu item is used to define main dimensions of the runner. Main Dimensions
are forming the most important basis for all following design steps.

The real flow in a Kaplan turbine runner is turbulent and three- Details
dimensional. Secondary flows, separation and reattachment in boundary
layers, transient recirculation areas and other features may occur. ¢ Setup 403

Nevertheless it is useful - and it is common practice in the turbine design

theory - to simplify the realistic flow applying representative streamlines for ¢ Parameters 405

the first design approach.

¢ Dimensions 410

Employing 1D-streamline theory the following cross sections are

significant in particular:
· inlet (index 1)
· outlet (index 2)

The design of the main dimensions has to be made in a strict order. This will be secured by the
following: One step within the design has to be finished completely before the next can be
accomplished. That is to say, the changeability of a tab sheet will be disabled by CFturbo until all
necessary parameters have been specified.

7.1.7.1 Setup

On page Setup you can specify some basic settings.

General

· Manual dimensioning
In manual dimensioning mode the main dimensions and blade angles are not calculated by
CFturbo. All these values are user-defined input values.

· Splitter blades (not for axial machines)

Design impeller with or without splitter blades.

· Material density 415

· Unshrouded
Design a shrouded (closed) or unshrouded (open) impeller.
For an unshrouded impeller you have to define the tip clearance, optional different values at

inlet and outlet.

· Inflow swirl
For the determination of the inlet swirl either of the following options can be used:
§ outlet swirl of the upstream component,
§ absolute inlet flow angle 1,
§ outlet swirl velocity c u2 in accordance to the Euler equation: .

Initial default setting

Information

Some design point values are displayed in the right Information panel when selecting the page
Values (see Global setup 108 ).

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Inconsistent inflow swirl in ‹Setup› part:

Option ''..." yields a highly deviating inlet swirl compared with the upstream component
or design point.

7.1.7.2 Parameters

On page Parameters you have to put in or to modify parameters resulting from approximation
functions in dependence on specific speed nq or flow rate Q.
See Approximation functions 226 .

For details of how to handle the parameter edit fields please see Edit fields with empirical
functions 98 .

Parameter and efficiency values can be handled manually

or can be switched to automatic update by the checkbox
on top of the page. Then the default values are used
always, even after design point modifications (see Global
setup 108 ).

If the automatic mode is not selected the current default values can be specified by one of the
following options:

globally by the button on top of the page

regionally by the default button within the Parameters or Efficiency region

individually by the default button within the input field when selected

Parameters

The panel Parameters allows defining alternative parameters in each case for the
calculation of the following impeller diameters:

inlet outlet

dS1, dH1 dS2, dH2

For dS1-calculation

§ dimensionless expression for the specific energy:

Work coefficient

Specific diameter § according to Cordier diagram (see Dimensions 318 )

For dH1 calculation

Diameter ratio dH1/dS1

For dS2/dH2-calculation

Meridional velocity strictly axial dH2 = dH1 and dS2 = dS1

ratio c m2/c m1

const. at hub dH2 = dH1

const. at mid-span dM2 = dM1

const. at shroud dS2 = dS1

Efficiency

In panel Efficiency you have to specify several efficiencies. You have to distinguish between design
relevant efficiencies and efficiencies used for information only:

Design relevant

· hydraulic efficiency h

Information only

· mechanical efficiency m

The losses resulting in energy dissipation from the fluid form the internal efficiency.

Internal and mechanical efficiency form the overall efficiency (coupling efficiency) of the stage St
.

PQ: Runner power

PD : Power output (coupling)

The following summary illustrates the single efficiencies and their classification:

Relevant for
classification efficiencies
impeller design

+
h additional hydraulic
yes: for energy
internal
transmission
stage h hydraulic

no: for overall

m mechanical
information only

The mechanical efficiency mainly includes the friction losses in bearings and seals:

Hydraulic and volumetric efficiency are most important for the runner dimensioning because of their
influence on and/or . The mechanical efficiency is affecting only the actual output power of the
machine.

Information

In the right area of the register Parameter you can find again some calculated values for
information:

Torque

Actual power output

Power loss

Internal efficiency

Stage efficiency

7.1.7.3 Dimensions

Individual main dimensions can be calculated separately using the button inside the value field.

You may accept the proposed values or you can modify them slightly, e.g. to meet a certain
normalized diameter.

In case the checkbox Automatic is activated a new calculation will accomplished after any change
of parameter. Then the manual alteration of the main dimensions is not possible.

Neighboring components

In specific cases the dimensions of the neighboring components at inlet and/ or outlet can be used
to get exactly matching geometry.

This feature is available only for explicitly uncoupled 67 components or side-by-side impellers.

Information

In the Value section the following variables are displayed for information which result from calculated
or determined main dimensions:

Flow properties at: static pressure p

- impeller inlet total pressure pt
- impeller outlet volume flow Q
mass flow
swirl s

Velocity triangles at: velocities u, c m , c m *, c u, c, wu, w

- impeller inlet
- impeller outlet flow angles

Work coefficient

Flow coefficient

Meridional flow coefficient

Specific diameter

Average inlet velocity

Average inlet velocity (net)

Average outlet velocity

Average outlet velocity (net)

Outlet width ratio b2/d2

Meridional velocity ratio

Reynolds number with d1 = highest diameter at inlet

with b1 = width at inlet

with d2 = highest diameter at outlet

with b2 = width at outlet

The Meridional preview is until now based on the main dimensions only.

The Cordier diagram can be used for checking the impeller diameter d2.

See Cordier 418 .

The Velocity triangles are the result of a mid-span calculation and are based on the design
point 108 and the main dimensions.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Inlet/ Outlet: Pressure and temperature not within the liquid phase of the fluid.
Check inlet condition and geometry.

In/outlet cross section ratio is unusual.

Meridional contour should be defined with an appropriate in/outlet width.

7.1.8 Material density

In the table a material with its density can be selected. The list
can be extended or reduced by and button respectively.
A confirmation of the selected value is done by pressing the
OK-button.

At File location the file containing material properties is

shown. The file is originally called Density.cftst and is located
in the installation directory of CFturbo. Modifications of the list
will be saved if the user is leaving the dialog window by clicking
the OK-button. In case there are no write permissions the user
can choose another directory to save the file. Renaming of files
is possible by Save as- functionality. By clicking the Open-
button a previously saved file can be opened.

7.1.9 Multi stage

If more than 1 impeller or rotor shall be contained in the project this can be defined in the panel Multi
stage options on page Setup.

[ Pump, Fan, Compressor ]

The design point 108 (head, pressure difference etc.) can be distributed amongst the impellers using
the power splitting. The energy goal used for the design of the selected impeller (index i) is
determined by:

where the capital E may either be head, specific work or pressure difference resp. The lower case ei
is the ratio describing the power splitting for the selected impeller. This ratio is to be defined by the
track bar in the panel Multi stage options or can be directly specified underneath.

[ Gas turbine ]

In case more than 1 rotor is contained in the project the design point 108 (Power output, pressure
ratio) can be distributed amongst the rotors using the power splitting. The energy goal used for the
design of the selected rotor (index i) is determined by:

Pi  ei  PGlobal
,

where the P is the actual power output. The lower case ei is the ratio describing the power
partitioning for the selected rotor. In case a pressure ratio has been specified in the Global
setup 108 the pressure ratio used for the design of the selected rotor is determined by:


i 
 j
ji
.

Contra rotating, Alternative speed

The impeller may be defined with both a different rotating direction as well with a rotating speed
different from the specifications set in the Global Setup 108 . To this end the respective check box has
to be set. If alternative speed is checked, an edit box appears in where the desired values has to be
defined.

By activating the Automatic parameters and the Automatic main dimensions calculation, each
change of the rotational speed results in an update of the main dimensions. This allows the rotational
speed to be used to obtain a certain impeller diameter.

7.1.10 Shaft/Hub

Dimensioning of the shaft diameter is made under application of strength requirements. It is a result
of torque to be transmitted by the shaft and the allowable torsional stress t of the material.

You can directly enter allowable stress or select the value from a list by pressing settings button
right beside the input area.

In a small dialog window you can see some materials and its
allowable stress. The basis of these values is the allowable
torsional stress of the material. Due to the fact that the shaft
is additionally loaded by bending in the same order of
magnitude, a safety factor of 10 ... 15 is used typically, which
leads to the relatively low stress values (see References 685 :
Steinhilper/ Röper).

The list can be extended or reduced by and button.

You can confirm selected value by pressing the OK-button.

At File location the file containing material properties is

shown. The file is originally called Stress.cftst and is located
in the installation directory of CFturbo. Modifications of the list
will be saved if the user is leaving the dialog window by
clicking the OK-button. In case there are no write permissions
the user can choose another directory to save the file.
Renaming of files is possible by Save as- functionality. By
clicking the Open-button a previously saved file can be
opened.

To consider a higher load, e.g. due to operating conditions away from the design point, a safety
factor SF may be specified leading to a modified proposed shaft diameter d.

The hub diameter dH is usually selected as small as possible and depends on the kind of connection
of hub and shaft.

7.1.11 Cordier

The Cordier diagram is based on an intensive empirical analysis of proved turbomachinery using
extensive experimental data.

At the top right you can switch between different coordinate axes:

· relative: Specific diameter vs. Specific speed (or nq or Ns); original Cordier diagram

· absolute: Impeller/Rotor diameter d vs. Rotational speed n; valid for fixed design point values

Additionally, straight lines for the work coefficient and the flow coefficient are displayed.

The Cordier diagram is displayed in Global setup 108 and the Main dimensions 278 .

7.1.12 Balje

The Balje diagram is based on the work of O. E. Balje 684 . For given specific speed and diameter
coefficient as well as degree of reaction the diagram delivers suggestions for:

· Width ratio h/dS = f(nq, ),

· Isentropic velocity ratio total-static u/c 0 = f(nq, h/d),

· Absolute flow angle *

1
= h/d, ),

· Relative flow angle *

1
= f(nq, h/d, *
),
1

· Rotor velocity ratio R

= w2/w2id = f(nq, h/d, *
1
, *
),
1

· Efficiency total-static ts
= f(nq, h/d, , *
,
1 R
).

The density ratio = /

1 2
is determined by the solution of a set of equations (Euler, continuity,
etc.). Balje's angle notation is displayed in the following image:

The Balje diagram is displayed in the Main dimensions 278 . If Energy transmission = total pressure
ratio ptt , see Global setup 108 , the diagram is only for information and diagram parameters can be
defined on top of the diagram (left image).

If Energy transmission = total-to-static pressure ptst , the diagram is used to make proposals for u/c 0,
h/d and ts
, which are design parameters. On the second tab parameters derived from the Balje
diagram in the design point (by specific speed, diameter coefficient and degree of reaction) are
displayed for information.

7.2 Meridional contour

IMPELLER | Meridional contour

The design of the meridional contour is the second important step to design the impeller.

Meridional design is divided in 3 parts:

· Primary flow path 427

This contains the design of the primary flow path. Necessary for the following design steps.

· Hub/Shroud materials 445 (optionally)

This contains the design of hub and/or shroud material solids. This is an optional part focusing
on stress analysis.

· Secondary flow path 449 (optionally)

This contains the design the secondary flow path behind hub and/or shroud. This is an optional
part focusing on detailed flow analysis.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solution

Inlet hub diameter: deviations between Meridional Contour

and Main Dimensions are larger than 0.1%

Problem Possible solution

The difference between the hub diameter and the Adjust either the main dimensions 278 or the
corresponding geometric size in the meridian is imported curve.
too large. This is possible for imported polylines
only.

Inlet shroud diameter: deviations between Meridional countours

and main dimension are larger than 0.1%

The difference between the suction diameter and Adjust either the main dimensions 278 or the
the corresponding geometric size in the meridian imported curve.
is too large. This is possible for imported
polylines only.

Outlet diameter: deviations between Meridional Contour

and Main Dimensions are larger than 0.1%

The difference between the impeller diameter and Adjust either the main dimensions 278 or the
the corresponding geometric size in the meridian imported curve.
is too large. This is possible for imported
polylines only.

Outlet width: deviations between Meridional Contour

and Main Dimensions are larger than 0.1%

The difference between the outlet width and the Adjust either the main dimensions 278 or the
corresponding geometric size in the meridian is imported curve.
too large. This is possible for imported polylines
only.

Hub/ Shroud contour has discontinuities inside blade region.

The hub resp. shroud contour is divided into sub- Adjust hub resp. shroud contour and apply
curves who are not connected smoothly in blade smoothness at connectors who are inside blade
region. region.

Angle between hub/ shroud contour and inlet/ outlet is not recommended.

The current angle between hub/shroud contour Manipulate hub/shroud contour or move
and inlet/outlet can cause problems in Model inlet/outlet to change the current angle to
finishing 590 . inlet/outlet.

Problem Possible solution

Contour may contain extremely small and

unnecessary parts which should be removed.

Hub/ shroud contour of primary flow path contains artifacts.

The Hub/ shroud contour contains very small Artifacts should be removed to increase stability
segments which are classified as artifacts and and quality of geometric processing.
can cause problems in geometric processing.

Hub contour intermittently touching z-axis (r=0) is not supported.

The hub curve is touching the z-axis internally. Avoid hub regions at r = 0 internally
Before and behind it the radius is greater than 0 or split geometry into different components.
creating a complete constriction.

Meridional contour has an invalid topology. (inside out)

The sense of circulation of the closed wire Manipulate meridional curves to guarantee a
containing the inlet, shroud, outlet and hub curve clockwise sense of circulation or adjust inlet and
in this specific order is counter-clockwise. outlet in main dimensions.

Contour has invalid edges. (Material solids & Secondary flow path)

When using Line segment curves with rounded Corner radius of the invalid (red) curve has to be
corners the defined radius could be too large. reduced. This could be achieved by dragging the
This can result in sharp edges and very small circle center. The curve is valid when it is no
segments. longer drawn in red.

Problem Possible solution

7.2.1 Primary flow path

Content of this section is split into these topics:

· Hub, Shroud 429

· Leading, Trailing edge 439

· Meridional flow calculation 441

Graphical elements can be manipulated not only by the computer mouse per drag and drop but also
by using context menus. To this end a right click on the appropriate element is necessary. Doing so
the mode of the leading edge can be changed as well as the coordinates of Bezier points for
example.

There are some reasonable constraints when working in simplified modes e.g. the inclination angle of
the trailing edge can only be set when hub and shroud are in Bezier mode both.

Display Options

In the Display Options panel some graphical representations can be activated for illustration:

Area circles

used for calculation of cross section area

Neighboring components

on inlet and outlet side are displayed for

information.

Use the buttons above the diagram to zoom the

current meridional shape only or the entire
geometry.

Max. curvature

point is displayed on hub and shroud curves

7.2.1.1 Hub, Shroud

Design Mode

There are two different options to define hub and shroud contours.

Hub, Shroud Direct design of the two contours

Middle Design of center line; the contours result from given cross section
distribution between suction (dS) and outlet (d2) cross sections

Hub, Shroud

In the first case, hub and shroud can be designed separately.

Middle

In the second case, only the geometric center line of the flow channel will be modified. The
contours result from specifying a relative cross section distribution. It may either be linear or
could be loaded from a file using the Progression dialog 96 .

The first value of each line is the relative meridional coordinate x along the center line, with x=0
at the inlet cross-section and x=1 at the outlet cross-section. The second value is the relative
cross section Arel, which allows to compute the related absolute value:

A  A in  A rel A out  A in 

The cross section is used to determine the meridional width b vertical to the flow direction.

This strategy is mainly suitable for mixed-flow impellers, it's suboptimal for centrifugal impellers
with relative sharp direction change from axial to radial.

Axial dimensions

The axial start position as well as the axial extension of the meridional shape can be specified in the
Axial dimensions area on the right. Both can also be modified interactively in the graphics.

Curve mode

Contour curves can be designed as:

· Bezier curve
The curve is defined by the position of the Bezier points.
¢ Details 431

· Circular Arc + Straight line

The curve consists of a circular arc and a straight line.
¢ Details 435

· Straight line
The contour is defined by a straight line between start and endpoint.

· Polyline
The curve is fixed and cannot be modified interactively. Import of point sets from file is
possible (Load polyline). Note, imported point sets are re-sampled on an interpolating cubic
spline using 100 points. This may lead to deviations to original polyline, especially in case of
low point counts.

Centrifugal fan impellers are designed simply by arc and line by default (Circular Arc + Straight
line), all other impeller types in Bezier mode (Bezier curve).

On the endpoints of hub and shroud the complete geometry can be shifted optionally (Shift
complete geometry). Hence the geometry can be positioned on a specific axial position.

7.2.1.1.1 Bezier

Hub and Shroud are represented by 4th order Bezier curves. This is the default and most flexible
curve mode.

The curve is determined by five Bezier points.

Points 0 and 4 are defining the endpoints of the curves while the other three points determining the
shape of the curve. The middle point (2) can be moved without any restrictions whereas points 1 and
3 have only one degree of freedom. Point 1 is only movable on the straight line between points 0 and
2, point 3 between point 2 and 4. Therefore no curvature is occurring at the end of the curves. In
conjunction with a continuous curvature gradient small velocity gradients can be expected. The two
straight lines are defining the gradients in the end points of the curves.

Bezier point 2 can be limited in its mobility by the curve context menu option Limit stop. As a result
the axial and radial position is limited in the area between the curve endpoints 0 and 4.

The above mentioned coupling between the Bezier points can be switched on or off by the curve
context menu option Coupled Bezier points.

Start angle (line 0-1 or 0-1-2) and end angle (line 3-4 or 2-3-4) can be fixed optionally by the curve
context menu option Fixed start angle or Fixed end angle. A fixed angle is illustrated by a dotted
line instead a dashed one and by a triangular marker on the curve endpoint.

Tangential connection

In Bezier mode a tangential connection to neighboring components (impeller or stator) can be

switched on or off using the icon beside the the first or last Bezier point:

tangential connection non-tangential connection

The hint of the icon contains the angle of the neighboring

component for information.

Primary design

For an automatic primary design of the contours the following values are used:

§ Main dimensions 278 : dH , dS, d2, b2

§ Inclination angle g of trailing edge to horizontal (see Approximation functions 226 )

§ Inclination angle e of hub and shroud to vertical (see Approximation functions 226 )

§ Axial extension: pumps, fans according to a) (Guelich), turbines according to b) (Lindner),

compressor according to c) (Aungier). In some cases where the hub diameter dH is quite
small compared to the impeller diameter d2, for compressors the average of a) and b) is
applied instead of c).

b) z  d1/ 2  dH  2

 d2 
c ) z  d2  0.014  0.023   1.58   
 dH 

Point 1 is primary placed at 3/4 of the axial distance of points 0 and 2, point 3 at 2/3 of the radial
distance of points 2 and 4.

The manipulation of the contours can be achieved by shifting the positions of the Bezier points. As
an alternative the position of Bezier points can be realized by input of numerical values (see
Graphical dialogs 94 ). Trailing edge can be rotated by moving Bezier points 4. If <Ctrl> key is
pressed simultaneously the whole trailing edge can be moved in axial direction with constant
inclination angle (change axial extension). Inclination angle of trailing edge can be numerically
determined by clicking the right mouse button on it.

In the design process for the meridional contours the user should try to create curvatures which are
as steady as possible in order to minimize local decelerations. The maximum values of the curvature
should be as low as possible and should entirely disappear at the end of the contours. These
requirements are met very well by Bezier curves showing the above mentioned limitations. Local
cross section should grow from the suction to the impeller diameter as uniformly as possible.

If using simple polyline for hub and/or shroud - e.g. for imported meridional geometrie - this curve can
be converted to a Bezier curve 97 . Thus, it's possible to make systematic modifications of existing
geometries.

7.2.1.1.2 Circular Arc + Straight line

Hub and shroud are represented by the segment of a circle and a tangential straight line. The radius
of the segment is defined by Point 1. The points 0 and 2 are defining the axial position of the
meridional contour.

For an automatic primary design of the contours the following values are used:
§ Dimensions 278 : dH , dS, d2, b1, b2
§ Radius of the circle segment R: 14% of dS

The manipulation of the contours can be achieved by shifting the positions of the points. As an
alternative the position of points can be realized by input of numerical values. By moving points 0 or 2
the whole geometry can be moved in axial direction.

7.2.1.1.3 Contour

The design of hub and shroud can be expanded optionally. Therefore additional curves can be added
on inlet and outlet side in order to design complex contour curves.

The additional inlet and outlet curves can be switched to any curve type (Bezier, Circular, Straight,
Polyline) by their own popup menu.

Tangential transition

The tangential transition between neighboring curves can be switched on or off using the icon beside
the the first or last Bezier point:

tangential connection non-tangential connection

7.2.1.2 Leading, Trailing edge

Leading and trailing edge contour can be designed as:

· Bezier curve
The Leading edge is defined by the position of the Bezier points.

· Straight
The Leading edge is a straight connecting line between the endpoints on hub and shroud.

· r = constant
The Leading edge runs on constant radius, i.e. parallel to rotational axis.

· z = constant
The Leading edge runs on constant axial coordinate, i.e. perpendicular to rotational axis.

The trailing edge can not be designed, if Trailing edge fixed on outlet 441 .

The position of the meridional blade leading edge on hub and shroud can be defined by its axial (z),
radial (r) or relative position (rel.) optionally.

In case of Splitter blades each leading edge can be designed individually.

The radial-inflow gas turbine rotors and compressor impellers have straight leading edges by default,
in case of radial-inflow gas turbines r = constant additionally.

Leading edge can be designed as a straight line by selecting Straight in the context menu of the
curve (controlled by 2 Bezier points). Additionally the edge can be strictly axial or radial (z = const.
or r = const, controlled by 1 Bezier point).

For centrifugal impellers having nq » 10…30 the leading edge is often designed parallel to the z-axis.
As the trailing edge is parallel to the axis too for such applications 2D-curved blades can be created.
At higher specific speed nq or due to strength reasons the leading edge often is extended into the
impeller suction area. Various diameters result in different leading edge blade angles - therefore 3D-
curved blades are created. This leads to better performance curves, higher efficiencies and improved
suction capacity for pumps.

The position of the leading edge should be chosen in a way that the energy transmission should be
about equal on all meridional flow surfaces. A criterion is the approximately equal static moment
S = ò r dx of the meridional streamlines on hub and shroud between leading and trailing edge. In the
Static moment section the corresponding numerical values are displayed. Both ends of the leading
edge should be perpendicular to the meridional contours of hub and shroud if possible. To obtain
equal static moments on hub and shroud the trailing edge is often not parallel to axial direction -
particularly at higher specific speeds (mixed-flow impellers).

The leading edge can be designed by a 4th order Bezier curve. Regarding the Bezier points, the
properties are similar to the hub/ shroud curves. The only difference is the manipulation of the end
points, which are located on the hub/ shroud curves always. The position of the leading edge always
appears at the same relative position in a primary CFturbo design but this not mean to be a
suggestion.

Leading/Trailing edge fixed on ...

The leading/trailing edge is fixed on meridional inlet/outlet and can not be designed.

Uncheck this option to detach the leading/trailing edge from meridional inlet/outlet and design its
position and shape independently.

7.2.1.3 Meridional flow calculation

Meridional flow visualization based on potential flow theory is available optionally. The result of
meridional flow calculation can be displayed using the button top right of the diagram.

The display can be configured using the corresponding menu (all options can be combined).

Grid

After each change of the meridional contour a

new computational grid is calculated.

Extensions are added to the inlet and outlet in

order to ease the setup of the boundary
conditions.

Streamlines

meridional streamlines (lines with constant

values of the stream function)

equal mass flow fraction between neighboring

streamlines

cm-lines

iso lines of const. meridional velocity c m

cm-surfaces

iso surfaces of const. meridional velocity c m

(scaling is displayed below the diagram)

Blade correction

If activated, the blockage effect of blade

thickness is considered for flow calculation.

Vectors

vectors of meridional velocity c m

Stream function

Within the meridian the equation for stream function will be solved. For an incompressible fluid this
equation is in cylindrical co-ordinates (z, r):

For a compressible fluid the equation looks like:

where a is the sonic speed defined by:

Hub and shroud are representing stream lines where as at in and outlet there is a certain stream
function distribution chosen. This is done in accordance to the mass flow imposed by the global
setup 108 .

Calculation grid and solution scheme

The equation is solved using a finite-difference-method (FDM) on a computational grid, which will be
generated using an elliptic grid generation. For more information about the used computational
techniques refer to e.g. Anderson et al 684 .

Results

The meridional velocity component can be calculated by the axial velocity component:

by the radial velocity component:

with:

rR and R
are reference radius and density respectively. In case of incompressible fluids the density
is constant throughout the flow domain and the according term in the equations is discarded.

Annotation

Due to the potential flow theory the given solution is only a rough estimation of the real meridional
flow. One has to bear in mind that friction is not considered as well as the no slip boundary condition
at hub and shroud. For detailed flow analysis CFD-techniques for solving the entire set of Navier-
Stokes-Equations has to be used. Also the solution scheme implemented (FDM) may not always
find a solution for every combination of design point and meridional contour.

Singularities will occur if the solution domain has radii close to zero. Then at those locations some
artefacts might exist in the meridional velocity contours.

For compressible fluids it is necessary that the flow regime in the entire domain has to be far away
from transonic conditions. Otherwise the equation will not have solution.

7.2.2 Hub/Shroud materials

Meridional material solids can be designed by selecting the "Hub/Shroud materials" page on top left
and activate the feature on the right side. Initial contours will be visible, which can be manipulated
using the control points and the context menu of the curve.

After the model finishing 590 the meridional material parts and the blade solid are connected to a
single solid geometry, "Material domain".

Material design

Hub & Shroud materials can be designed by manipulating their meridional contours.
The shroud material design is available only for shrouded impellers.

By activating the "Material contour design" a

default contour is generated. This contour is
represented by a wire connecting the endpoints
of meridional hub or shroud contour and can be
modified interactively using its graphical
elements.

To provide complex contours the wire can

consist of various edges which can be configured
independently from each other. They are
separated visually by squared control points. In
contrast circular control points belong to edges
and are connected by a dashed control
polygon.

Apart from the endpoints of the wire, all control

points are moveable.

Context menus of contour wire

Besides drag & drop of control points context menus of graphical objects are alternative means to
modify the contour. They are accessible via right-clicking and contain useful tools for the graphical
object underneath.

Connector point

· EDIT: Opens a small panel to set coordinates of

connector point.
· Merge curve: Transforms connector into inner
control point by merging control polygons.

Inner control point

· EDIT: Opens a small panel to set coordinates of

inner control point.
· Remove point: Remove the selected inner control
point.

· Split polygon: Transform inner control point into

connector point. The result are two control
polygons of the original type.
This process can be reverted using Merge curve of
the connector point.

Meridional contour of primary flow path

· Set initial offset: Resets the complete wire using

a user-defined offset.
This offset is not kept when changing the
meridional contour.

Edge types of contour wire

An edge of a contour wire can be one of the following

types:

· Bezier curve
The curve is defined by the position of the Bezier
points.
¢ Details 448

· Line segment curve

The curve consists of straight lines and rounded
corners. (optional)
¢ Details 449

Snapping

To simplify contour design snapping of points on coordinates and lines can be used. This mode can
be chosen by selecting one of the snapping types at top right of the diagram:

Snapping types

· Point: Currently moved point snaps to x

and/or y coordinate of other points.

· Line: Currently moved point snaps to lines

defined by all pairs of points.

The currently used snapping property is

illustrated by a red dotted line while moving a
point.

Note that snapping can be deactivated

temporarily by pressing the Crtl key while
dragging.

7.2.2.1 Bezier curve

Context menu

Options of the context menu for the graphical object of a Beziér curve are listed below:

Curve menu

· Increase degree: Increases the number of control points

without changing the shape of the curve.
Note that all inner points will be rearranged.

· Remove inner control points: Removes all inner control

points of the control polygon so that the Beziér curve
reduces to a line.

· Split curve: Subdivides the Beziér curve into two curves

while keeping the shape of the original curve.
Note that inner points will be rearranged and that splitting
can not be reverted.

· Offset curve: Applies an offset to the curve underneath.

Splitting curve before can increase accuracy of the
resulting offset curve.

· Duplicate/ Copy/ Save curve: These general features

are described in the topic Graphical dialogs 94 .

7.2.2.2 Line segment curve

Context menu

Options of the context menu for the graphical object of a Line segment curve are listed below:

Curve

· Insert point: Inserts a new control point.

· Remove inner control points: Removes all inner

control points of the control polygon so that Line
segment curve reduces to a line.

· Split curve: Subdivides the Line segment curve into

two curves while trying to keep the shape of the
original curve.

· Offset curve: Applies an offset to the curve

underneath.

· Duplicate/ Copy/ Save curve: These general

features are described in the topic Graphical
dialogs 94 .

Circle center

· Edit edge radius directly.

If there is no radius available at the control point
initially, then the context menu of the control point
can be used to define a radius.

7.2.3 Secondary flow path

Secondary flow path for impellers can be designed by selecting the "Secondary flow path" page on
top left and activate the feature on the right side. Initial contours will be visible, which can be
manipulated using the control points and the context menu of the curve (see Hub/Shroud
materials 445 ).

Endpoints of the "secondary flow path" on the material solid are constrained to the contour.
Therefore, axial coordinate z and radial coordinate r cannot be modified independently.

After the model finishing 590 the meridional primary and secondary flow paths are connected to a
single solid geometry, "Flow domain".

Hub and Shroud casing can be designed by manipulating their meridional contours. The feature is
available if the following prerequisites are fulfilled:

· Hub/Shroud materials must be activated for this impeller

· Neighboring static components have to exist

· An offset between impeller and neighboring components is required

Depending on settings of main dimensions, some parts of the contour can become inactive, e.g. for
unshrouded impellers the shroud is already defined by primary flow path.

The secondary flow path is defining the real geometry. In contrast to this, a simplified virtual
geometry can be specified and exported separately (see virtual geometry 582 ).

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solution

Missing static component at inlet/outlet. Both, upstream and downstream component to

impeller are necessary.

There has to be a component at the impeller's Add a component to the impeller's inlet/outlet.
inlet/outlet for designing a Secondary flow path.

7.2.4 Additional views

The following information

can be displayed in the
meridional contour dialog
using the "Additional views"
button:

Informational values

Some additional values are displayed for information:

· Minimal curvature radius on hub and shroud (position is marked on the hub and shroud curves)

· Static moment S from leading to trailing edge on hub and shroud (see below)

· Angle in the hub and shroud end points measured to the horizontal direction

· Angle LE
of leading edge on hub and shroud measured to the horizontal direction

· Axial extension of hub and shroud

· Radial extension of hub and shroud

· Angle TE
of trailing edge measured to the horizontal direction

· Default axial extension z D from inlet shroud to outlet midline (defined for centrifugal impellers
only)

· Maximal axial extension z M of complete meridional shape

· Maximal radial extension rM of complete meridional shape

· Axial blade overlapping z B of shroud blade area onto hub blade area in z-direction

· LE distance b1 from LE at hub to LE at shroud

· LE circle b1 as diameter of a circle inside the meridional contour at LE position

· LE diameter d1 at intersection of LE and midline

· Diameter ratio d1/d2

· LE diameter d1av e as average of hub and shroud diameter at LE

3D-Preview

3D model 259 of the currently designed meridional shape.

The meridian contains hub and shroud as well as a

circular projection of the blade in a plane.

Curvature progression

Curvature progression along hub and shroud curve. The progression should be as smooth as possible
avoiding hard peaks.

Static moment

The static moment is the integral of the curve length (x) in the blade area multiplied by the radius (r):

rT E
S  rdx
rLE

It should be similar for hub and shroud end points.

Area section

Progression of the cross section area between hub and shroud.

Local maximum or minimum should be avoided.

Cm progression

Progression of the meridional velocity c m along the meridional streamlines.

¢ see Meridional flow calculation 441

7.3 Mean line design

The design of the blade's geometry is made in four steps in this design mode:

(1) Blade properties 453

(2) Blade mean lines 495

(3) Blade profiles 533

(4) Blade edges 541

7.3.1 Blade properties

IMPELLER | Blade properties

Definition of blade properties is made in three steps:

(1) Blade setup 459

(2) Span definition 476

(3) Cu, cm specification 476 (Axial machines only)

(4) Blade angles 479

Absolute and relative flow

Absolute velocity

Relative velocity

Rotational speed

Fundamental kinematic equation

of Turbomachinery

Velocity triangles

Radial impeller Axial impeller

Significant cross sections

Axial impeller

Index Position

0 just before
leading edge
1 just after

2 just before
trailing edge
3 just after

Radial impeller Radial rotor

Pump, Fan, Compressor Gas/Hydro turbine

Specification of number of blades

Usual number of blades are:

3 ... 7
Wastewater: 1 ... 3
Pump
Barske (low nq): 12 ... 24
Inducer: 1 ... 3
Fan 6 ... 10
Squirrel cage: 30 ... 60
Compressor Depending on blade exit
angle ß 2:
· 12 for ß 2»30°
· 16 for ß 2»45°...60°
· 20 for ß 2»70°...90°

Radial-inflow gas turbine 12 ... 20

Axial gas turbine 30 .. 70 (100)
Axial compressor 20 .. 40

Francis turbine 6 .. 16

Many blades - causing low blade loading - are related to higher friction losses. By choosing of fewer
blades - leading to a higher blade loading - the hydraulic losses may rise due to increased secondary
flow and stronger deviation between blade and flow direction.

The recommended number of blades according to Pfleiderer is displayed as a hint at the information
image [ for centrifugal & mixed-flow pumps, fans, compressors only ]:

d2  d1  
z  kz sin 1 2
d2  d1 2

with k z = 6.5 ... 8.0 for compressors, else 5.0 ... 6.5.

The recommended number of blades using the Zweifel work coefficient is displayed as a hint at the
information image [ for axial gas turbines only ]:

dav
z  2 tan90   1  tan90    2 cos 2 90    2 
  z

with the axial chord length and dav the average impeller diameter.

The Zweifel work coefficient is in the range of = 0.75..1.15 and is specified in the approximation
functions 226 .

Splitter linked to Main blade

If the impeller has splitter blades then the shape of the splitter can be linked to the main blade
optionally. If linked the splitter blades are truncated main blades. Otherwise the splitter blade can be
designed completely independent.

Information

In the right panel some information are displayed which result from calculated or determined values:

(1) Velocity triangles

The velocity triangles of inflow and outflow are displayed.

Continuous lines represent flow velocities on hub (blue) and

shroud (green).

Velocities directly before and behind blade area are displayed

by dashed lines to show the influence of blockage in the flow
domain.

Furthermore the blade angles are displayed by thick lines in

order to see the incidence angle on the leading edge and the
flow deviation caused by slip velocity on trailing edge.

(2) Values

Numerical values of velocity components and flow angles are

displayed in a table. A short description is at mouse cursor
too:

z Axial position
d Diameter
F Angle of absolute flow to circumferential direction
F Angle of relative flow to circumferential direction
u Circumferential velocity
cm Meridional velocity (c m =wm )
cu Circumferential component of absolute velocity
cr Radial component of absolute velocity
c ax Axial component of absolute velocity
c Absolute velocity
wu Circumferential component of relative velocity: wu+c u = u
w Relative velocity
t Obstruction by blades (see below)
i Incidence angle: i = 1B - 1
Deviation angle: = 2B
- 2
w2/w1 Deceleration ratio of relative velocity
c 2/c 1 Absolute velocity ratio
F
Abs. deflection angle: F
= F2
- F1

F
Rel. deflection angle: F
= F2
- F1
= B
Blade camber angle: = B
= B2
- B1

Slip coefficient
(cu·r) Swirl difference
T Torque
H/ pt Head/Pressure difference (total-total)

(3) Default ßB, mean line design only

Default blade angles for the optimal Free-form 3D blade

shape is displayed compared to the currently specified/
calculated angles. Deviations from default values are marked
in red color. Default blade angles are calculated based on
- Shockless inflow for ß B1 at blade leading edge
- Euler equation for ß B2 at blade trailing edge

For some simplified blade shapes the blade angles of some

sections result from the mean line design - see Blade angles/
"Auto" 481 .

If the mean line design already exists in the component then

these dependent angles are calculated automatically for
information, otherwise the table cells remain empty.

7.3.1.1 Blade setup

Impeller | Blade properties

On page Blade setup basic blade properties are defined.

(1) Selection of desired Blade shape

3D types: blade is curved in 3D

Free-form 3D Ruled surface 3D 471

Radial elements 3D 474 Helical 3D

2D (axial) types: blade is curved in 2D when looking in axial direction

Free-form 2D (axial) Circular 2D (axial)

Straight 2D (axial) Circular + Free-form 2D (axial) 475

Logarithmic spiral + Straight 2D (axial) 475

2D (radial) types: blade is curved in 2D when looking in radial direction

Free-form 2D (radial) Straight 2D (radial)

The initial blade shape depends on the machine type and can be customized in the Impeller
preferences 220 .

PUMP

Centrifugal & Mixed-flow Free-form 3D

Wastewater Free-form 2D (axial)

Barske (low nq) Straight 2D (axial)

Axial Free-form 3D

Inducer Helical 3D

FAN

Centrifugal & Mixed-flow Circular 2D (axial)

Squirrel cage Circular 2D (axial)

Axial Free-form 3D

COMPRESSOR

Centrifugal & Mixed-flow Ruled surface 3D

Axial Free-form 3D

TURBINE

Radial & Mixed-flow Radial elements 3D 474

Axial Free-form 3D

Only the Free-form 3D blade shape provides complete flexibility, all other types result in
limitations in blade angle specification and mean line design.

In case of Ruled surface 3D blade shape and linked splitter blades the linkage can be
specified in more detail. See Ruled Surface blade 471 .

Limitations

Blade shape Impeller type Meridional shape Splitter blades

3D Free-form 3D (no limitations)

Ruled surface 3D

Radial elements
3D

Helical 3D axial impellers not available

only

2D Free-form 2D centrifugal & available only if the

(axial (axial) mixed-flow meridional direction is
) impellers only mainly radial:
Circular 2D (axial)
hub must overlap shroud
in z-direction about 50%
Straight 2D (axial) or more

Circular + hub must not have axial not available

Free-form 2D parts within blade area
(axial)

Logarithmic spiral
+ Straight 2D
(axial)

2D Free-form 2D axial impellers available only if the not available

(radia (radial) only projection of the shroud
l) mean line in radial
direction (relating to
Straight 2D leading edge point) hits
(radial) the hub surface
hub must not have radial
parts within blade area

(2) Defining the blade thickness values at leading and trailing edge in panel Blade
thickness s

Blade thickness can be important for the blade angle calculation due to the blockage effect
and flow acceleration.
By different thickness on hub and shroud side a tapering to the blade tip can be designed.
Initial thickness values are based on empirical functions 226 .

2 impeller types have special thickness requirements:

· Waste water pumps have very high thickness values at leading edge to avoid solid
attachments (10% of d2 for 1 blade, 5% of d2 for more blades). The rest of the blade has
smaller thickness of 30% relative to the max. thickness at leading edge.
· Inducer pumps have very low thickness values at leading edge to improve suction
performance: 6%...10% of normal blade thickness.

Blockage mode
In general, it's a controversial issue to consider blade blockage effect for blade angle
calculation or not and in which way. Exactly at blade edge the thickness is 0 due to the
rounding of the blade edge. Immediately after the blade leading edge (or before the blade
trailing edge) the blade is blocking the flow in a certain manner. This blockage is dependent on
the blade thickness, the blade angle and the blade angle distribution and which is hence a

rather complex with respect to the blade geometry. One can consider the blockage by the
following modes:

· Tangential: the blade thickness is projected tangentially = s / sin( B)

· Orthogonal: the blade thickness is not projected at all =s

· None: the blade thickness is not considered =0

These options will have an influence on the calculation of the meridional velocity component c m
and therefore on the blade angle 479 calculation when pressing button Calculate b B or if the
checkbox Automatic is selected. Beyond it, it will influence the meridional flow calculation 441
too.

(3) Specification of incidence angle on blade leading edge (deviation from

shockless inflow) on panel ß1: Incidence

Pump, Fan, Compressor Turbine

from ratio Q for RQ = QShockless / fully automatic by theory of WIESNER

shockless inflow / Q for
QBEP adapted by Aungier 485
max. efficiency

or or

directly by incidence angle i directly by incidence angle i

(RQ=100% or i=0° for shockless inflow) (i=0° for shockless inflow)

from ratio of incidence iRel = i / B

angle i / blade angle B

For inducer pumps there is an additional check if the incidence is > 1° even for high flow
rates (overload) to prevent pressure side cavitation.

Squirrel cage fans have high incidence typically resulting in blade inlet angles 1B
80°.

[ Pump, Fan, Compressor impellers only ]

(4) Estimation of slip velocity in panel slip

You have to use one of the following slip models:

Slip model theory Hints

GÜLICH/ WIESNER 489 closed empirical model,

extended Wiesner model
AUNGIER/ WIESNER 490

VON BACKSTROEM 492 closed empirical model

PFLEIDERER 491 input of coefficient a

User-defined manual selection of angular deviation ß 2B-ß 2 resp. velocity

ratio c u2/c u2,

Specific definitions 493 specific slip models for specific impeller types

Using the button Show calculation details provides specific information about the B2
calculation 494 .

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Blade blockage factor of ... is larger than warning level of ... at leading/ trailing edge at
hub/ shroud.

Blade thickness s is blocking a significant part of

Reduce number of blades and/or blade
the flow passage u = number of blades. The
thickness.
blockage factor is calculated as F = s / u.

Blade blockage factor of ... is outside the valid range of 0...1 at leading/ trailing edge at
hub/ shroud.

Blade thickness is blocking the flow passage Reduce number of blades and/or blade
completely at the specified position. thickness.

Blade number different than initially defined.

[Wastewater pumps only]

Number of blades differs from the number that was It makes no sense to use other number of
initially selected in Main dimensions 278 used for blades for main dimension calculation and
empirical correlations to calculate the main blade design itself.
dimensions. This can result in inconsistent impeller
design. Before modifying the number of blades here
one should adapt the number in Main

Problem Possible solutions

dimensions 278 , update the empirical

parameters and the main dimension.

Mean lines (except hub) may be extrapolated.

("Free-form 2D" blade shape only)

The hub is the master mean line for "Free-form 2D" Use axis parallel (const. radius) or slightly
blade shape. For this blade shape the geometry of sloping meridional leading/ trailing edge.
all other mean lines is designed automatically in
such way that it is exactly overlapping the hub Leading edge: The shroud point should have
mean line if viewing in z-direction. The resulting higher or equal radius than the hub point.
blade shape is two-dimensional.
Trailing edge: The shroud point should have
If the other curves have points with higher radius at lower or equal radius than the hub point.
trailing edge/ lower radius at leading edge than the
last/ first hub point (sloping meridional edge), then
these curves have to be extrapolated.

Blade shape [Radial Elements 3D]: requires the maximum Z-extension

of the meridional blade area to be defined on the Hub.

The hub is the master mean line for "Radial Use radial (const. axial position) or sloping
elements 3D" blade shape. The geometry of all meridional leading/ trailing edge.
other mean lines is designed automatically in such
way that it forms a blade consisting of radial Leading edge: The shroud leading edge
fibers 474 . The resulting blade shape is three- should have a higher or equal axial position
dimensional. compared to the hub.

If the other curves have points with lower z-values at Trailing edge: The shroud trailing edge
leading edge/ higher z-value at trailing edge than should have a lower or equal axial position
the first/last hub point, these curves have to be compared to the hub.
extrapolated. In this case the blade would have a
bad quality in the extrapolated region.

"Ruled surface" blades may export low quality surfaces when using two mean lines only.
("Ruled surface 3D" blade shape only)

Impeller with splitter blades can have wavy blade Increase the number of blade profile sections
surface if only 2 blade profile sections are used. (page "Blade angles").

"Straight 2D (axial)" blades not possible for selected

combination of meridional leading edge contour and blade angle.

Problem Possible solutions

The hub mean line is the master mean line. All Leading edge 439 : The point on shroud
other mean lines are adapted automatically in order should be moved to a higher radius.
to overlap the hub mean line if viewing in z-
direction. B1 479 : Blade angle should be increased.

If the other mean lines are extended they will be

extrapolated automatically. For specific
combinations of meridional leading edge and blade
angles B1 479 an extrapolation is impossible.

"Circular + Free-form 2D (axial)" blades not possible for selected distance and angle
combination.

Modify LE or aLE for this blade shape. For

Construction of circular arc is not possible for given
parameters. Therefor calculation of blade is blocked further information see Compound blade
shapes 475 .

Extrapolation of "Circular + Free-form 2D (axial)" blades not possible for secondary spans.

The minimal inner radius for the secondary spans is Try to reduce effect of extrapolation by
limited by the circular arc (design curve) defined by adjusting meridional Leading edge 439 or
and a3. change parameters defining the circular arc
(design curve) of this blade shape. For further
information see Compound blade shapes 475 .

"Straight 2D (axial)" blades not possible for selected

combination of meridional trailing edge contour and blade angle.

The blade angle is too small or too large - therefore Trailing edge 439 : The edge should be
designing a "Straight 2D" blade shape is moved to a higher radius.
impossible.
LE/ LE 479 : Blade angle should be
increased.

Problem Possible solutions

"Straight 2D (radial)" blades not possible for selected

combination of meridional leading edge contour and blade angle

Blade angles not within a valid range.

Projection of the designed mean line onto the other Blade angle should be specified within the
spans fails for this blade shape. recommended range.

7.3.1.1.1 Ruled Surface blade

Ruled surface blades are used especially to enable flank milling for manufacturing. The mean surface
is generated by spatial movement of a straight line.

When using splitter blades that are linked to main blade then this linkage can be specified in more
detail.

You can choose between the following options:

Exact (adjusts main blade): The blade geometry of the splitter is forced to be equal to its main
blade. Therefore, the leading edge of the splitter needs to be a ruling of the main blade. Due to the
flexible choice of the splitter leading edge, this option requires a readjustment of the main blade.

Mean lines only: The blade geometry of the splitter is designed using the mean lines of the main
blade. The advantage of this option is a higher flexibility in design of a curved leading edge of the
splitter. (depends on the number of mean lines)

The following pictures illustrate the combination of different options (splitter is rotated into the main
blade for illustration):

· Splitter linked to Main Blade

· 2 spans

· Exact (adjusts main blade)

Main and Splitter are using identic

rulings. The splitter leading edge is
influencing the rulings and therefore the
main blade.

· Splitter linked to Main Blade

· 2 spans

· Mean lines only

Main and splitter are using their own

rulings. The splitter is guided by the hub
and shroud mean lines of the main blade
only. The resulting splitter shape can
slightly deviate from the main blade.

· Splitter linked to Main Blade

· 5 spans

· Mean lines only

The splitter is guided by all 5 mean lines

of the main blade. The resulting splitter
shape is following the main blade and
can have a curve leading edge but it's no
more a ruled surface.

· NOT Splitter linked to Main Blade

· 5 spans

Main and splitter are using their own

rulings. There is no coupling between
splitter and main blade. The splitter
shape can highly deviate from the main
blade.

7.3.1.1.2 Radial element blade

Radial element blades are used especially with highly loaded fast speed turbines in order to avoid
bending stresses within the blades due to centrifugal forces. The blades are composed of radial
blade fibres if straight lines can be put into the mean surfaces in a way that they go through the axis
of rotation at z = constant.

Radial element blades require the following geometrical boundary conditions for radial &
mixed-flow impellers:

· Blade angle at input (turbines) or output resp. (all other types): » 90°

· Inclination angle 431 from hub and shroud to the horizontal: < 90°

· Vertical trailing (turbines) or leading edge resp. (all other types) with z » const.

· Small wrap angle: j » 360°/number of blades

7.3.1.1.3 Compound blade shapes

Compound blade shapes are mainly used for radial diffusers (stator), but are available for centrifugal
impellers, too.

Log. Spiral + Straight 2D (axial)

The inlet section of the blades without overlapping is configured as a logarithmic spiral.

The overlapping part is straight. The transition point between these areas can be moved along the
logarithmic spiral curve (see stator mean line 613 ).

Circular + Free-form 2D (axial)

The inlet section of the blades without overlapping is configured as a circular arc with the
boundary conditions radius rLE, blade angle LE and throat width aLE.

The overlapping part is designed by a Bezier curve with optionally 2 (straight), 3 or 4 Bezier points
(selectable by context menu). The transition point between these areas can be moved along the
circular arc curve (see stator mean line 613 ).

Calculation of throat width aLE can be done using the conservation of angular momentum (const.
swirl) or a specific deceleration ratio alternatively:

a) Constant swirl

Throat width corresponds to the dimensioning in accordance with the conservation of angular
momentum (c ur)In, whereat the deceleration is increased by using the factor faLE (1.1...1.3).

b) Deceleration

Alternatively one can use the deceleration ratio c LE/c In (0.7...0.85) for throat width calculation.

Trailing edge angle TE

is a result of mean line design for these special blade shapes and therefore
cannot be specified explicitly ("var.").

7.3.1.2 Spans

Impeller | Blade properties

On page Spans number of span and their distribution are defined.

By default the meridional lines are equally spaced between hub and shroud (linear distribution curve).
Using the context menu, the curve type can be set to Bezier curve. If this option is chosen two
control points can be manipulated to generate a certain span distribution. The span positions are
illustrated as meridional lines in the Meridian diagram behind the distribution curve.

7.3.1.3 cu, cm

Impeller | Blade properties

[ Axial machines only ]

On tabsheet cu, cm the velocity triangles at every span can be defined in accordance to the radial
equilibrium 478 .

It can be chosen from 3 different modes concerning the manipulation of c u2(r):

Variable load Free vortex Variable load rel. to free

vortex

The c u2(r)-specification is c u2(r) is defined to get the The slope is the derivative
controlled by a second order same swirl at every span: according to:
Bezier curve.

With a slope of zero a free vortex

distribution is set.

Please note: There is not always a solution of the differential equation of the radial equilibrium.
Therefore some Bezier point constellations are not possible.

At the second tab of the diagram the distribution of the corresponding degree of reaction is
displayed: R = hstat / htot

7.3.1.3.1 Radial equilibrium

Basis of this is the balance of pressure and centrifugal forces under the following assumptions:

· the flow is rotationally symmetric

· friction is neglected

· the streamlines are axis-parallel and have no inclination

The radial balance equation is given here for a section behind an impeller [pump, compressor, fan]
and before a rotor [axial turbine] respectively:

The definition of total pressure in section 2 differentiated with respect to r plus above equation yield:

With the blade work according to Euler the equation becomes:

With the following boundary conditions and a given c u2(r)-specification the solution of the differential
equation gives a c m2(r)-distribution and therefore the complete velocity triangles at every span.

From the velocity triangles the degree of reaction can be determined by the following equation:

7.3.1.4 Blade angles

Impeller | Blade properties

On this page the blade angles are calculated.

Later designed mean lines depend on the number and the meridional position of profile sections as
well as the blade angles. Blade angles bB1 and bB2 are calculated from the velocity triangles,
whereby the blade blockage of the flow channel and the slip velocity is considered.

The degree of freedom when designing the blades depends on the selected blade shape. Referring to
the blade angles this means, that they are marked as (auto) and are result of the Mean line 495
calculation.

Distribution from hub to shroud

The blade angles can be calculated on all spans. On panel Distribution from hub to shroud you
can define how the blade angles of the inner sections are defined.

Blade angles B

§ Calculation of blade angles using values from Blade setup 459 by pressing button Calculate
B

§ Manual adaptation of calculated blade angles if required

Calculation or input of blade angles can be executed for each span (blade profile).

When using 2D blade shapes a low number of profiles may be sufficient in dependence of the leading
edge shape, e.g. for a straight leading edge. For that reason the initial design for fans is made by 2
blade profiles.

Blade angles are computed under consideration of the equations listed below. They remain
unchanged by default if they are determined once. If main dimensions or meridional contours are
modified or, on the other hand, values of blade thickness or slip velocity are renewed, a recalculation
of blade angles should be executed by pressing the button Calculate b B. This recalculation is made
automatically if the checkbox Automatic is selected.

Efficiency values that are relevant for the blade angle

calculation are displayed for information as hint.

¢ Details of calculation of Inlet triangle483

¢ Details of calculation of Outlet triangle 485

(auto)

For special blade shapes some restrictions are existing and only the blade angles of the master
mean line at hub can be calculated or adapted manually. The angles of all other sections are
calculated automatically later during the mean line design 495 because they depend on the mean line
shape. This fact is indicated by the caption "(auto)" in the table. This means that there is a coupling
condition based on the selected blade shape that results in an automatic calculation of the blade
angles. The blade angles can be displayed in the mean line dialog in the “Informational values” 511
panel.

Circular blades

For circular blades the radius of the blade R is displayed beside the blade angle table for information.
This radius depends on the radii r1, r2 and blade angles bB1, bB2 at leading and trailing edge. If the
calculation of the circular blade is not possible a warning symbol is displayed.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Automated blade angles are active.

Values may adapt to changing input parameters.

Blade angles are updated automatically when To fix the blade angles you could uncheck the
input parameters are modified. "Automatic" calculation. Then you have to
manually start the calculation if required.

Swirl gradient violates Euler equation.

Check blade angles and velocity triangles.

c u2*r2 is lower than c u1*r1 (turbines: c u2*r2 is Recalculate and/or check blade angles B
and
higher than c u1*r1) resulting in energy flow angles at leading and trailing edge.
transmission in the wrong direction (Euler
equation of turbomachinery).

(leading/trailing edge) = ... is larger than warning level of ...

Blade angle difference (highest - lowest value) at Check the resulting 3D blade shape and avoid
all spans exceeds the warning level (see high blade angle differences on spans if
Preferences: Warning level 224 ). possible.
The resulting blade could be highly twisted.

(span) = ... is larger than warning level of ...

= - on one or more spans Check the resulting 3D blade shape and avoid
exceeds the warning level (see Preferences: high blade angle differences between leading
Warning level 224 ). and trailing edge if possible.
The resulting blade could be highly curved.

Blade angles cannot be determined. Thermodynamic state could not be calculated.

Check main dimensions, meridional shape or global setup.

[ for compressors and turbines only ]

The dimensions or meridional contour might be Increase the dimensions (width etc.), meridional
too tight for the specified mass flow and inlet contour or change the Global setup 108 (e.g.
conditions. decrease mass flow).

7.3.1.4.1 Inlet triangle

The inlet triangle is defined by inflow parameters and geometrical dimensions on leading edge.

Between inlet area and leading edge the swirl is constant because transmission of energy from
rotating impeller to fluid occurs in blade area only. Cross sections 0 and 1 (see Main dimensions 278 )
are different only due to blockage of the flow channel by blades (t1) in section 1. This results in an
increased meridional velocity c m .

cm1
tan1 
wu1

cm1  cm0 1

t1 d1 s1
1  with t1  , 1 
t 1  1 z sin1B

cm0  Q d1b1 

wu1  u1  cu1

u1  d1n

rS r
cu1  cuS  uS 1  r  S
r1 r1
(const. inflow swirl)

Selected blade angle 1B

does only indirectly influence the velocity triangle due to blade blockage.
Differences between selected blade angle 1B
and flow angle 1
is referred as the incidence angle: i =
1B
- 1

In general an inflow without any incidence is intended (i=0). If i¹ 0 the flow around the leading edge
shows high local velocities and low static pressure:
i > 0: 1
< 1B
® stagnation point on pressure side
i < 0: 1
> 1B
® stagnation point on suction side

A small incidence angle i can be profitable for best efficiency point. Calculation of 1B
inside CFturbo
gives inflow without incidence.

Typical inlet blade angles are:

Pumps, Fans 1B
< 40° due to best efficiency

Pumps 1B
as small as possible due to cavitation; with regard to efficiency not
smaller then 15…18°

Compressors optimal blade angle 1B

is about 30°

If the radius of leading edge varies from hub to shroud the blade angle 1B
does not remain constant.
A higher radius on shroud results in a lower value for - the blade is curved on leading edge.
1B

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Leading edge blade angle > xx°

Unusual high inlet blade angles. Too high values indicate too small inlet cross
section. Increase leading edge dimensions
The warning level can be adjusted under (Main dimensions 278 )
Preferences: Warning level 224 .

Leading edge blade angle ßB1 < xx°

Unusual low inlet blade angles. Too small inlet angles indicate too high inlet
cross section. Decrease leading edge
The warning level can be adjusted under dimensions (Main dimensions 278 )
Preferences: Warning level 224 .

Vaned Stator downstream swirl differs significantly from defined value at cu,cm
specification [axial turbines only]

If a vaned stator is located prior the rotor, its Adjust the precursor stator trailing edge blade
blade angles might yield circumferential angles manually or by using the soft button "Set
velocities that are significantly different from in the blade properties 611 of the stator.
those defined by cu, cm specification 559 .

Calculation of LE blade angles not possible. Change blade shape, blade thickness or inlet
diameters.

Problem Possible solutions

The combination of the inlet state (mass flow, Adjust the inlet swirl (e.g. by adjusting a
swirl, pressure and temperature), diameters and precursor stator trailing edge), or the diameters
blade setup does not allow for the calculation of (main dimensions 278 or LE in meridional
the blade angles. There are no blade angles that contour 423 ), or the LE thickness.
fulfill all the above mentioned constraints. E.g.,
the blockage might be too big in case the inlet
swirl is high.

A reasonable thermodynamic state could not be calculated @LE. Consider change of

blade angles or thickness, main dimensions or global setup.
[ for compressors and turbines only ]

The geometry does not allow for the Adjust the leading edge blade angles or
establishment of a physically valid state. E.g. thickness values or main dimensions 278 or the
the mass flow is too high. global setup 108 (e.g. mass flow or inlet
conditions).

The blade angles are not within the valid range.

Usage of CFturbo is limited to inlet angles Blade angle calculation is impossible (see
between 0° and 180°. below) or adjust unsuitable user input for blade
angles.

ßB indeterminate. It's not possible to determine blade angle ßB.

Blade angle calculation failed. Check input values and geometry.

[ Turbine rotors only ]

In case of turbines the calculation of the incidence by Aungier 490 can be used.

According to decreased energy transmission the slip coefficient g is defined:

7.3.1.4.2 Outlet triangle

The outlet triangle is determined by geometrical dimensions of flow channel and selected blade angle
2B
. The blade angle 2B strongly affects the transmission of energy in the impeller therefore it has to
be chosen very carefully.

Similar to the inlet the velocity triangles in cross sections 2

and 3 are different due to blockage of the flow channel by
blades t2 in section 2.

cm2
tan2 
wu2

cm2  cm3 2

t2  d2 s2
2  with t2  , 2 
t2  2 z sin2B

cm3  Q d2b2 

wu2  u2  cu2

u2  d2n

Y h  u12 1  r 
cu2 
u2

Y
from : ~
Y  u2cu3  u1cu0
h

For determination of 2B
it is important to be aware about the deviation between flow angle and blade
angle. The direction of the relative flow w2 at impeller outlet does not follow exactly with the blade
contour at angle 2B
. The flow angle 2
is always smaller than blade angle 2B
due to the slip
velocity. This difference is called deviation angle :

The deviation angle should not exceed 10°…14°, in order to limit increased turbulence losses by
asymmetric flow distribution.

A reduced flow angle 2

results in smaller circumferential component of absolute speed c u2, which is
- according to Euler's equation - dominant for the transmission of energy. Blade angle 2B
is
estimated by c u2, for blade congruent flow (see figure). Therefore an estimation of slip is necessary.

Slip can be estimated by empirical models. The following models are available in CFturbo (not for
Radial-inflow Turbines):

¢ GÜLICH/ WIESNER 489

¢ AUNGIER/ WIESNER 490

¢ PFLEIDERER 491

¢ VON BACKSTROEM 492

¢ Specific definitions 493

Blade angle 2B
must be determined to reach the desired energy transmission - respectively the
required head/ pressure difference - under consideration of slip velocity.

The following recommendations for common blade angles 2B

exist due to optimal efficiency:

Pumps 15°...45°, commonly used 20°...27°

Fans not higher than 50°

Compressors 35°...50°, unshrouded impellers up to 70°...90°

Turbines radius dependent, see sine rule 516

Centrifugal machines - except for radial-inflow gas turbines - with low specific speed nq usually have
similar values for 2B. The blades for this type of impellers are often designed with a straight trailing
edge ( =const.). For radial-inflow gas turbine rotors and for Francis runners the radii along the
2B
trailing edge from hub to shroud are very different, resulting in very different values for 2B
and twisted
blades.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Trailing edge blade angle ßB2 < xx°

Problem Possible solutions

Unusual low outlet blade angles. Too small outlet angles indicate too high outlet
cross section. Decrease trailing edge
The warning level can be adjusted under dimensions
Preferences: Warning level 224 . (Main dimensions 278 )

Deviation (slip) between blade and flow is pretty high.

(pumps, fans, compressors only)

Unusual high deviation (slip) between blade and Possible solutions could be: increase the
flow direction at outlet. This indicates too high impeller diameter (Main dimensions 278 ),
blade loading. increase the number of blades, increase
meridional blade length (Meridional contour 423 ),
The warning level can be adjusted under select a different slip model
Preferences: Warning level 224 .

Trailing edge blade angle ßB2 > xx°.

Unusual high blade angles at trailing edge. This Increase trailing edge dimensions (Main
can be caused by overloading the impeller. dimensions 278 ) and/or the slip coefficient .

The warning level can be adjusted under

Preferences: Warning level 224 .

A reasonable thermodynamic state could not be calculated @TE. Consider change of

blade angles or thickness, main dimensions or global setup.
[ for compressors and gas turbines only ]

The geometry does not allow for the Adjust the trailing edge blade angles or
establishment of a physically valid state. E.g. thickness values or main dimensions 278 or the
the mass flow is too high. global setup 108 (e.g. mass flow or inlet
conditions).

Calculation of TE blade angles not possible. Change blade shape or blade angles or
inlet/outlet diameters.

The combination of Global setup settings, main Adjust main dimensions 278 or the global
dimensions and blade setup does not allow for setup 108 (e.g. mass flow or inlet conditions) or
the calculation of the blade angles. There are no the Blade properties (e.g. blade shape, blade
blade angles that fulfill all the above mentioned thickness, slip coefficient / slip model 486 ,
constraints. number of blades).

Blade angles are not within the valid range.

Problem Possible solutions

Usage of CFturbo is limited to blade angles Blade angle calculation is impossible (see
between 0° and 180°. below) or adjust unsuitable user input for blade
angles.

No possibility to determine Blade angles ßB.

Blade angle calculation failed. Try to increase the impeller diameter d2 or outlet
width b2 and/or the slip coefficient .

Deviation (slip) between blade and flow is too high.

The slip calculation results in an extremely high Possible solutions could be: increase the
slip angle, which is unrealistic. The blades could impeller diameter (Main dimensions 278 ),
be overloaded or the wrong slip model is used. increase the number of blades, increase
meridional blade length (Meridional contour 423 ),
The error level can be adjusted under select a different slip model
Preferences: Warning level 224 .

7.3.1.4.2.1 Slip coefficient by GÜLICH/ WIESNER

Outflow (slip) coefficient is defined for the decreased energy transmission:

c u 2  c u 2
  1
u2

The c u-difference is called slip velocity.

The smaller the outflow coefficient, the higher the deviation of flow compared to the direction given by
blade.

Wiesner developed an empirical equation for the estimation of outflow coefficient:

Gülich modified this formula by two additional correction factors:

 sin  2B 
  f1 1  kw
 z 0.7 
 

with the correction factors:

 0.98 for radial impellers 

f1   
1 . 02  1 .2  10 3

n q  50  for mixed - flow impellers 
1 for d1m d 2  Lim 
 3
kw    d1m d 2  Lim  
1   
  1   
  Lim  

d1m  0.5 * d1,Shroud 2  d1,Hub 2 

 8.16 sin  2B 
Lim  exp   
 z 

Circumferential component of blade congruent flow can be calculated as follows:

c u 2  c u 2  1   u 2

Contrary to Wiesner's original suggestion an average inlet diameter d1m is not used for the
calculation of k w in CFturbo but the diameter at hub and shroud respectively. Doing so a slip
coefficient for hub and shroud can be calculated. An average slip coefficient is determined by:
  0.5  Hub   Shroud 

The switch between radial and mixed-flow calculation of the correction factor f1 is done by:

f1  max 0.98, 1.02  1.2 10 3 n q  50 

7.3.1.4.2.2 Slip coefficient by AUNGIER/ WIESNER

Outflow (slip) coefficient g is defined for the decreased energy transmission:

cu2  cu2
 1
u2

The c u-difference is called slip velocity.

The smaller the outflow coefficient, the higher the deviation of flow compared to the direction given by
blade.

Aungier adjusted Wiesner's 489 original empirical equation for the estimation of outflow coefficient:

sin  2B
  1
z 0.7

The limiting radius ratio Lim

is given by:
  sin 19  0.2 2B 
Lim 
1  sin 19  0.2 2B 

The slip factor is corrected for radius ratios = r/r2 > Lim
with:

  2B / 1 0

  Lim 
 cor  1    

 1  Lim  
 

[ Compressors only ]

The model is further adjusted in case it is applied to splitter blades. Then the number of blades in the
above equation is corrected by the relative splitter blade length with respect to the main blade length.

lsB
z cor  zmB  z sB
L mB

Circumferential component of blade congruent flow can be calculated as follows:

cu2  cu2  1   u2

7.3.1.4.2.3 Slip coefficient by PFLEIDERER

Reduced energy transmission is expressed by decreased output coefficient p:

~Y
p  ~  1
Y

This coefficient can be empirically calculated in dependence of experience number y':

static moment from leading to trailing edge

'  a 1  2 60 
experience number

experience number a:

Centrifugal impeller with guided vanes a = 0.6

with volute a = 0.65…0.85

with plain diffusor a = 0.85…1.0

Mixed flow/axial impeller a = 1.0 …1.2

(the numbers are valid for sufficiently high Re; y’ strongly grows with small Re)

More descriptive is the decreased output factor k L:

1 ~
Y rc u 
kL  ~ 
1  p Y rc u 
(k L=1: for flow congruent to blade)

Circumferential component of the flow, which is congruent to blade, can be calculated as follows:

cu2 r12  1 
c u2      1 2n1  r 
kL r2  kL 
Now the outflow (slip) coefficient g according to Wiesner 489 can be calculated:

cu2  cu2
 1
u2

7.3.1.4.2.4 Slip coefficient by VON BACKSTROEM

Outflow (slip) coefficient g is defined for the decreased energy transmission:

The c u-difference is called slip velocity.

The smaller the outflow coefficient, the higher the deviation of flow compared to the direction given by
blade.

Von Backstroem 685 developed an empirical equation for the estimation of the outflow coefficient
assuming one single relative eddy in the rotor.
1
 1
F0  sol  sin2B 
.
Here sol is the solidity defined by:

1   z
sol 
2  sin2B 
.
The limiting radius ratio Lim
= 0.5, the radius ratio = Max(r1/r2, Lim
). The constant F0 = 5.

7.3.1.4.2.5 Specific slip coefficient definitions

Waste water pumps (GÜLICH)

For waste water pumps the slip mainly depends on the number of blades.

The table contains typical values for the slip coefficient :

number of blades slip coefficient

1 0.48 ... 0.6

2 0.53 ... 0.65

3 0.67 ... 0.75

Inducer pumps (GÜLICH)

For inducer pumps the deviation angle depends on the blade angles on leading and trailing edge and
the solidity.

13
   1B   t 
   2  2B  
 3  L 

7.3.1.4.2.6 Calculation details

Circumferential component of blade congruent flow can be calculated as follows:

c u 2  c u 2  1   u 2
.

The slip coefficient is a function of blade angle, number of blades and the meridional geometry (see
e.g. GÜLICH/WIESNER 489 etc.):

  f  2B , z, 
.

The relation of the blade angle to the velocity components is:

c m2
tan  2B  
u2  c u2
.
A swirl has to be produced by the impeller in accordance to the design specific work (here without
pre-swirl) with the Euler equation:

Y  c u2  u2
.

These equations build a set that cannot be solved explicitly but numerically. To this an equation
representing the difference of the slip coefficient according to the definition and according to the
particular model can be used:

c m2 Y
0      f  2B , z, 
u 2 tan  2B  u 2
.
One can test this equation with different values of 2B
and will get a function of the form = f( ).
2B
This function together with = f( 2B
) according to the definition of slip coefficient is displayed for hub
and shroud. Also, points of interest apart from zero are illustrated such as minimum and maximum
and inflection. The equation is fulfilled at zero.

7.3.2 Blade mean lines

IMPELLER | Blade mean lines

The blade mean lines are designed on the number of meridional flow surfaces which were determined
in Blade properties 453 .

Depending on the selected blade shape (see Blade properties 453 ) the design of the mean lines is
more or less restricted.

The blades of an impeller representing a deceleration cascade for the relative velocity. Therefore the
risk of flow separation exists. The user should try to obtain a continuous, smooth change of flow

direction, as well as the cross section graduation of the flow channel should be as steady as
possible.

Splitter blades

The splitter blades are displayed and designed on a separate tab (Splitter blade).

The design options depend on the link between main and splitter blades in the Blade properties 479 . If
Splitter blade linked to Main blade is activated there, the splitter blade is a shortened main
blade. The blade and wrap angles are calculated automatically.

The relative position of the splitter blade between two main blades can be adjusted. In case of linked
splitter a single value can be specified only, for unlinked splitter the full flexibility is available.

Additional views

Some more blade information is displayed in tables and diagrams in order to check the design and
for informational purposes:

¢ See Additional Views 511

Design mode

Select the currently available mode to design the blade mean lines.

¢ See Design mode 502

Coupled linear (Only for Freeform 3D blades)

For continuous transition between the separate mean lines (blade surface), the matching points of
each mean line have to be Coupled linear. If you deactivate this option then you can modify all
mean lines independently.

If the linear coupling mode is active you can move and rotate the connecting line. The positions of
Bezier points of all mean lines are modified correspondingly, to get uniform profiles. If you select a
point of the inner cross sections you can move the entire connecting line.

Angular positions

Wrap angle (common/ average)

The current average wrap angle of all mean lines is displayed. When design mode = conformal
mapping, this value can be modified or reset to default value resulting in the same value for all mean
lines, based on empirical functions 226 . The wrap angle of each mean line is given in the table.

Stacking

The stacking position is the relative position at which the mean line is stacked. It can be set only for
blades having more than 1 active mean line, e.g. Freeform 3D or Ruled surface 3D. In case of design
mode = conformal mapping, the stacking position is zero and cannot be altered currently.

The location of the stacking curve at which the stacking position is applied is determined by the -
position given in the table. It therefore determines - together with the stacking position - the location
of the Leading edge / Trailing edge. For some blade shapes, user defined values can be specified,
either directly in the table or using a progression dialog 96 (buttons above the columns).

Shown below are examples with a straight stacking curve located at a stacking angle = 45°. If the
stacking angle is different on each span, the stacking curve is not linear. The mean lines are stacked
at this curve at the given stacking position:

Stacking 0% = leading edge Stacking 50% = mid Stacking 100% = trailing edge

Rake angle

The rake angle R is the angle between the meridional plane and the leading or trailing edge
respectively. The following pictures depict a blade with zero rake angle (left) and R = -20° (right).

Blade w ith rake angle R = 0°

Blade w ith rake angle R = -20°

The rake is determined by

The rake angle can be set directly when the blade shape 459 is either Free-form 3D or Ruled Surface
3D. In case of Design mode 502 = conformal mapping rake angles at leading and trailing edge can
be set both. For different design modes only one rake angle can be set. The other one is determined
by the geometric restrictions.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Blade angles and blade extensions could lead to unusual blade shapes.

Blade angles and blade extensions could lead to non-feasible blade shapes.

The values of the blade angles and In theses cases the blade is highly curved or
the meridional and tangential blade extension has a S-shape. To design a reasonable blade
most likely result in an abnormal or strange the wrap angle has to be not too low and not too
blade shape. high.

To avoid any subsequent problems such mean You can

line shapes are blocked. a) modify the blade wrap angle
(checking the blade overlapping) or

Problem Possible solutions

b) modify the blade angles and B2

(probably the main dimensions have to be
adapted)

(leading/trailing edge) is higher than warning level

Blade angle difference (highest - lowest value) at Check the resulting blade shape and avoid high
all spans exceeds the warning level. The blade angle differences on spans if possible.
resulting blade could be highly twisted.

(leading/trailing edge) is higher than error level

Blade angle difference (highest - lowest value) at Decrease the blade angle differences on spans.
all spans exceeds the error level. Blade design
based on these extreme values makes no
sense.

Blade calculation failed due to boundary conditions and constraints.

Projection of the design mean line onto the Decrease wrap angle.
other spans fails for this blade shape.

Very high tangential leading edge sweep angle.

Leading edge sweep angle (tangential difference Adapt blade properties 453 , e.g. blade angles 479

between hub and shroud meanline at LE) is very . In some situations, it might be helpful to
high. This curved shape could result in abnormal increase the number of spans if possible.
or strange blade shape.

Too high tangential leading edge sweep angle.

Problem Possible solutions

Leading edge sweep angle (tangential difference Adapt blade properties 453 , e.g. blade angles 479

between hub and shroud meanline at LE) is too .

high. A reasonable blade cannot be generated.

Blade edge exceeds the meridional boundaries.

The meanlines of inner blade spans are Change meridional position of leading/ trailing
crossing the meridional extents at leading or edge or reduce number of spans to 2.
trailing edge.

This is only possible for ruled surface blades

with more than 2 spans.

Meridional extension mTE is different compared to meridional design.

Current meridional coordinates (m) of trailing Adapt imported m,t-curves to match the
edge deviate from the extension specified in the meridional extension.
meridional contour 423 design step.
It is more comfortable to switch the mean line
This is possible for imported geometry only curve mode from "Polyline" to "Bezier curve"
(polylines). before modifications are made in previous
design steps.

Blade angles and/or are different compared to blade properties.

Current blade angle values deviate from the Check imported m,t-curves or and
specified values in Blade properties 453 . compare with specified values at leading and
trailing edge. The values resulting from the
This is possible for imported geometry only current meanlines are displayed in "Additional
(polylines). views/ Informational values/ Blade angle B".

Overlapping of adjacent blades might be too low/ high.

Unusual blade overlapping, which is defined by Modify the blade wrap angle and/ or the
the overlapping factor F = Wrap angle Pitch number of blades (see Blade angles 479 ).
angle t (t = 360°/ number of blades)

The min./ max. warning level is defined in

Preferences: Warning level 224 .

Coupling partially deactivated.

Blade surface deformation can occur.

Problem Possible solutions

The mean lines are currently not linearly Activate linear coupling if it is deactivated.
coupled, which can result in deformed blade
surfaces. Homogenize B2
blade angle values (see Blade
properties 453 ).
Either linear coupling has been deactivated or it
is impossible because of highly deviating blade
angle values.

The warning occurs because the intersection of

B2
line and intersection line for one or more
mean lines cannot be determined. Usually this
has one of the following causes:

a) It is geometrically impossible to determine

this intersection (approximate parallel
lines).

b) The intersection is not between the points

of hub and shroud mean line.

c) The point of intersection is too close to the

endpoints of the mean line (lower than 5%).

Curvature very high. Swirl change might not be as high as intended.

One or more mean lines do not change their Design the mean line progression from leading
direction smoothly enough in the m,t coordinate to trailing edge more smoothly by modification
system resulting in partially high curvature ( B of the inner control points and the wrap angle. In
gradient). particular, the blade angle progression should
be checked.
The flow does not follow this high curvature and
thus the swirl change is much lower as Very high difference between B1
and B2
can
intended. In addition, the blade profile design make the solution of the problem more difficult
cannot follow the hook-shaped mean lines. and could require a higher wrap angle.

7.3.2.1 Design mode

The mean lines can be designed by alternative methods, which can be selected on panel Design
mode.

Each method has its specific advantages and disadvantages. The choice depends, among other
things, on the user experience. When switching from one method to another, the software tries to
maintain the geometry as much as possible.

Currently available design modes:

· t, m Conformal mapping 517

· Blade angle 506

· B' Blade loading 507

· z, T Peripheral projection 510

· Fixed 510

7.3.2.1.1 t, m Conformal mapping

The blade is designed in the conformal t, m mapping by Bezier curves.

The spatially curved meridional flow surfaces are mapped

to a plane by coordinate transformation. This coordinate
system has the angle in circumferential direction t as
abscissa and the dimensionless meridional extension m
as the ordinate.

Both quantities are created by the reference of absolute

distances in meridional (M) and tangential direction (T) to
the local radius r:

dM dT
dm  dt 
r r

dm
tan 
dt

By default the mean lines are represented by 3rd order Bezier curves (4 control points):

· 2 points define the endpoints at leading edge (left) and trailing edge (right).
These points can be moved horizontally only, because their meridional position m is already
fixed.
CFturbo's primary design is fixing the leading edge point for all cross sections at tangential
coordinate t=0 and meridional coordinate m=0, while the trailing edge point is determined by
the meridional extension (defined in the Meridional contour 423 design step) and the wrap
angle The initial wrap angle is based on empirical functions 226 .

· 2 inner points define the inner shape of the meanline.

These inner points can be moved along the dashed lines only, which represent the blade
angles B1 (leading edge) and B2 (trailing edge) specified in the Blade properties 453 design

step.
If you select any point of the inner (hub) or outer (shroud) cross section, you can rotate the
related coupling line between the spans around the opposite end point.
If you select any point of the inner spans, you can move the complete coupling line in
horizontal direction.

The table Angular positions 496 contains the values of the tangential leading edge position 0
and the
wrap angle . A distribution of these values along the span positions can be specified using the
button above the table.

The context menu of the curves contains additional options:

· Bezier curve/ Central Bezier point:

An additional central Bezier point can be activated, which can be moved freely and provides
more flexibility.

· Bezier curve/ Constant near leading (trailing) edge:

An additional control point at leading and/ or trailing edge is added, which defines a straight
line with constant B1/ B2.
The exact position can be defined by the point context window as r, z, or m value.

· Polyline/ Load curve:

After switching the curve mode to polyline, a user-defined polyline can be loaded.

Also, a mean line can be loaded from the profile manager 244 . In this case the dimensionless mean
line selected in the profile manager is staggered and scaled with the properties of the reference mean
line to be exchanged.

The visibility of the inner mean lines can be toggled via "Inner spans".

7.3.2.1.2 Blade angle

The blade is designed by means of a blade angle distribution with the help of Bezier curves.

The x-values of the Bezier control points are defined with respect to certain x-axis definitions. These
definitions can be selected below the design mode selection and will determine the x-axis definition
in the design diagram too.

The endpoints of the curves are completely fixed by their meridional coordinate specified in the
Meridional contour 423 design step and the blade angles B1 (leading edge) and B2 (trailing edge)
specified in the Blade properties 453 design step.

The inner Bezier points can be moved without any restrictions.

In the area Angular positions 496 the stacking position can be defined. Only at this position the
tangential coordinate can be specified directly, all other points along the meanline are calculated
automatically. Therefore, the blade wrap angle of each span is a result of the given blade angle
progression.

The context menu of the curves contains additional options:

· Bezier curve/ Add/ Remove Bezier point:

The number of Bezier points can be modified, which provides high flexibility.

· Bezier curve/ Constant near leading (trailing) edge:

An additional control point at leading and/ or trailing edge is added, which defines a horizontal
line and hence a region with constant B1/ B2.
The exact position can be defined by the point context window as r, z, or m value.

· Polyline/ Load curve:

After switching the curve mode to polyline, a user-defined polyline can be loaded.

The visibility of the inner mean lines can be toggled via "Inner spans".

7.3.2.1.3 B' Blade loading

The blade is designed by a blade loading distribution B'(M) and can be therefore seen as inverse
design. B' is defined as:

with the following components:

cu Circumferential abs. velocity

r Radius

M Meridional coordinate (not m')

angular speed

By integrating B' w.r.t M/Mmax one gets the swirl c u r that is to say the Euler work Y. The B' curve
is consisting of 3 parabola. The inner parabola's third coefficient is zero which results in a linear
piece of the curve. Parameters of the curve are the absolute values of B' at LE and TE, the M-
coordinate of the inner control points and the slope of the inner linear piece of the curve. The dotted
line is parallel to the linear piece and can be seen as a see-saw to adjust the slope. There is a
corresponding set of meridional velocities to each B' curve coming from the solution of the meridional
flow calculation 441 . The result of the definition of the B' curve is a certain c u-distribution that will be
used for the calculate the relative F (impeller) and the absolute flow angle F (stator) resp.:

Using the information of incidence and deviation from the blade properties 453 the absolute blade
angle B (or B for stators) is determined.

The value B' at TE is zero to obey the Kutta-condition. Therefore, the associated control point is
fixed. After switching from a different design mode to blade loading, control points of the see-saw as
well as of the LE are automatically fitted to get a geometry close to the one before the design mode
change. Only active spans are converted that way. All blade loading curves of dependent spans are
calculated based on the resulting geometry (see blade-to-blade flow 1D 532 ). That is why deviations
from the Kutta-condition may occur.

The meridional velocities cm are stored and kept constant when Update global parameters is
deactivated. The same applies for the Revolutions. If Update global parameters is activated the
velocities are updated with the results of the solution of the meridional flow calculation 441 and the
Revolutions is held synchronized with the Global setup 108 or Main dimension 278 value. The latter is
used if the impeller has an alternative speed 417 .

The Euler work is derived from the respective value defined in the Global setup 108 when the Update
blade parameters is activated. Also the pre-swirl is updated in that state and is taken from the
Main dimensions 278 . If Update blade parameters is deactivated the Euler work as well as the pre-
swirl can be set directly. Incidence and deviation are result of that design mode and are displayed for
information for hub and shroud.

7.3.2.1.4 z, T Peripheral projection

[ for Axial impellers & Radial element blades 474 only ]

The blade is designed in its peripheral projection (axial and circumferential coordinates) by Bezier
curves.

The leading edge points of all spans are visualized by single dots in order to enable detailed leading
edge design.

7.3.2.1.5 Fixed

All mean lines are completely determined by simple blade shape and blade angles (see Blade
properties 453 ).

Therefore, there is no flexibility in meanline design in this situation.

7.3.2.2 Additional views

The following information

can be displayed in the
mean line dialog using the
"Additional views" button:

The display of the curves can be toggled by the check boxes that are accessible via in the lower
corner on the left. In case of splitter those curves of main and splitter blades can be hidden/shown. In
case separate curves for suction and pressure side are existing their visibility can be toggled too.

Special display option for splitter blades:

The display of main and splitter curves can be toggled by the check boxes independently.

The visibility of the inner mean lines can be toggled via "Inner spans".

Informational values The tables contain additional values for information 514 .

Blade passage area Progression of the blade passage area within a channel
built by two neighboring mean surfaces as well as hub and
shroud. Additionally for compressible fluids the critical area
can be displayed.

Isentropic Mach number The isentropic Mach number is calculated on the basis of
the local total state, on the mass flow according to the
design point 108 and on the Blade passage area. Here
perfect gas behavior is assumed. The flow may by choked
and can be subsonic or supersonic according to the
settings in the inlet 609 and outlet 609 of the main
dimensions.

[ Only compressible fluids and stators ]

3D-Preview 3D model 259 of the currently designed mean surface as

well as surfaces of hub and shroud.

x, y frontal view The Frontal view represents the designed mean lines in a
frontal view, including diameters dH and d2.

t, m conformal mapping The spatially curved meridional flow surfaces are mapped to
a plane by coordinate transformation. This coordinate
system has the angle in circumferential direction t as
abscissa and the dimensionless meridional extension m as
the ordinate.

¢ See t, m conformal mapping 517

z, T unwrapped view Peripheral projection of all mean lines (z = axial coordinate,

T = circumferential coordinate).

[ Axial impellers only ]

blade angle B
progression along every mean line.
Too high local extreme values should be avoided if
possible.

Additionally F
progression can be displayed (see display
options). Those relative flow angles are calculated on the
basis of the velocity triangles determined in Blade-to-blade
flow 1D 532 .

blade angle (meridian) B

progression projected in meridional surface.

t wrap angle Progression of tangential coordinate t along every mean

line.

t wrap angle (meridian) Progression of tangential coordinate t projected in

meridional surface.

lean angle Distribution of the lean angle The blade lean angle can
be manipulated only indirectly.

With the lean angle the quasi-orthogonal of the blade leans

away from the z-direction. The quasi-orthogonal is a
straight line connecting corresponding points on hub and
shroud mean line. These lines are setup in the blade
properties dialog and are displayed in the meridional cut 479
if just two mean lines were chosen. Otherwise the quasi-
orthogonal is not displayed but internally determined by
connecting corresponding points on hub and shroud mean
line.

¢ See Blade lean angle 519

Strike velocity ¢ See Strike velocity 521

Blade surface values ¢ See Blade surface values 522

Blade-to-blade flow 1D ¢ See Blade-to-blade flow 1D 532

Blade-to-blade flow 2D ¢ See Blade-to-blade flow 2D 528

7.3.2.2.1 Informational values

The tables contains additional values for information:

Radial diffuser [ Stator type "Radial diffuser" only ]

Various values to verify the quality of the diffuser design.

¢ see Mean line 613 design for "Radial diffuser" stator type

Blade passage

Throat area between neighboring mean surfaces.

This value depends on the number of blades, the wrap angle and the blade shape.

Strike velocity [ Pump impeller only ]

The average as well as the maximum strike velocity.

¢ see Strike velocity 521

Circular blade

Radius, sector angle, center point, leading edge point, trailing edge point of circular arc.

Lean angle

Lean angle values at leading ( 1) and trailing edge ( 2).

¢ see Blade lean angle 519

Blade loading [ Pump impeller only ]

Blade loading estimation with lift coefficient (Guelich):


a   a,max  0.9
2 2
z LBl d2 2  1   4 1  sin  z 
,

and with the effective blade loading (Gülich):

0.77
2    u 2  40 
eff   range     15%
H  z L Bl d 2 w1  w 2   nq  .

Blade angle

Table with the blade angles B

calculated in the Blade properties 453 dialog or computed due to
simple blade shapes.

Blade angle in x-y

Table with the blade angles of the frontal view B,xy

.
In case of strictly radial blades these values are consistent with the blade angles B
.

Blade angle with sine rule [ Turbine rotors only ]

Calculated blade angle using the sine rule.

For every mean line the calculated angles as well as their differences to the actual blade angles are
given in a table.
¢ see Sine rule 516

Blade solidity

Ratio between blade length (in different definitions) and pitch (e.g. d2/z).

Other information

Table with:

· mean line length lML, i.e. the length in a 3D cartesian coordinate system

· incidence angle i for hub and shroud

· Reynolds number Re

with w1

with

(lML = average mean line length in 3D)

· resulting angles of overlapping jB of 2 neighboring blades

7.3.2.2.1.1 Sine rule

[ Turbine rotors only ]

With the help of the sine rule blade angles at the outlet can be evaluated. In accordance to this rule,
blade angles at the outlet should have almost the same size as the angle that is built by a
hypotenuse being the pitch t, and a cathetus (opposite leg) being the smallest distance between two
neighboring mean lines eq at a flow surface. If this is the case the outflow can be regarded as
almost tangential to the trailing edge.

This is shown in a picture for a single mean line.

7.3.2.2.2 t, m conformal mapping

The spatially curved meridional flow surfaces are mapped

to a plane by coordinate transformation. This coordinate
system has the angle in circumferential direction t as
abscissa and the dimensionless meridional extension m
as the ordinate.

Both quantities are created by the reference of absolute

distances in meridional (M) and tangential direction (T) to
the local radius r:

dm
tan 
dt

Special display option for splitter blades:

With "Splitter blade relative to main blade" checked, corresponding mean lines (splitter and
main) have the same maximum m-value. Otherwise all mean lines have the same maximum m-value
as the main blade's hub mean line.

7.3.2.2.3 Blade angles

Blade angles and relative angles

Three different angle distributions can be displayed for each span:

· Blade angles —

· Relative flow angle ---

With the specified incidence and deviation angles (see blade properties 453 ) and the attachment and
detachment location (the latter is the Stanitz-Radius 524 ) relative flow angles can be determined
based on the blade angles. An ineffective blade has got a relative flow angle distribution that does not
change the pre-swirl.

7.3.2.2.4 Blade lean angle

For each point p of a mean line on a meridional flow surface a 2D coordinate frame is given by the
circumferential direction t and the meridional direction m. The blade angle B equals the tangent
angle of the mean line in this frame. For the point p, this direction corresponds to the intersection of
the mean surface with the m,t-plane, locally. By completing the frame in 3D with an orthogonal
direction n (being perpendicular to t and m), other plane intersections with the mean surface can be
analyzed.

While blade angle B only depends on the mean line itself, blade lean angle is measured in
n,t-plane and gives an information about the slope between mean lines in circumferential direction.

Using the surface normal direction nMS on mean surface the blade lean angle is calculated from
the ratio of the portion in n and t:

 nMS ,n 
  arctan  
 n 
 MS ,t 

With an example of a compressor some means for the manipulation of the blade lean
angle are given:

· 1
: blade angle 479
B1

· 1
move second Bezier point 496 at leading edge

· 1
: wrap angle 496

· 1
and enlargement of the curvature: reduction of the meridional extension of the meridional
contour 423

7.3.2.2.5 Strike velocity

[pumps only]

The total strike velocity is calculated perpendicularly to the leading edge. The limiting strike velocity
(display options) is the maximum strike velocity that can be reached by manipulating the tangential
position of the leading edge. Displayed is the meridional leading edge length from hub to shroud
versus the strike velocity.

7.3.2.2.6 Blade surface values

Determination of velocity distribution on impeller blades by Stanitz & Prian 684

Stream lines must be known a-priori (see Meridional flow calculation 441 ). If the meridional flow
calculation failed, the blade surface values cannot be calculated and the diagram will not be
available. Stream lines rotated around z-axis build stream surfaces.The relative velocities will be
calculate in a blade-to-blade section, that is encapsulated by two adjacent stream surfaces. Single
values of relative velocities will be determined at r = constant. Before that an average velocity is
calculated on the basis of the continuity equation:

m

w 
A

The part mass flow is a function of the entire mass flow, number of blades and number of stream
lines. Between two adjacent stream surfaces there is always the same mass flow.

The cross section is determined by stream line distance the radius r, the tangential distance
between pressure and suction side of two neighboring blades and by a mean relative flow angle:

A  r  t  h  sin 

In the picture above a section according to the following equation is displayed:

With the assumption of zero circulation of the absolute flow within a stream surface (green surface)
the relative velocity at the suction side can be calculated by:

sinps  sinss   2w  cu  r  t 

wss    u  cotps  cotss  ,
sinps  sinss  sinps  m 


here u is the local circumferential velocity, c u is the circumferential component of the absolute
velocity, ss
and ps
are the blade angles at suction and pressure side respectively. Due to the fact
that mean relative velocity is an averaged value of wss and wps , the relative velocity at the pressure
side can be calculated with:

wps  2  w  wss 

Annotation

The continuity equation has to be solved iteratively for the relative velocity since the density of a
compressible medium is determined by the relative velocity. The density can be calculated from
isentropic relation:

The average relative flow angle is approximated by the average value of the blade angle at suction-
and pressure side. At a certain radius the assumption applies that due to the slip (decreased power)

the flow cannot be considered as blade congruent anymore. The mean relative flow angle will be
corrected by the slip at loci with a radius bigger than this Stanitz-Radius.

The whole procedure is based on the assumption that the flow is considered as frictionless and that
shocks as well as heat transport across boundaries do not occur. There might by geometric
constellations where the cross section (blue surface in the images above) is too small for the mass
flow specified in the global setup 108 . If this happens the equation can't be solved for the average
density and relative velocity and no data is displayed for the respective span.

Blade loading

Static pressures at suction and pressure side can be determined by the velocities. To this end a
relation between the enthalpy difference between suction and pressure side and the meridional
derivative of the swirl is used:

2  r  cu 
hps  hss   cm 
n m

The blade loading can be expressed in terms of the pressure difference between suction and
pressure side and divided by the total inlet pressure:

pps  pss av  2  r  cu  

BLp     cm  c v Tps  Tss  
pin,total pin,total  n m 

For incompressible fluids the second therm within the brackets is zero.

Another formulation of the blade loading makes use of the velocity difference between suction and
pressure side and divided by the average velocity:

wss  wps
BLv  .
w

Other quantities

Beyond the afore mentioned variables the average circumferential component of the absolute velocity
c u as well as the average swirl B can also be displayed. Those quantities are determined by:

cu  u  w  cos ,

Also the Ackeret 684 criteria are displayed together with the relative velocities. In accordance to the
below defined Ackeret criteria the maximum relative velocity of the respective span shall not be
bigger than 1.8·w2, whereas the minimum relative velocity shall not be smaller than 0.3·w1 (w1 and w2
are the average relative velocities at LE and TE resp.). Those limits (max. and min. velocities) are not
displayed for splitter blades.

Ackeret  w2 w ,
1

w max SS
Ackeret max  1.8  ,
w2

w minPS
Ackeret min  0.3  .
w1

[ Compressors and Turbine rotors only ]

Mach Number

Mach Number can be displayed both relative as well as absolute.

Ma w  w a ,

Mac  c a .

Here a is the sonic speed defined by:

a   R  Z  T 

Cross section area and critical area

The specified mass flow can only be realized for a certain size of the cross section at the given total
inlet state. A critical cross section is determined by the following set of equations under assumption
of perfect gas behavior:

pcr  cr  p tin ,

R / cp
Tcr  Tt  cr ,

Here cr
is the pressure ratio at which the flow is at sonic speed in the smallest cross section:


 2   1
cr    .
  1

For Air cr
= 0.528. At the given inlet total state it is not possible to transport the mass flow through
a cross section smaller than Acr. Both the actual (A) and the critical cross section (Acr) can be
displayed. The actual cross section is the cross section according to the blue surface in the picture
above.

If the combination of mass flow, total inlet condition and geometry (cross section) yields a state that
is physically not possible a solution cannot be determined and a hint is displayed saying: "No
solution due to shocks or transsonic behavior at span: x". x will hold all spans for which the hint is
true.

7.3.2.2.7 Blade-to-blade flow 2D

Stream function

Stream lines must be known a-priori (see Meridional flow calculation 441 ). If the meridional flow
calculation failed, blade-to-blade flow 2D cannot be calculated and the diagram will not be available.
The stream lines rotated around the z-axis build stream surfaces.The relative stream function and
relative velocities will be calculate in a blade-to-blade section, that is encapsulated by two stream
surfaces and represent a fluid strip. Since hub and shroud are considered as stream lines, there are
always two fluid strips less than stream lines. All calculations of the relative stream function and its
derivatives are done within a fluid strip that has a stream surface in between. Results of these
calculations are given for fluid strips that correspond to inner stream lines or surfaces resp. In the
picture below those stream lines have indexes from 2 .. 6.

In contrast to the Stanitz&Prian 522 approach here a two-dimensional relative flow is calculated. This
equation in m-t co-ordinates reads as:

2 1   2 1  n  r

     n  2  r
t 2
 t t m2
 n m m m .

This equation can be derived from the the assumption of zero absolute rotation of the flow in the fluid
strip between two adjacent blades and from the equation of continuity in two dimensions
respectively:

Here w is the relative velocity, is the rotational speed and is the fluid density. In the equation
above is the normal height of the fluid strip. Another assumption is that there is no variation of the

density with respect to the tangential co-ordinate t. The information about the meridional distribution
is coming from the Stanitz&Prian 522 approach.

Boundary conditions

The boundary conditions are defined as follows. At the suction side a stream function value of zero is
set whereas at the pressure side it is set to the mass flow that is conveyed through the fluid strip.
For the 5 fluid strips this is 2/5 times the design point 108 mass flow.

ss  0
,

2
ps  m

No. fluidstrips .

At inlet and outlet all stream function values are linearly interpolated with respect to the tangential
co-ordinate t. Then all stream function values are defined at the boundaries.

Calculation grid and solution scheme

The equation is solved using a finite-difference-method (FDM) on a computational grid, which is

generated by interpolating mean lines between pressure and suction side. For more information
about the finite-difference-method refer to e.g. Anderson et al 684 .

Results

The tangential and the meridional relative velocity component resp. can be calculated by:

1 
wu 
 n  r m
,

1 
wm 
 n  r t
.

The static pressure pi can be determined by using the constancy of the rothalpy. For incompressible
fluids that reads:

For compressible fluids the same principle is applied for the specific enthalpy and temperature resp.
with the assumption of perfect gas behavior 229 . Since the density is already known the static
pressure can be calculated using the equation of state p=f(T, ).

1 1
T1  w12  u12  Ti  w2i  u2i 
2cp 2cp
.

The total pressure is derived from the Bernoulli equation for incompressible fluids and by assuming
an isentropic state change from (p,T,c>0) -> (pt ,Tt ,c=0) for compressible fluids.

[ Compressors and Turbine rotors only ]

Mach Number can be displayed both relative as well as absolute.

Ma w  w a ,

Mac  c a .

Here a is the sonic speed defined by:

a   R  Z  T 

The specified mass flow can only be realized for a certain size of the cross section at the given total
inlet state. If the combination of mass flow, total inlet condition and geometry (cross section) yields a
state that is physically not possible a solution cannot be determined and a hint is displayed saying:
"No solution due to shocks, transsonic behavior or numerical reasons at span: x". x will hold the
actual span number for which the hint is true.

7.3.2.2.8 Blade-to-blade flow 1D

Swirl cu·r and its derivative

cu-values are calculated based on the assumption that the flow follows the direction given by the
blade, i.e. by the blade angles. For centrifugal and mixed-flow impeller this assumptions is applied
until the Stanitz-radius (see Stanitz & Prian 684 ). At radii bigger than the Stanitz-radius 524 the
slip 486 is taken into account. For axial impellers the assumption of blade congruent flow is applied
up an equivalent meridional position. If the flow enters the blade passage with an incidence (see
blade properties 483 ) the relative flow is assumed to be blade congruent latest as m/mmax = 30%,
depending on the incidence angle. The meridional velocity component cm is taken from the
meridional flow calculation 441 .

In case the meridional flow calculation 441 failed the blade-to-blade flow 1D results cannot be
calculated and the diagram will not be available.

7.3.3 Blade profiles

IMPELLER | Blade profiles

To create blade profiles (main and splitter) the blade thickness distribution for the hub and the shroud
profile is used. By default the thickness is defined at leading edge, at trailing edge and at the control
points of the blade. For the initial CFturbo-design, typical values in dependence on the impeller
diameter d2 are used (see Approximation functions 226 ).

2 impeller types have special thickness distribution:

· Waste water pumps have very high thickness at leading edge to avoid solid attachments.
Starting from 20% of the blade length the thickness is constant up to the trailing edge.

· Inducer pumps have very low thickness at leading edge to improve suction performance. The
very small leading edge thickness is increasing up to 40%...80% of pitch (t= d/n ) to achieve
Bl
constant blade thickness. The thickness distribution is asymmetric and sharpen at the suction
side only.

The representation of the thickness distribution is made along the relative blade length (0 = leading
edge, 1 = trailing edge).

Each thickness curve has a popup menu (right click

on curve) to handle its properties.

"Polyline to Bezier 97 " converts a loaded polyline into

a Bezier curve, where the number of desired Bezier
points can be specified.

"Load profile from profile manager 244 " can be

selected to use a pre-defined thickness distribution.

"Convert to Bezier" is available for polyline thickness

definition only and converts it to a Bezier curve very
similar to "Polyline to Bezier".

The position of the control points can be changed by

moving them with the mouse or by entering specific
values by right-clicking.

For the value input, the relative or absolute position

along the blade can be used alternatively.

Asymmetry at edges

The thickness at leading/ trailing edge is already

specified in the Blade properties 453 , but an
asymmetric thickness distribution relative to the
meanline can be specified by adapting the central
first/ last control points.

The asymmetry can be specified by the absolute

distance to the meanline.

The following general properties of the profile design can be specified on the right side:

Design Mode

Linear

Linear interpolation between control points

Freeform

Bezier curves are used for the thickness distribution

Leading / Trailing edge rounded: Leading and trailing edge can be rounded optionally. If a
polyline was loaded this option is determined automatically and cannot be modified.

Linked to Main

Only for splitter blades: splitter profile is linked to main profile

Basic settings

Thickness definition

Thickness definition specifies the way of adding blade thickness values to both sides of the
blade mean line to create the pressure and suction sides of the blade. Three types of method
are supported:

Perpendicular to mean surface

After creating the mean surface from all mean lines, the thickness values are added along
surface normal. Naturally, this method depends on all mean lines.

Perpendicular to mean line (recommended)

Thickness values added orthogonal to mean line inside rotational surface defined by span.
Compared to method above, this definition only depends on the mean line/span itself. Therefore
it provides higher stability in trimming with hub/shroud especially for highly curved blade
geometry.

Tangential
This method is operating point-wise by adding the thickness values in tangential direction and is
therefore the most independent method.

SS-PS-Coupling

None
No coupling between suction side and pressure side

Symmetric
Symmetric thickness distribution: control points on suction and pressure side are coupled

Constant distance
Shifting the thickness distribution to pressure/suction side whereas the distribution itself
remains constant

Flexible length position

Shifting control points in horizontal direction

Same point count

Use identical number of inner control points for profiles at hub, shroud, pressure side (PS),
suction side (SS)

Hub to Shroud/Tip (spanwise)

Identical profiles

All profiles have the same thickness distribution

Thickness exponent

Adjusts the morphing of hub/shroud-thickness for inner profiles. Default is linear.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Pressure and suction side (...) are intersecting or swapped.

The blade sides are intersecting or they are on Check the imported profile data if
the opposite position. Normally this can occur a) pressure and suction side are not intersecting
only when loading profiles from file. b) pressure side is always above suction side

Profile of Main/ Splitter blade exceeds its valid range.

Profile is defined for a relative blade length Check the imported profile data or correct the
smaller 0% or greater 100%. Beziér control points to lie between 0% and
100%.

Loaded profiles do not correspond to settings of design mode

Profile properties defined by context menu in the May occur if thickness distribution is loaded
design dialog do not match Design mode from profile manager 244 :
settings. a) Check and adjust state of check box LE
rounded and TE rounded
b) Apply profiles to both hub and shroud resp.,
or choose identical profiles

Blade thickness values don't match target thickness on LE/TE.

Current profile thickness on leading- / trailing Check the imported profile data if the values for
edge deviate from the specifications of the Blade leading and trailing edge match those of the
properties 453 dialog. Blade properties 453 dialog.

Pressure/Suction side at Hub/Shroud:

max. thickness seems too high to get smooth surface.

Problem Possible solutions

The combination of of high blade thickness and Either blade thickness at the specified profile
high meanline curvature results in degenerated side or meanline curvature at the specified span
blade profiles and prevents creating smooth position has to be reduced .
blade surface.

Internal blade thickness is lower than specified in Blade properties dialog.

After changing the blade thickness on leading or Adjust the inner control points
trailing edge in the Blade properties 453 dialog,
the thickness of the blade at the inner control
points is unaffected. It could happen that the
thickness on leading and trailing edge is higher
than in the middle of the blade.

7.3.3.1 Additional views

The following information

can be displayed in the
blade profile dialog using
the "Additional views"
button:

Informational values

The Info panel represents information of the designed blade profile:

Throat area
Smallest cross section between 2 neighboring blades

Throat distance spanwise

Throat distance: smallest distance between 2 neighboring blades at every span
LE Throat distance: smallest distance between 2 neighboring blades at every span at leading
edge
TE Throat distance: smallest distance between 2 neighboring blades at every span at trailing
edge

Actual thickness
Actual orthogonal blade thickness values of hub and shroud profiles at leading edge, at trailing
edge, after 1/3 and after 2/3 of the blade length
If the cells are colored red, then the thickness on leading/trailing edge is differing from the
Target thickness.

Target thickness
Orthogonal blade thickness values for hub and shroud profiles at leading edge and at trailing
edge as defined in the Blade properties 453 dialog.
Please note that the blade thickness on leading and trailing edge should be modified in the
Blade properties 453 dialog only. In this case the blade angle calculation should be updated due
to the blade blockage.3D-Preview

3D model 259 of the currently designed blades as

well as surfaces of hub and shroud and mean
surfaces.

Frontal view

The Frontal view represents the designed

profiles in a frontal view, including
diameters dH and d2.

Furthermore, the smallest cross section

between 2 neighboring profiles is
displayed.

Blade passage area

Area that is approximately perpendicularly flown through and formed by hub, shroud and two
neighboring blades.

Blade to blade

Two neighboring blades in m-t-co-ordinates. In the display options the appearance of the
following features can be toggled on/off:

· hub and shroud profiles,

· hub and shroud meanlines,
· throat distance: shortest distance between the blades at hub and shroud,
· LE&TE throat distance: shortest distance between the blades at leading and trailing edge of hub
and shroud.

Profile distance

[axial machines only]

Distance of two neighboring blades in m-t-co-ordinates. For axial machines with a coaxial meridian
this gives a good impression of the de facto distance distribution.

Blade surface values

See blade surface values 522 .

Blade profile

Undistorted profiles in relative or absolute co-ordinates. In display options the span to be

displayed can be selected.

Meridional thickness

Thickness of blade in z-r-co-ordinates. In display options the definition of thickness can be

switched.

7.3.4 Blade edges

IMPELLER | Blade edge

The previously designed blade has a blunt leading and trailing edge (connection line between
endpoints of suction and pressure side).

The blade edges are designed by specifying its thickness distribution. The representation of the
blade thickness s is made on 15% of the straight blade length l on leading and trailing edge.

If the complete thickness distribution including leading or trailing edge was already designed in the
Blade profile 533 dialog, then the Edge position 550 (transition from blade edge to blade
suction/pressure side) has to be defined only.

There are two different options to design the edge shape from hub to shroud/ tip (except for the
"Simple" design mode):

§ Linear
Blade edges at hub and shroud/ tip can be designed independently, while the intermediate
spans are interpolated linearly.

§ Uniform
Only the edges at hub can be designed. All spans use identical parameters.

In panel Design mode the blade edge shape can be selected:

(1) Simple

The blade edge has a blunt end. A straight line is calculated from the endpoint of suction side
perpendicular to the mean line.
Cutoff on meridional leading/trailing edge effects cutting the blade on the corresponding
meridional surface.

(2) Linear

The blade thickness is changing linear, with an elliptic rounding at the end.

The edge is defined by the overall length L, the radius of the end rounding R and the axis ratio R/R2
of the end rounding.
Furthermore an asymmetry A can be specified.

(3) Ellipse

The blade edge is rounded elliptically.

The axis ratio R/R2 can be defined. One axis runs on the mean line, the other perpendicular.

(4) Bezier

For this purpose 4th order Bezier curves are used.

Points 0 and 4 representing the transition between the blade sides and the rounded blade edge. You
can move these points only along the corresponding blade side. Bezier points 1 and 3 can only be
moved on straight lines which correspond to the gradient of the curve in points 0 or 4, respectively in
order to guarantee smooth transition from the contour to the blade edge. Bezier point 2 is not
restricted to move - it has the most influence to the shape of the blade edge. Its horizontal position is
calculated automatically in such way that the leading edge starts at position l=0 and the trailing edge

ends at position l=blade length. The blade edges are designed at the first or last 10% of the blade
length.

Axis-Symmetric results in symmetric geometry, i.e. points 0/4 and 1/3 have the same horizontal
position and point 2 is on the middle line.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Blades exceed meridional boundaries due to specified blade edge geometry.

Check meridional leading and trailing edge position.

The warning indicates that some parts of the Dependent upon the location of these areas
blade leading edge are outside the meridional one has to modify leading or trailing edge.
dimensions of the component.
If the leading edge (or the trailing edge of
turbines) exceeds the meridional boundaries
you can adjust it in the Meridional contour 423
dialog only.

Exceeding trailing edge (or leading edge of

turbines) can be corrected by trim on
in/outlet.

The orthogonal application of thickness on the

mean lines can result in some blade position
outside the meridional boundaries. Therefore, the
model finishing 590 option 'solid trimming' will not
be available.

It is impossible to trim blade at leading/trailing edge.

The resulting blade has to be trimmed on the Meridional contour 423 , Mean line 495 :
meridional leading and trailing edge. In special The angle between the mean line and the
situations this trim operation is not possible for meridional leading/ trailing edge should be high.
geometric reasons.
Blade profile 533 : Reduce blade thickness.

Problem Possible solutions

Error when extrapolating Blade to reach Hub/Shroud surface.

Check meridional geometry, blade angles and thickness.

The orthogonal blade thickness is added to the Meridional contour 423 : Account for blade
blade mean line to create the blade sides. Then thickness during leading edge positioning or
one blade side will be trimmed on hub/ shroud, align leading edge towards the direction of the
the other one will be extrapolated to hub/ shroud shroud normal (see images below).
surface.
The trimming/ extrapolation of blade and hub/
For the below illustrated configurations of shroud will be successful depending on blade
meridional contour and blade geometry the angles and blade thickness. A solution can be
extrapolation fails. the modification of the leading edge by
repositioning and changing its angle relative to
the shroud.

Blade properties 453 : Increase the number of

spans.

Blade profile 533 : Reduce blade thickness or

change thickness definition to "Perpendicular
to mean line".

Mean line 495 : Check mean line shape and

keep lean angle on a low level.

Problem Possible solutions

Distance between blade and hub is higher than the critical value.

The ratio (distance from blade to hub) / (average Try to make lean-angle smaller and/ or
diameter) is higher than the critical value. decrease thickness.

This could result in trimming 590 issues later on.

Impossible blade edge design: overlapping leading and trailing edge blade.

Overlapping of Leading and trailing edge, Reduce the edge positions of one or both
impossible to design pressure and suction side. edges.

Problem Possible solutions

7.3.4.1 Additional views

The following information

can be displayed in the
blade edges dialog using
the "Additional views"
button:

Informational values

The Info panel represents information of the designed blade profile:

Throat area
Smallest cross section between 2 neighboring blades

Throat distance spanwise

3D-Preview

3D model 259 of the currently designed blades as well as

surfaces of hub and shroud and mean surfaces.

Frontal view

The Frontal view represents the designed blades in

a frontal view, including diameters dH und d2.

Furthermore the smallest cross section between 2

neighboring blades is displayed.

Blade passage area

Area that is approximately perpendicularly flown through and formed by hub, shroud and two
neighboring blades.

Blade to blade

Two neighboring blades in m-t-co-ordinates. In the display options the appearance of the
following features can be toggled on/off:

· hub and shroud profiles,

· hub and shroud meanlines,

· throat distance: shortest distance between the blades at hub and shroud,
· LE&TE throat distance: shortest distance between the blades at leading and trailing edge of hub
and shroud.

Profile distance

[axial machines only]

Distance of two neighboring blades in m-t-co-ordinates. For axial machines with a coaxial meridian
this gives a good impression of the de facto distance distribution.

Blade surface values

See blade surface values 522 .

7.3.4.2 Edge position

In panel Edge split the transition from the blade edge to the suction/pressure side can be defined.

Position in % of the straight blade length.

The leading edge should be within the range of 0% to

15%, the trailing edge between 85% and 100%.

7.4 Airfoil/ Hydrofoil design

The design of the blade's geometry is made in three steps in this design mode:

(1) Blade properties 552

(2) Blade profiles 574

(3) Blade sweeping 577

7.4.1 Blade properties

IMPELLER | Blade properties

Definition of blade properties is made in three steps:

(1) Spans 558

(2) Cu, cm specification 559

(3) Blade profile selection 562

(4) Kinematics 567

Absolute and relative flow

Absolute velocity

Relative velocity

Rotational speed

Fundamental kinematic equation

of Turbomachinery

Velocity triangles

Radial impeller Axial impeller

Specification of number of blades

Information

In the right panel some information are displayed which result from calculated or determined values:

(1) Velocity triangles

The velocity triangles of inflow and outflow are displayed.

Continuous lines represent flow velocities on hub (blue) and

shroud (green).

Velocities directly before and behind blade area are displayed

by dashed lines to show the influence of blockage in the flow
domain.

Furthermore the blade angles are displayed by thick lines in

order to see the incidence angle on the leading edge and the
flow deviation caused by slip velocity on trailing edge.

(2) Values

Numerical values of velocity components and flow angles are

displayed in a table. The track bar on top of table can be
used to get the values at any span. A short description is at
mouse cursor too:

z Axial co-ordinate
d Diameter
F Angle of absolute flow to circumferential direction
F Angle of relative flow to circumferential direction
u Circumferential velocity
cm Meridional velocity (c m =wm )
cu Circumferential component of absolute velocity
cr Radial component of absolute velocity
c ax Axial component of absolute velocity
c Absolute velocity
wu Circumferential component of relative velocity: wu+c u=u
w Relative velocity
t Obstruction by blades (see below)
i Incidence angle: i = B1 - 1
Deviation angle: = B2
- 2
w2/w1 Deceleration ratio of relative velocity
F Absolute deflection angle
F Relative deflection angle
B Blade deflection angle
Slip coefficient
(cu·r) Swirl difference
M Torque
pt Pressure difference (total-total)

(3) Curves

Here blade angles as well as relative flow angles are

displayed versus span.

Progressions of geometric parameters (angles):

1/2 Angle of relative flow to circumferential direction

B1/2 Blade angles at leading and trailing edge

(4) Criteria

Progressions of aerodynamic and airfoil parameters:

Re Reynolds-number
l/t solidity
DH DeHaller critierion
ST Strscheletzky critierion
DF01 diffusion number

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Automated blade angles are active.

Values may adapt to changing input parameters.

Stagger angles and chord length are updated To fix stagger angles and chord length uncheck
automatically when input parameters are "Automatic" calculation. Then calculation must
modified. started manually if required.

Automated blade angles are NOT active.

Values are fixed but may not reflect input parameters.

Stagger angles and chord length are not updated To be sure that all parameter modifications are
automatically if any input parameters are considered you could switch to an automatic
modified. calculation by checking the "Automatic" option.

Swirl gradient violates Euler equation.

Check blade angles and velocity triangles.

c u2*r2 is lower than c u1*r1 (turbines: c u2*r2 is Recalculate and/or check stagger angles and
higher than c u1*r1) resulting in energy chord length l, check cu-cm-specification 559or
chosen profiles 562 .
transmission in the wrong direction (Euler
equation of turbomachinery).

(leading/trailing edge) = ... is larger than warning level of ...

(span) = ... is larger than warning level of ...

Blade angles cannot be determined. Thermodynamic state could not be calculated.

Check main dimensions, meridional shape or global setup.

[ for compressors and turbines only ]

Problem Possible solutions

7.4.1.1 Spans

Impeller | Blade properties

On page Spans number of span and their distribution are defined.

7.4.1.2 cu, cm

Impeller | Blade properties

[ Axial machines only ]

On tabsheet cu, cm the velocity triangles at every span can be defined in accordance to the radial
equilibrium 561 .

It can be chosen from 3 different modes concerning the manipulation of c u2(r):

Variable load Free vortex Variable load rel. to free

vortex

The c u2(r)-specification is c u2(r) is defined to get the The slope is the derivative
controlled by a second order same swirl at every span: according to:
Bezier curve.

With a slope of zero a free vortex

distribution is set.

Please note: There is not always a solution of the differential equation of the radial equilibrium.
Therefore some Bezier point constellations are not possible.

At the second tab of the diagram the distribution of the corresponding degree of reaction is
displayed: R = hstat / htot

7.4.1.2.1 Radial equilibrium

Basis of this is the balance of pressure and centrifugal forces under the following assumptions:

· the flow is rotationally symmetric

· friction is neglected

· the streamlines are axis-parallel and have no inclination

The radial balance equation is given here for a section behind an impeller [pump, compressor, fan]
and before a rotor [axial turbine] respectively:

The definition of total pressure in section 2 differentiated with respect to r plus above equation yield:

With the blade work according to Euler the equation becomes:

From the velocity triangles the degree of reaction can be determined by the following equation:

7.4.1.3 Blade profiles

Impeller | Blade properties

[ Axial machines only ]

On tabsheet Profile selection the axial blade profile properties are specified. To this end the profiles
have to be selected from the Profile manager 244 .

Profile specification on 1 span position is

necessary at least to use the same profile on all
spans.

Alternatively on any other span position deviating

profiles can be selected resulting in interpolation
between different profiles.

Profile selection per span can be activated by

selecting the check-box at the beginning of each
line.

In general, two alternative methods for airfoil design are available:

1. Blade element momentum method

Here either NACA 4 digit or point based profiles can be used. Also an angle of attack has to be
specified, see blade element momentum method 570 .

2. Lieblein method

Here only profiles of the NACA 65 series can be used. A solidity l/t has to be specified that has to be
between 0.4 and 2.0 on all spans. It is used for the calculation of the skeleton length and stagger
angle, see Lieblein method 572 .

3. Simple method

Here either NACA 4 digit or point based profiles can be used. A solidity l/t has to be specified, see
simple method 574 .

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Profile is not reasonable.

Geometric description or polar data not NACA 4 digit or Point-based: Polar data must
reasonable. have more than one pair of (cl, and see
Profile manager 244 .

Point-based: the mid of upper and lower side

must start at (0, 0) and end at (1, 0) resp.

NACA 65 series: Thickness value count must be

bigger than one.

Circular: must have more than 2 data points (x,

y).

7.4.1.4 Kinematics

Impeller | Blade properties

[ Axial machines only ]

The following parameters together with the chosen profile 562 describe the blade at each span:

stagger angle
l chord length
camber angle (Lieblein method 572 )

Three methods are available for the determination of the scaling (solidity) and staggering of the
profiles:

· Blade element momentum method 570 [pumps and fans]

for low pressure applications (high specific speed nq)

· Lieblein method 572 [pumps, fans, compressors]

for high pressure applications (low specific speed nq)

· Simple method 574 [pumps, fans, compressors, turbines]

for any applications

On the tabsheet Profile properties the stagger angles and solidity are calculated.

Sweep correction Sweep correction is used when the profile properties

are calculated. A sweep correction < 1 means that
stagger angle and chord length are overestimated to
compensate for losses introduced by blade
sweeping 577 .

Efficiency values that are relevant for the profile

properties calculation are displayed for information as
hint.

Limitations

The design methods are valid only within certain scopes:

The deceleration should no be smaller than the DeHaller 683 criterion:

w2
 0.6..0.75
w1 hub
.

In a pipe flow having a swirl a dead water zone is built at small radii. Strscheletzky and Marcinowski
stated that the diameter of such a dead water zone should be smaller than the hub diameter of an
impeller. From this they derived the following criteria for single stage machines:

c m2
 0.8
c u2 hub
,
and for multi stage machines:
c m2
1
c u2 hub
.

From boundary layer analysis the diffusion number applied for profiles with a maximum thickness of
10% was derived:
 w 2  1 t w
DF0.1  1    
 w 1  2 l w 1
.
Special NACA-measurements yield a scope to be fulfilled of DF0.1 0.6.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Automated blade angles/ stagger angles/ camber angles/ chord lengths are active.
Values may adapt to changing input parameters.

Problem Possible solutions

The values are updated automatically when input To fix the values uncheck "Automatic"
parameters are modified. calculation. Then one must manually start the
calculation if required.

Automated blade angles/ stagger angles/ camber angles/ chord lengths are NOT active.
Values are fixed, but may not reflect input parameters.

The values are not updated automatically when To be sure that all parameter modifications are
input parameters are modified. considered one shall switch to an automatic
calculation by checking the "Automatic" option.

The blade sweep yields a sweep correction factor of x and is different from the value
currently set in blade properties (y).

See warning. Set according to value given in blade

sweep 577 .

Radial equilibrium calculation failed.

There is not for all constellations a solution of Try to change Bezier-points of cu-curve 559 in
the radial equilibrium 561 . case of variable load or switch to free vortex.

Automatic mode may fail or may result in unreasonable blade angles due to failed radial
equilibrium calculation.

In case of failed radial equilibrium 559 calculation Try to change Bezier-points of cu-curve 559 in
the velocity triangles are not correctly case of variable load or switch to free vortex.
determined and cannot be used for setting the Alternatively, uncheck "Automatic" and set
blade angles or stagger angles + chord length. blade angles or stagger angles + chord length
manually.

7.4.1.4.1 Blade element momentum method

This method makes use of the behavior of a single airfoil in an infinite room, i.e. the airfoil is not
influenced by other airfoils. This is true if the solidity l/t is smaller than one.

The design described here is based on the relation between aerodynamic or hydrodynamic profile
data and design parameter cast into the Euler equation.

The circumferential force Fu based on the profile properties reads as:

Fu  sin    F
w 2
 sin    c L     l  b with F  FL
2 ,

whereas if it is derived from the force balance it reads as:

Fu  m
  c  c 
u2 u2

YImp
   cm  t  b 
u .

By equalizing both force descriptions one gets the following equation, which co-relates the profile
properties lift coefficient c L and solidity l/t with the design point data (Y, n, m):

w 2 l YImp
sin    c L    cm 
2 t u .

The meaning of the variables is given in the following table:

YImp specific work of the impeller
l/t solidity (chord length/pitch)
b width of the profile
cu absolute circumferential velocity component
cm absolute meridional velocity component
average rel. flow angle
w average rel. velocity
cL lift coefficient
angle of attack
angle between resulting force and lift force

7.4.1.4.2 Lieblein method

This method shall be used when the pressure difference to be generated is comparably high and
demands for a high solidity, i.e. a high number of blades. In this case the aerodynamic behavior of
each individual blade cannot be determined by investigations on an single blade but is dependent on
the whole blade cascade.

Lieblein 683 carried out systematic wind tunnel investigations on the swirl change properties of the
profiles of the NACA 65 series. The meaning of the used entities is given in the following table

stagger angle
l/t solidity (chord length/pitch)
Angle of relative flow
B
Blade angle (of the equivalent circular skeleton line)
camber angle
u circumferential velocity
w Relative velocity
i Incidence angle: i = B1 - 1
Deviation angle: = B1
- 2

Three limitations apply for this approach:

· The maximum relative thickness must be d/l < 0.1.

· The Reynolds-Number must be Rel > 2·105.

· The solidity l/t must be on all spans: 0.4 l/t 2.0.

Lieblein derived design diagrams for the following parameter

· Incidence i

· Deviation

The basic approach is as follows: with the specified solidity the skeleton length is calculated. With
the relative flow angle 1 (from cu-specification 559 ) and the solidity l/t the incidence is determined
using Lieblein's design diagrams. The same is done with respect to the deviation. Now the the blade
angles at leading and trailing edge are known. Note: The blade angles are applied to the equivalent
circular skeleton line with the radius:
l
req 
B2  B1
2  sin
2 .
From the blade angles the stagger angle can be determined by:

.
The dimensionless skeleton line used for the generation of the NACA 65 series profile is described
by the following equation:

y sl c  x  x  x  x 
  fl  1    ln  1    ln   
l 4   l  l  l  l 
,
with c f l the theoretical lift coefficient:

2 
c fl  tan  
ln 2  4
.
Since this skeleton line is perpendicular at the very beginning (LE) and end (TE) to the chord line,
blade angles at these locations derived be tangent angles are not reasonable. This is the reason for
applying the equivalent circular skeleton line for the determination of B1 and B2.

7.4.1.4.3 Simple method

The simple method is based an a solidity to be specified and on relative flow angles at leading and
trailing edge ( 1 and 2). These angles will be estimated in the automatic mode or on request (by
pressing calculate) based on zero incidence and deviation as well as on the Euler equation ( 2). The
geometric profile parameters stagger angle and chord length l will be determined by:

= 0.5 ( 1
+ ),
2

l = l/t * ·d/z.

For the meaning of the used entities see table in: Lieblein method 572 .

7.4.2 Blade profile

IMPELLER | Blade profiles

To create 3D blade profiles the specified or calculated values from the Blade properties 552 are used:

· Profile shape based on profile selection 562

· Chord length (scaling) and Stagger angle (rotation) of each profile at the respective span
position based on profile properties 567

The resulting 2D profiles are displayed top left in the dialog whereas the thickness distribution at
each span location can be found below.

Profile

The previously selected blade Two modi are available. The

profile names are displayed for thickness value is applied for
information as hint. those spans at which NACA
profiles are specified (not
For NACA 4 Digit, NACA 65 interpolated), see blade
series and Point-based profiles properties 156 .
the trailing edge thickness can
be adapted for manufacturing Relative Absolute
reasons. The additional thickness
is added linearly over the length Thickness is Thickness is
of the profile. chord length equal the
times relative absolute
thickness thickness

For NACA 4 Digit, NACA 65 The trailing edge thickness is

series and Point-based profiles used with the ellipse ratio to
the trailing edge shape can be determine the trailing edge
elliptic. shape.

Radial 2D blade shape

Radial 2D blades can be designed by using a constant stagger angle of a selected master span
profile.

Please note: By applying the radial 2D blade shape the aerodynamic properties of the resulting
blade will be different from those stated in the Blade properties 552 .

Edge split

The edge split position defines the transition from blade suction/ pressure side to the leading edge.
It's used for the 3D model generation as well as for the data export.

Additional views

The following information can be displayed using the "Additional views" button:

· 3D-Preview: 3D blade shape after the 2D blade profiles were projected into its span surface as
well as surfaces of hub and shroud and mean surfaces.

· Informational values:
- Resulting blade angles at leading (bB1) and trailing edge (bB2)
- Wrap angle and blade overlapping B

7.4.3 Blade sweep

IMPELLER | Blade sweep

In this design step the blade sweep can be optionally specified. Blade sweep is normally only useful
for acoustic reasons and comes at the cost of slightly reduced efficiency.

In default configuration this design step does not generate any sweep by aligning the centroid points
of all profiles exactly in radial direction. You can return to an unswept configuration at any time by
using the Reset sweep curve option.

The left area of the dialog is comprised of four diagrams that display the current blade sweep
definition, represented in several projections. Depending on the Sweep mode (see below) selected,
only two of these diagrams are active at a time, whereas the other two diagrams are merely
informative.

The design curves (orange) in active diagrams exhibit control points which are movable along design
guide lines (gray) which subdivide the radial space between Hub (blue) and Shroud (green).

The user designed sweep projections are combined into the 3D sweep curve which is then applied to
the blade geometry by stacking the blade profiles along it. The informative sweep projections are
updated accordingly.

Independently of Sweep mode the blade positioning in the meridional contour can be controlled in
the axial projection diagram (top left). Blade positioning can be controlled via a special control point
at the base of the sweep curve, which can be moved along the Hub contour and that moves the blade
geometry along with it. Design configurations where the Blade exceeds the meridional boundary have
to be corrected by adjusting the blade position in order to finish this design step successfully.

The following information can be displayed using the "Additional views" button:

· Informational values: Any sweeping will yield a certain deterioration of the aerodynamic
performance compared with the unswept state. The sweep correction is a quantitative
expression of this and is based on an empirical co-relation. To compensate for the sweeping
losses the sweep correction will be applied when profile properties 567 are newly calculated.

· 3D-Preview: The final result of the sweep design process, the swept 3D blade shape as well
as surfaces of hub and shroud and mean surfaces

· Acoustic benefit: ...compared to the unswept blade design

 10  lg
cos  dB
4
LW  0
 LW  0

Sweep mode

The Sweep mode controls which of the 2D Sweep projections define the blade sweep and are
modifiable by the user.

For defining a blade sweep two alternative options are available:

· Axial z + Tangential t
Sweep projected in meridional and axis-normal view.
This view also shows the blade outline.

· Sweep + Dihedral (default)

Incidence not perpendicular to blade axis, blade area nevertheless in flow direction
Blade plane not perpendicular on hub, defines V-positioning

Profile stack mode

The profile stack mode controls how 2D-Profiles are stacked relative to profile geometry onto the 3D-
sweep curve. This Design choice will subsequently also be reflected in the display of profiles in the
previous Blade profile 574 dialog.

The blade sweep for each sweep mode can be defined on one of the following blade profile positions:

· leading edge

· centroids (default)

· trailing edge

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

The air/hydrofoil blade is not located within the predefined blade area. Either extend the
meridional blade area or reposition the blade.

The axially projected chord length is higher than Increase the meridional extension or/and the
the meridional length or the predefined blade predefined blade area (meridional contour 423 ) or
area. adjust chord length and stagger angle (blade
properties 562 ) or change the blade position.

7.5 CFD setup

IMPELLER | CFD setup

Extension, RSI connection

Description can be found in the topic Virtual geometry 582 .

Blade projection

Blade projection can be used for meshing purposes.

In case of an unshrouded impeller the

outer blade profile is projected onto
the casing.

If an Extension 585 exists, the blade

trailing edge is projected onto the
Rotor-Stator-Interface (RSI).

7.5.1 Virtual geometry

The designed geometry can be extended by virtual elements for a simplified flow simulation (CFD).

· Extension 585

· RSI connection 587

Virtual vs. real geometry

Real and virtual geometry can coexist in the project, but can be visualized in the 3D-View and
exported separately.

The real geometry represents the real design including the secondary flow path geometry for the
impeller. If the model does not contain any secondary flow path, the real impeller geometry
corresponds to the isolated impeller.

Virtual geometry represents the combination of designed geometry (without secondary flow path)
and virtual elements (CFD extension 585 or RSI connection 587 ) activated on impeller side.

The virtual geometry has 2 objectives:

1) Simplification of the flow domain by neglecting the secondary flow path to accelerate CFD
simulation.
Of course, deviations from the real flow behavior of the machine occur, but a qualitative
comparison of different geometries is usually still possible.

2) Closing the necessary gap between the rotating impeller and adjacent static components.

Please note: In the 3D model, the extension is part of the impeller solid "Flow domain (virtual)".
The rotor-stator-interface (RSI) is the border to the neighboring component. On the other side, the
RSI connection 587 is part of the neighboring component solid "Flow domain (virtual)".

3D model

In the 3D model, both geometries can be displayed independently using the proper tree nodes or
selecting the corresponding model state:

7.5.1.1 Extension

The designed geometry can be extended in meridional direction at the outlet. This extension defines
the Rotor-Stator-Interface (RSI). It is only used for CFD purposes and its position is not taken into
account by neighboring components. Typically, the RSI is located in the middle of the rotating and
the non-rotating component.

Using the extension is recommended, because otherwise the trailing edges of the blades would just
lie on the rotor-stator interface, which can cause both meshing problems and numerical simulation
errors. Meshing problems could occur especially for small values of the blade angle ß B2.

The designed extension is

displayed in the diagram in olive
color.

The drop down menu Direction sets the direction of the extension. If it is set to tangential, hub and
shroud will be tangentially extended. If it's set to connected, the extension will match the next
component inlet.

Below you can specify the Length of the extension and whether the length should be measured
radial or absolute (i.e. in the direction specified above).
Furthermore, you can set Extension outlet at r = constant or Extension outlet at z = constant,
which means that the outlet of the extension is forced to be horizontal (parallel to the z-axis) or
vertical (parallel to the r-axis).

Limitations

The extension is not available for stators. For CFD simulation of vaned stators, some space after the
trailing edge might be needed. This can be achieved by unchecking the Trailing edge fixed on
outlet 441 checkbox in the meridional contour dialog.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Length of extension is smaller than the model tolerance.

This is problematic for "Flow domain" creation during model finishing.

The length of the extension is smaller or equal If geometrical problems occur, change the
to the distance tolerance 588 . This might cause distance tolerance or the length of the
geometrical defects when sewing faces during extension.
Model finishing 590 .

Problem Possible solutions

Extension outlet has nearly constant radius. Selecting "Extension outlet at r = constant" is
recommended.

The endpoints of the hub and shroud extension Set the endpoints of the hub and shroud
have a slightly different radius. This can result extension to the same radius by checking the
in almost flat cone surfaces for the adjacent "Extension outlet at r = constant" checkbox.
RSI connection, which may be problematic to
import into other CAD/CFD systems.

Extension outlet is nearly vertical. Selecting "Extension outlet at z = constant" is

recommended.

The endpoints of the hub and shroud extension Set the endpoints of the hub and shroud
have a slightly different z-coordinate. This can extension to the same z-coordinate by
result in almost flat cone surfaces for the checking the "Extension outlet at z = constant"
adjacent RSI connection, which may be checkbox.
problematic to import into other CAD/CFD
systems.

Extension is overlapping neighboring component.

The interface defined by hub and shroud Reduce extension length or increase gap
extension overlaps neighboring component. between impeller and static neighboring
component.

Extension is not well defined.

Under certain circumstances it is possible that Check configuration of extension regarding:

geometric interface and CFD-interface
(extension) are misaligned. · intersection

· matching

· inversion (negative extension)

See diagram for its visual representation.

7.5.1.2 RSI connection

The RSI connection is intended to close the gap between the impeller and the neighboring static
component. It provides a simplified, closed volume model for flow simulation neglecting impeller
secondary flow path or other casing parts. The RSI connection is added to static components
located downstream or upstream to an impeller.

The designed RSI connection is

displayed in the diagram in orange
color.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

RSI connection at Inlet/ Outlet cannot be generated.

RSI connection can be generated only if a gap Disable RSI connection or perform corrections at
between components exists. neighbouring component interface if necessary.

7.6 Model settings

IMPELLER | Model settings

On dialog Model settings you can specify how many data points are to be used for the 3D model
and for the point based export formats.

The number of points can be set for both cases separately for all geometry parts.

§ Meridian: hub/shroud
§ Blade: mean line, pressure/suction side, leading/trailing edge

3D Model

Distance tolerance
The distance tolerance defines the maximum allowed distance
between sewed surfaces, e.g the faces of a solid.

If it is too small, the solids cannot be created.

If it is too big, small faces are ignored when creating a solid.

Point Export

Presetting

Select from 3 global presets.

When a new impeller is created the model settings of the last opened impeller are carried over.

7.7 Model finishing

IMPELLER | Model finishing

Model finishing is used for geometry post-processing of the 3D-geometry created in prior design
steps:

Blade fillets Fillet creation at join of blade and hub/shroud. [Impellers, Stators]

Extended blade Extended blade solid geometry. [Impellers, Stators]

Trimming Trimming 596 of impeller geometry. [Impellers]

Geometry processing

Blade fillets The edges between blade and hub/shroud can be rounded.

The fillet affects only the solid geometry of Flow domain and Material
domain.
The fillet radius should not be larger than the recommended value.

Limitations

Fillet creation is not

possible if the fillets of two
neighboring blades would
intersect or if the fillet would
protrude beyond the
impeller inlet or outlet.

Fillet creation is not

possible if the blade has
very sharp edges, i.e. if the
fillet radius is much larger
than the edge radius.

Solid geometry Solid geometry is created by sewing and intersecting initial surfaces.
Related operations can be time-consuming depending on the
· Flow domain, Flow hardware processing power.
domain (virtual)
Details:
· Material domain

· Blade · Extension geometry is integrated into the component's Flow

585

domain (virtual) solid geometry

· RSI connection geometry is integrated into the related adjacent

587

component's Flow domain (virtual) solid geometry

· hub and shroud material geometry is sewed with blade

445

geometry resulting in Material domain solid geometry

· Blade projection 581 geometry is intersected with Flow domain solid

geometry
Flow dom ain
As a result, the Flow domain and optional Material domain are created
for both, 360° model (Full 360°) and a rotational symmetric segment
around a single blade (Segment).

Solid geometry is not available in point-based exports.

Material dom ain

Extended blade solid The solid geometry of the blades extended through hub and shroud is
geometry created during the finishing process. Additionally, blade is extended
through leading/trailing edge, if it is fixed 441 as well as trimmed 541 at
inlet/outlet.

It can be used for custom intersection in an external CAD-system.

The "Blade solid (extended)" is part of the 3D model tree and can be
exported by right-click.

Update modes

· <OK> The configuration is saved in the project, but the 3D-model is not updated.

· <OK + Run> The configuration is saved in the project and the 3D-model is updated using the
model finishing options.

The model finishing can be executed globally for all vaned components by PROJECT/ Model
finishing 208 .

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Solid generation is not available. Blades exceed the meridional boundaries.

Blade geometry is outside the primary Change position or shape of related blade edge
meridional path. Solid geometry for flow domain (link 545 ).
and material domain is not supported in this
configuration.

Solid generation is not available. Both blade edges are fixed at inlet/outlet.

Blade edges at both inlet and outlet would divide Change position of either leading edge or trailing
flow domain geometry into multiple solid bodies, edge (link 439 ).
which is not supported.

Solid generation may fail due to meridional contour.

Segment: Generation of segment may fail due to meridional contour.

Set a value for hub diameter higher than zero or

round the hub contour to avoid a geometry with
needle form.

The angle between rotation axis and hub contour

is too small (lower than 0.1 degree).

Problem Possible solutions

Solid generation may fail due to tangential difference between hub and shroud at
leading/trailing edge, or low number of spans.

Very low number of spans Increase the number of spans 479 up to at least
4

Fillets not supported.

Fillets are not supported if generation of solid -

geometry is not possible.

Fillets creation on shroud deactivated.

Fillets on shroud are not supported for -

unshrouded designs.

Problem Possible solutions

Curvature of Leading edge/Trailing edge/Blade edges at Hub/Shroud could be too large

for fillet creation.

Sharp Blade edges could prohibit fillet creation Less sharp design of blade edges or
between blade and hub/shroud and could cause reduction/deactivation of fillet radius.
long computation time respectively.

3D-Error: Finishing failed!

Inlet (nearly) tangential to hub or shroud Change Meridional contour 423 : Avoid
tangentiality

3D-Error: Finishing failed! (Could not extend blade)

Extending the blade to a scaled Hub/ Shroud See solution of Error while extrapolating Blade to
surface failed. reach Hub/ Shroud surface 546

3D-Error: Finishing failed! (Could not intersect solids of Blades and Flow domain)

Intersecting a single blade with Flow domain Try using a different number of data points 588

failed.

3D-Error: Finishing failed! (Could not create fillet)

Fillet creation at blade root failed (see Decrease fillet radius

limitations) 591 . or
Deactivate fillet

3D-Error: Finishing failed! (Creating trimmed segment)

Cutting a segment from Flow domain failed. This Reduce bending at high curvature regions of hub-
can occur due to heavy bendings of hub or or shroud-contours.
shroud.

3D-Error: Finishing failed! (Fusing solids)

Fusing of real geometry with CFD setup Increase the number of spans 479
components (Extension or RSI connection) or
failed. Remove Extension / RSI connection from CFD
setup 580

Problem Possible solutions

3D-Error: Finishing failed! (Creating new Flow domain from segment)

Creating a new Flow domain from Segment Decrease blade fillet radius.
failed.

3D-Error: Finishing failed! (Creating Material domain from Flow domain)

Creating a Material domain failed. Deactivate hub and shroud materials 445

3D-Error: Blade projection to RSI failed!

Projection of blade to RSI (Extension) failed. Change CFD setup 580 : Modify Extension or
remove Blade projection 581

3D-Error: Blade tip projection to casing failed!

Projection of blade to casing (shroud) failed. Change CFD setup 580 : Remove Blade
projection 581 or RSI connection

3D-Error: [Main/Splitter] Blade solid (extended) could not be created!

Extended blade faces may oscillate depending Change the number of spans 479 .
on blade geometry, hence a closed blade solid
could not be created. Change blade geometry.

7.7.1 Trimming

Trimming can be used to derive adjacent impeller designs in order to reduce the energy transmission
and/ or flow rate of an already existing impeller.

The following options are available:

Trim operation Trimming impeller Application

geometry

Inlet trim at inlet Radial inflow turbines only

Outlet trim at outlet Axial and centrifugal impellers except radial inflow turbines

Tip trim at blade tip Unshrouded impellers only

Trim curve definition

The geometry of the trim curve can be defined based on the following criteria:

Energy Straight line resulting from Inlet/Outlet trim for

radial impellers only
· absolute energy or
· relative energy

related to Global setup 108 definition

The reduced impeller diameter d2* can be calculated by

where * is related to the reduced numbers.

The ratio d2* /d2 should not be lower than 0.8 ... 0.85.

Flow Offset curve of blade tip resulting from Tip trim only
· absolute flow or
· relative flow

related to Global setup 108 definition

The reduced impeller width b* can be calculated by

,
where * is related to the reduced numbers.

Geometry Trim curve resulting from Always available

· absolute axial/radial values at hub/shroud for
Inlet/Outlet trim
· absolute width at inlet/outlet for Tip trim
· relative values related to the untrimmed geometry

When activating the option Blades only for Inlet/Outlet trimming the meridional path (incl. material
solids) is not trimmed.

In case of trimming the meridional path virtual geometries 582 are updated accordingly:

Areas in the meridional path where a trim curve cannot be positioned due to internal restrictions are
marked in red:

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Trimming through blade edge not supported.

Trim curve intersects the Leading/Trailing edge. Change position of the trim curve ensuring no
intersection with any blade edge.

Problem Possible solutions

Main blade is trimmed, but Splitter blade is not.

Splitter blade is trimmed, but Main blade is not.

Trim curve does not cut both, main and splitter Change position of the trim curve ensuring both
blade. main and splitter blades are cut by trim curve.

Trim curve is not located inside blade region.

Option "Blades only" is activated, but trim curve Change position of the trim curve ensuring
does not cut any blade. blades are cut by trim curve.

Alternatively, deactivate option "Blades only".

Cutting off both blade edges at interfaces is not supported.

Trimming would produce impeller geometry with Change position of the trim curve ensuring
both Leading and Trailing edge cut off at blades are not cut by trim curve.
inlet/outlet, which is not supported.
Move blade edge 439 not being cut by the trim
curve away from meridional interface.

Alternatively, activate option "Blades only".

VIII
602 CFturbo

8 Stator

Stator

This chapter describes in detail the design process for stator type components
featured in CFturbo.

The content reflects the design steps in the sequence they are encountered
during the design process.

Design steps

¢ Main dimensions 603

¢ Meridional contour 610

¢ Blade properties 611

¢ Blade mean lines 613

¢ Blade profiles 616

¢ Blade edges 617

¢ Model finishing 618

¢ Model settings 618

¢ CFD setup 617

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Neighboring blades are intersecting each other.

(see message) Numerous details of the design influence the

blade shape. Some examples for possible
solutions:

· Modify main dimensions

Problem Possible solutions

· Reduce number of blades

· Reduce blade wrap angle

· Reduce blade thickness

8.1 Main dimensions

STATOR | Main dimensions

The Main Dimensions menu item is used to define main dimensions of the stator.

General

Initial definition of the stator type. Currently the following types are available:

· Free form

· Radial

· Bowl

· Axial

· 90° bend left

· 90° bend right

Using the button "Set default" the default properties for each stator type can be set.

Losses inside the stator component are used to determine the outlet total pressure pt2 displayed in
the informational values of the Outlet 609 . They can be specified by:

· Total loss coefficient

· Total pressure loss

· Isentropic velocity ratio

[compressor and gas

turbine only]

· Isentropic loss
coefficient

[compressor and gas

turbine only]

The material density of the stator is an informational value that is not relevant for the hydraulic or
aerodynamic design but is used for the calculation of geometrical properties. Density values can be
directly entered or selected from a list 415 by pressing the settings button right beside the input
area.

With blades

Here you can define if the stator should be vaned or vaneless.

For vaned stators you have to define the number of blades and the existence of splitter blades.

Via Unshrouded you can decide to design a shrouded or unshrouded stator. For unshrouded stator
you have to define the tip clearance.

Extent/ Inlet/ Outlet

Extent, inlet and outlet are coupled geometry definitions. Two of the three categories must be
explicitly selected and specified, with the remaining one resulting automatically.

¢ Extent 606

¢ Inlet609

¢ Outlet 609

Information

Right in the dialog some additional information are displayed.

· The Meridian preview is based on the until now designed main dimensions and visualizes the
general proportions.

· Information values lists important coefficients, which result from determined main dimensions.
The specific values depend on the selected tab sheet on the left side: Extent 606 , Inlet 609 or
Outlet 609 .
If the font color is blue then a hint for the recommended range of this value is available when the
mouse cursor is on the table row.
If the font color is red then the current value is outside the recommended range.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solution

Hub/ Shroud/ Midline length is zero (invalid geometry).

The extent 606 of the stator is 0 at hub, shroud or Specify a reasonable length value or remove the
midline. stator completely.

Thermodynamic state could not be calculated for given main dimensions.

[ for compressors and turbines only ]

The dimensions might be too tight for the Increase the dimensions (width etc.) or change
specified mass flow and inlet conditions. the Global setup 108 (e.g. decrease mass flow).
If the stator is vaned, its blade angles 611 can be
changed too.

In/outlet cross section ratio is unusual.

Meridional contour should be defined with an appropriate in/outlet width.

8.1.1 Extent

Stator extent has to be considered in relation to its inlet 609 and outlet 609 . These 3 areas are
coupled, i.e. one is inherently defined by the two others.

Extent from inlet to outlet can be defined by 2 alternative possibilities in principle:

1. Center line

· preselection of extension direction:Radial, Axial, Tangential (to outlet of previous component),

Free form

· Definition of axial extension z and radial extension r

or
length L and angle of center line to horizontal direction

· Definition of end cross section (Inlet or Outlet) by width b and angle to horizontal direction

2. Hub, Shroud

separately for hub and shroud:

· preselection of extension direction:Radial, Axial, Const. area (with respect to opposite side),
Tangential (to outlet of previous component), Free form

· Definition of axial extension z and radial extension r

or
length L and angle of hub/shroud to horizontal direction

The angles and are defined by 0° horizontal right and rising in counter clockwise direction
(mathematical positive). A menu with some default angles is supporting angle input:

0°
180°
90°
270°
Perpendicular: perpendicular to inlet or outlet cross section
Parallel: parallel to inlet or outlet cross section

Depending on the type of geometric coupling 67 the extent is defining the inlet or the outlet of the
component. If the stator has the primary side at outlet, the extent will modify the outlet. Otherwise if
the stator has the primary side at inlet, the inlet will be defined by the extent.

If the neighboring components are primary both at

inlet and at outlet then the extent of the stator cannot
be specified because it's clearly defined by its
neighbor.

Information

Design point Design point information, see Global setup 108

General

Diameter ratio

Width ratio

Area ratio

Pressure recovery
coefficient

Isentropic velocity ratio

[compressors and
turbines only]

8.1.2 Inlet

Here the inlet of the stator can be defined.

If the outlet can be modified, it will be updated by addition of extent to inlet. Otherwise the extent will
be adapted.

¢ Details: see geometric coupling 67

[ Compressors and Turbine only ]

Radio buttons are available that allow to define whether the flow in the stator inlet is supposed to be
subsonic or supersonic. This will influence the values displayed in the information panel as well as
the isentropic Mach number 512 distribution.

8.1.3 Outlet

Here the outlet of the stator can be defined.

If the inlet can be modified, then it will be updated by subtraction of extent from outlet. Otherwise the
extent will be adapted.

¢ Details: see geometric coupling 67

[ Compressors and Turbine only ]

Radio buttons are available that allow to define whether the flow in the stator outlet is supposed to be
subsonic or supersonic. This will influence the values displayed in the information panel as well as
the isentropic Mach number 512 distribution.

8.2 Meridional contour

STATOR | Meridional contour

In principle, the same features are available as for the meridional design 423 of impellers.

The endpoints of hub and shroud curves are fixed by main dimensions 603 and cannot be modified
here.

For "Radial" type of stators (see main dimensions 603 ) the following geometrical dimensions are
defined:

8.3 Blade properties

STATOR | Blade properties

In principle, the same features are available as for the blade properties 453 of impellers.

To support the selection of a suitable blade count a separate dialog 612 can be used, which can be
started by pressing the button right beside the edit field.

The outlet angles are input values for most of the blade types according to the desired change of
flow direction. Slip models are not available for stators. Some angle oversizing should be considered
if necessary.

For blade shape "Straight 2D (axial)", a diffuser opening angle is calculated and displayed for
information in accordance to Bohl 681 with:

where a4 and a5 are LE and TE blade passage distance (expressed by equivalent diameters) and
l is the mean line length.

Warnings

Problem Possible solution

A reasonable thermodynamic state could not be calculated.

[ for compressors and turbines only ]

The dimensions might be too tight for the Increase the dimensions (width etc.), change
specified mass flow and inlet conditions. The blade angle or change the Global setup 108 (e.g.
chosen blade angles might also yield this state. decrease mass flow).

Diffuser opening angle bigger than 10°. Flow separation possible.

[ for Straight 2D (axial) only ]

The diffuser opening angle is to big and might Change , s 1, s 2, LE or TE radius (in
BLE
give room for flow separation. meridian)

8.3.1 Number of blades

Number of blades, stator outlet diameter and minimum blade distance are significant for the actual
diffuser part of the stator and therefore have high influence on the flow losses. These 3 parameters
have to be adjusted carefully.

The number of blades of impeller and stator has to be

coordinated carefully in order to minimize pressure
pulsation and therefore mechanical load and noise
emission.

The number of impeller blades is defined and fixed by one

of the impellers in the project, otherwise it's an input value.

The number of stator blades can be modified and should be

one of the recommended ones.

According to the number of blades z different pressure

fields are generated in the impeller and the stator, which
are moving relative to each other and are characterized by
the periodicity p:
· impeller periodicity pI = nI z I
· stator periodicity pII = nII z II
(n = integer multiplier)
The interference of both pressure fields cannot be
calculated exactly. But most important for the resulting
pressure field is the difference of both periodicities:

m  pI  pII  I  zI  II  zII

The following recommendations should be kept:

· m = 0 (impeller and stator blade count have shared integer multipliers) should be avoided in
each case, because high pressure pulsation can be generated here.
· m = 1 should not be allowed in first and second order (nI =1; nI =2) due to unacceptable shaft
vibration, if possible also in third order (nI =3).

· m = 2 as well represents a periodic impeller load, but is acceptable in most cases.

· Vibration modes with m >2 normally don't generate resonance and are allowed therefore.

For each modification of the stator blade count z II the m-values for each combination (nI = 1..3) and
(nII = 1..3) are calculated and displayed in the table. Values m=0 are marked in red color, m=1 in
orange and m=2 in yellow.

The recommended stator blade count according to the current number of impeller blades are
represented below the input field.

8.4 Blade mean lines

STATOR | Blade mean lines

In principle, the same features are available as for the mean lines 495 of impellers.

For special radial diffuser blade shapes "Log. Spiral + Straight 2D" and "Circular + Free-form 2D"
the mean line design is made in the frontal view. The mean lines are the inner vane sides (concave
sides).

Initially the blade thickness is ignored for the mean line design (red/magenta in the sketch). The
opposite side if the flow channel is generated by rotation and adding the blade thickness. The blade
thickness is assumed as linear between sLE and sTE (see blade properties 611 ), if the thickness
distribution was not defined yet. Otherwise the thickness distribution defined in the blade profile 616
design is used. In the later blade profile design the thickness is added to one side of the mean line
only.

Diffuser area has to be designed carefully in order to minimize losses. The quality of the diffuser
design can be verified according to the following criteria (see panel Radial diffuser in Informational
values area). Values outside the recommended range are displayed in red color.

Definition/ recommended
Name Description
range
Throat distance a3 (LE) Throat width at inlet (leading edge)

Optimal value: average of

a3 Optimum * calculation by const. swirl and see blade properties 611

deceleration ratio

Actual value: shortest distance

a3 Actual from vane leading edge to
neighboring vane

Shortest distance from vane

Outlet distance a4
trailing edge to neighboring vane

Diffuser opening angle Allowable diffusion angle

R3,eq
Max. allowable value to avoid flow
max  16.5 
L
Maximum allowable separation depending on
equivalent inlet radius and length a3b3
R3,eq 


Actual value calculated by R3,eq  A 4 

Actual equivalent inlet radius, length, inlet eq    1

L  A3 
and outlet area 

A4
Area ratio AR=A4/A3 Area or deceleration ratio AR 
A3

L 3 4
AR Optimum * Optimal value AR ,opt  1.05  0.184
R3,eq

AR Actual Actual value AR < 3

Pressure recovery of the diffuser p 4  p3

Pressure recovery coeff. cp 
identified by a dimensionless 
cp
coefficient
c 32
2

Pressure recovery in an ideal 1

cp Ideal (loss-free) * cp ,id  1 
(loss-free) diffuser AR2

0.26
Pressure recovery for optimal area L 
cp Optimum * cp ,opt  0.36 34 
ratio AR R 
 3,eq 

Pressure recovery in real diffuser based on test results; plotted in

cp Actual * diagrams; target: c p,act = c p,opt
(with energy losses)

cp cp
D  
Diffuser efficiency * Diffuser efficiency cp ,id 1
1
AR2

c 3q/c 2 = 0.7...0.85 for low

Inlet velocity ratio c3q/c2 Inlet deceleration ratio
specific speed

Non-dimensional length L3-4/a3 = 2.5...6

Ratio of length to throat width
L34/a3

Throat aspect ratio b3/a3 Ratio of inlet width to throat width b3/a3 = 0.8...2

Kinetic energy of diffuser outlet; to c42

Outlet rel. kin. energy * minimize losses in the overflow  0.020.04
channels of multistage machines 2gHopt

Ratio of outlet velocity to inlet

Velocity ratio c4/c1m * velocity of downstream impeller of c 4/c m1 = 0.85...1.25
multistage machines

* for radial diffusers of pumps only

8.5 Blade profiles

STATOR | Blade profile

In principle, the same features are available as for the blade profiles 533 of impellers.

Basic settings

Apply thickness to

Meanline
The blade thickness is added to both (pressure and suction) sides of the mean line.

Pressure side
For the special radial diffuser blade shapes "Log. Spiral + Straight 2D" and "Circular + Free-
form 2D" the blade thickness can be added to one side of the mean line only.
In this case, the "Asymmetry at edges" feature is not available.

Informational values

For radial diffusers the same informational values as in the mean line design 613 are displayed. The
reason is the influence of the blade thickness to these numbers.

8.6 Blade edges

STATOR | Blade edges

In principle, the same features are available as for the blade edges 541 of impellers.

8.7 CFD setup

STATOR | CFD setup

Blade projection 581 can be enabled here.

If a RSI connection 587 was enabled for the impeller, these geometrical parts are added to the virtual
geometry of the stator (see virtual geometry 582 for more information).

8.8 Model settings

STATOR | Model settings

In principle, the same features are available as for the model settings 588 of impellers.

8.9 Model finishing

STATOR | Model finishing

Geometry post-processing of the 3D-geometry created in prior design steps:

see Model finishing 590 of impellers for available feature set

IX
620 CFturbo

9 Volute

Volute

This chapter describes in detail the design process for volute type components
featured in CFturbo.

The content reflects the design steps in the sequence they are encountered
during the design process.

Design steps

¢ Setup + Inlet 620

¢ Cross section 628

¢ Spiral development areas 638

¢ Diffuser 652

¢ Cut-water 661

¢ Wall thickness 673

¢ CFD setup 677

¢ Model settings 678

9.1 Setup + Inlet

VOLUTE | Setup + Inlet

The first design step of the volute is to define the inlet side. It consists of 2 steps:

(1) Setup 621

(2) Inlet details 626

On page Meridian for the right

panel you can find a meridional
preview (z, r) of the designed volute
inlet.

The outlet of the upstream

component is represented
schematically in gray, the interface
position in brown.

Auto fit view results in automatic

scaling of the diagram if geometrical
values are changing.

9.1.1 Setup

On page Setup you can define some general properties used for the spiral design.

Depending on the project type and/ or position in project, different input parameters are required (see
below).

Outlet volute [typical for centrifugal pumps, fans, compressors]

Inlet volute [typical for radial inflow turbines]

General

· Volute type
Single volute (default): This simple type is commonly used and has a single cut-water.
Double volute: A second cut-water (splitter) is designed in order to reduce the radial forces.

· The material density of the volute is an informational value that is not relevant for the hydraulic
or aerodynamic design but is used for the calculation of geometrical properties. Density
values can be directly entered or selected from a list by pressing the settings button right
beside the input area.

Design flow rate

· Volumetric efficiency v
(default: 1.0)
to consider any internal volumetric losses (recirculation)

· Flow factor FQ (default: 1.0)

for over dimensioning, particularly for better efficiency at overload operation

Spiral inlet (outlet for turbines)

· Inlet diameter dIn (d4)

· Inlet width bIn (b4)

· Abs. flow angle 4

(turbines)

· Automatic update from

interface to apply changes
from neighbor components

Please note:

For stand-alone volutes you have to define the inlet interface first, see Inlet Details 626 , instead of
specifying dIn and bIn values.

[for pumps, fans, compressors]

dIn and bIn are suitable to the previous component outlet. If the previous component is an impeller d4
and b4 are determined using the ratios d4/d2 and b4/b2, which are calculated from functions
dependent on the specific speed nq (see Approximation function 226 ).

Clicking on the Set Default button at top recalculates the standard values.

A short distance between the impeller and the cut-water is desirable for reasons of flow. For acoustic
and vibration reasons, however, a certain minimum distance is necessary. The inlet width bIn should
be chosen such that the width/height ratio at the end cross-section of the volute is close to 1. The
ratio b4/b2 can be varied within a relatively wide range without significant negative effect on the
efficiency. For centrifugal impellers with open impeller sides, values up to b4/b2=2 are possible. At
higher specific speeds (wider impellers), however, high width ratios have a negative effect on flow
(intensive secondary flows, turbulence losses). In this case, b4/b2 should be between 1.05 and 1.2.

Values dIn and bIn are coupled to the corresponding interface values 626 .

[for turbines]

dOut and bOut has to be set by the user.

Information

Various calculated values are shown, for information purposes, on the right side (Values):

Calculated internal flow rate Qi Qi  FQ  Q  V

Inlet/Outlet diameter ratio dIn/d2

Inlet/Outlet width ratio bIn/b2

Inlet/Outlet meridional velocity cm

Inlet/Outlet circumferential velocity cu

Inlet/Outlet velocity c

Inlet/Outlet flow angle

[for compressors, turbines]

Static pressure p

Temperature T

Density

Mach Number Ma

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Swirl-free inflow is implausible for volute designs.

The volute is the first component of the project Adapt pre-swirl in the Global setup 108

and the inflow swirl is defined by the Global

setup 108 . With swirl-free inflow a volute
calculation will be impossible.

Thermodynamic state could not be calculated.

Problem Possible solutions

For the chosen configuration of global setup, e.g. reduce the mass flow or increase the cross
precursor component and spiral dimensions a section
reasonable thermodynamic state cannot be
calculated.

Then an automatic velocity based contour

design 638 will not be possible since the
necessary values of c u4 and Qi are not available.

Pressure and temperature not within the liquid phase of the fluid.
Check inlet/outlet condition and geometry.

If the fluid model = CoolProp, fluid properties will Increase dimensions (width, diameter) or change
be calculated as function of pressure and Global setup 108 (e.g., decrease mass flow,
temperature. In case the local pressure and increase pressure, decrease temperature).
temperature are not above the vapor pressure
curve, the fluid state is not valid 236 .

9.1.2 Inlet details

On page Inlet details the details of the inlet interface can be specified.

Details: see Interface Definition 43

Stand-alone volutes

For stand-alone volutes you have to define the inlet interface first (z and r at hub and shroud side),
instead of specifying dIn and bIn values at page Setup 621 .

By using the button you can transfer this interface definition to the geometry. On the right side on
page Meridian you should see the desired inlet geometry now.

Diameter and width ratio

If the upstream component is an impeller then additional edit fields for the diameter ratio d4/d2 and
width ratio b4/b2 are available. Here you can define the inlet diameter and the inlet width using
empirical functions.

Information

Page Values of the right panel contains some information of the design point (Global setup 108 ) and
flow properties on the outlet of upstream component.

9.2 Cross Section

VOLUTE | Cross Section

The shape of the volute cross-sections can be selected here. The general cross section shape is
illustrated whereas the radial extension is assumed.
The sections will be scaled later in the Spiral development areas 638 design step according to the
selected design rule and the required height h.

In general, very small cross-sections width should be avoided. The achievable cross-section shape
strongly depends on manufacturing and the available space.

Sections

The table contains the cross section definitions (at least 1 cross section). Each cross section is
defined by:

· the circumferential position: angle

· (de)activation by selecting the checkbox on the left side (at least 1 cross section has to be
active)
· cross section type on the left side

· optional cross section type on the right side or symmetric

The section definition is running in the range 0° < 360°. The section at is flat always -
therefore a section definition at this position makes no sense.

Between 2 neighboring cross section definitions a smooth transition is realized. If only a single
section is defined then this definition is used for all circumferential positions.

The following cross section types are available:

Rectangular

most simple cross-section shape; cannot be achieved in cast parts; only

sensible for low specific speeds, since otherwise the cross-section
becomes too large

Trapezoid

cannot be achieved in cast parts; the angle d can be specified; results in

a flatter cross-section than a rectangular cross-section, with less intense
secondary flow

Round - symmetric

simple elliptic geometry with a beneficial stress distribution; does not

develop on rotation surfaces

· Ratio of ellipse radii: axis ratio is preserved for developing sections.

(ratio of one gives a circular section)

Round - asymmetric, external

more favorable secondary flow structure than with a symmetrical cross-

section; often with mixed-flow impellers

· Ratio of ellipse radii: axis ratio is preserved for developing sections.

(ratio of one gives a circular section)

· Strictly external: cross sections don't fall below inlet radius

· Open to right: asymmetric development to right (pos. z-direction)

· Square on top: square shape on right top of cross section

Round - asymmetric, internal

limitation of radial extension; ratio of ellipse radii possible;

additional bend necessary

see Internal cross sections 638

Bezier - Rectangle type

analogous with Rectangle; with chamfers (cast radii)

see Bezier cross section 632

Bezier - Trapezoid type

analogous with Trapezoid; with chamfers (cast radii)

see Bezier cross section 632

Line segments

see Line Segments cross section 633

Radius based

see Radius based cross section 637

Section properties

Here you can specify some properties of the currently selected cross section in the table Sections.

Details can be found in the table above and in the specific topics.

Except the Radius based and round

section types, each section definition can
have a specification of the draft angle .

Currently, left and right side of the cross

sections do not form an edge at the
center line due to problems of cutwater
design.

Limitations

For double volutes the cone angle (opening) of all cross sections has to be constant. Therefore,
round types and Line segments are not available.

If any of these impossible cross section types are already part of the project then they are converted
automatically when selecting the double volute type (see Setup & Inlet 620 ). The following message
will be displayed:

· "Volute section type(s) were modified due to double volute requirements."

if any cross section type was modified automatically

· "Cone angle(s) were modified due to double volute requirements."

if the cone angle of any cross section was adapted automatically

9.2.1 Bezier cross section

The shape of a Bezier cross-section is described by a Bezier curve.

One half of the shape of the cross-

section is described using a 4th degree
Bezier polynomial.

· Points 0 and 4 are the end points

and cannot be changed.
· Point 1 can be moved along a
straight line which corresponds to
the cone angle of the cross-section
(0° for a rectangle type, d for a
trapezoid type).
· Point 3 can only be moved on a
straight line specified by the cone
angle .
· Point 2 can be moved freely and
therefore has the major influence
on the shape of the cross-section.
In the initial design, point 2 is
identical with the intersection point
of lines 0-1 and 4-3.

Two basic shapes of the cross-section can be selected, rectangular or trapezoid.

With Inner point position, you can select whether positioning of the inner points 1 and 3 should be
relative (0..1: 0 = point 0/4; 1 = point S) or absolute (distance from point S), where S is the
intersection point of lines 0-1 and 4-3.
The numeric values of the positions can be changed by right-clicking on points 1 or 3.

The scaling center point is the left

(right) inlet point, which is not
located on the section center line.

9.2.2 Line Segments cross section

The shape of a Line segments

cross-section is described by a
series of line segments.

One half of the shape of the cross-

section is initially based on line
segments arranged in a trapezoid
shape. Points 1 and 4 are the fix
start- and endpoints.

All corner points are connected by

line segments.

The coordinates of each point and

the related corner radius can be
adjusted in the context dialog.

Using the context menu of a line

segment, points can be added at
the cursor position or be removed

When moving points the following constraints can be enforced by pressing a key on keyboard:

CTRL Point moves on a circle around the previous point. The radius stays constant while
pressed.

CTRL + Point moves on a circle around the next point. The radius stays constant while
SHIFT pressed.

ALT Point moves on a line between its last position and previous point.

ALT + SHIFT Point moves on a line between its last position and next point.

The scaling center point is the left

(right) inlet point, which is not
located on the section center line.

9.2.3 Radius based cross section

The shape of a radius based cross section is described by straight lines and circular arcs.

The geometry is described by the following parameters:

base height h height of the radial base part

base radius RB rounding between base part and cone part

(radius can be limited due to length of base part and cone
part)

opening angle angle of the cone part

corner radius RC rounding between cone part and main circular arc on top
(radius can be limited due to length of cone part and circular
arc on top)

main radius R radius of main circular arc on top

9.2.4 Internal cross sections

Internal volutes are limited in its radial and axial extensions (see gray lines in the picture).

The additional bend can be described by the following parameters:

Neck width side distance from volute inlet to actual volute cross
sections

Inner bend shape shape of the inner bend wall

Ratio semiaxis ratio for quarter bend

Outer bend shape shape of the outer bend wall

Bend area ratio ratio of outlet to inlet section of the bend

9.3 Spiral development areas

VOLUTE | Spiral development areas

The spiral development areas can be designed and calculated in this window.

Design mode

The wrap angle can be defined - default value is 360°. Slightly reduced wrap angle can be helpful for
cut-water design.

You can choose between two kinds of Design rules for volute calculation:
· Velocity-based: Pfleiderer or Stepanoff

· Geometry-based: defined by section height or cross section area or ratio of area to center of
mass radius

¢ Details Design Rule 641

Cut-water compensation

In panel Cut-water compensation you can specify parameters for the cut-water design.

¢ Details Cut-water compensation 644

Circular arc approximation

For spirals with rectangular or trapezoidal cross sections, an approximation by circular arcs is
provided.

¢ Details Circular arc approximation 644

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Spiral contour could not be calculated exactly.

Check geometry and "Volute/ Inlet definition".

Spiral sections cannot be calculated due to Too narrow cross section shape can result in
unusual inflow direction or volute cross section unreasonable high height-width-ratio. Try to
definition. select another cross section shape.

Volute end cross section not sensible.

Check geometry and "Volute/ Inlet definition".

The properties of the end cross section are not Check the properties of the end cross section.
reasonable, e.g. the ratio H5/B5 is too low or too
high. See also the hints to the error "It's not possible
to calculate spiral contour exactly.".

Flow angle at volute inlet is too large.

Check flow properties of design rule.

Spiral sections cannot be calculated due to For velocity-based design rules the flow angle at
invalid reference parameters with a resulting flow inner radius results from c m and c u. While c m is
angle of more than 70°. calculated from volume flow Qi

c m = Qi / (d b ),

circumferential velocity is set directly. Increase

c u or reduce Qi to decrease flow angle.

= cm / cu

Spiral contour calculation failed due to invalid inflow conditions.

Check "Volute/ Inlet definition".

Spiral sections cannot be calculated due to The inlet flow angle is defined by the swirl of the
invalid inflow direction, i.e. due to invalid flow previous component. If no previous component
angle. The flow angle at the volute inlet must be exists, the inflow angle is defined by "Global
positive and should be small (<~45°, 90° is setup/ Inflow". Check if the swirl is inside the

Problem Possible solutions

completely invalid). It can be checked in "Volute/ mentioned range. Contra rotating impeller at
Inlet definition", page "Volute" right at "Values": volute inlet are currently not supported.
Flow angle .

Angle of last cross section definition is higher than spiral wrap angle.

One or more cross sections are defined at Adapt circumferential position of the cross
positions > spiral wrap angle section definition ("Volute/ Cross section") or
spiral wrap angle ("Volute/ Spiral areas").

Automated contour update is active.

Cross section sizes are not fixed and adapt to external flow properties.

Spiral cross section extents are updated To fix the spiral cross section extents you could
automatically if anything on the inlet side or any uncheck the "Automatic" calculation right top.
spiral properties are modified. Then you have to manually start the calculation
if required.

9.3.1 Design rule

The flow rate through a cross-section, A, of the circumferential angle, j, is generally calculated as:
ra ( )

Q   cu dA   cu b(r )dr
r4

Using Q = / (2 ) Qi+Q0 results in an equation to calculate the circumferential angle, j, dependent

on the outer radius ra:

ra ( )
2
   cu b(r )dr
Qi r4

b(r) is a geometrical function which is defined according to the shape of the cross-section. The
velocity c u is chosen in accordance with the design instructions. Under Design rule, two alternatives
can be selected.

Velocity-based rules

For all velocity-based rules the area for each cross section is calculated using a linearly increasing
volume flow Q starting at Q0 for (blind volume flow) and an assumed velocity distribution c over
r. While Q depends on a total reference volume flow Qi, the velocity distribution is defined by a

reference c u at r4 and one of the following velocity rules. Note that both reference values can be
chosen manually by deactivating Use flow properties from inlet.

Pfleiderer

Experience has shown that the losses can be greatly minimized if the volute housing is dimensioned
such that the fluid flows in accordance with the principal of conservation of angular momentum. The
cross-section areas are therefore designed in accordance with the principal of conservation of angular
momentum, i.e. angular momentum exiting the impeller is constant. In addition, an exponent of
angular momentum, x, can be chosen so that the principle c urx = const. is obeyed. When x=1, the
angular momentum is constant. For the extreme of x=0, the circular component of the absolute
velocity cu remains constant at the impeller outlet.
x ra ( ) ra ( )
2 cu 4 r4
x x
b( r ) r  r 
   dr  Q   cu , 4  4  b(r ) dr  cu (r )  cu , 4  4 
Qi r4
rx r4 r r

The integral can be explicitly solved for simple cross-section shapes (rectangles, trapezoids,
circles). For other, arbitrary, shapes, it can be solved numerically.

Stepanoff

Alternatively, it can be beneficial to design the volute with a constant velocity in all cross-sections of
the circumference. According to Stepanoff, this constant velocity can be determined empirically:
. The constant k s can be determined dependent on the specific speed nq (see
Approximation function 226 ).
ra ( ) ra ( )
2 k S 2 gH
   b(r ) dr  Q  k S 2 gH  b(r ) dr  cu  k S 2 gH  const.
Qi r4 r4

Note, for manually defined reference velocities c u,4, k s has no influence because c is constant over r.

Geometry-based rules

Contrary to velocity-based rules the geometry progression is defined directly. Height-, Area- or
Area/Radius-progression (Set Progression 96 ) can be defined, where the final value can be entered.

9.3.2 Cut-water compensation

The cut-water is available for external volutes only. For internal volutes the cut-water is a result of the
intersection of spiral and diffuser.
Some initial cut-water parameters can be specified in the Cut-water compensation section:

Inner radius r Informative, see Inlet 620

r is the inlet radius of the volute and/or outlet radius of

radial diffusers

Thickness e Thickness of the cut-water at the start of the volute (for

compensation)

Compensation jC Angle, above which cut-water correction begins (standard:

270°)

The cut-water does disturb the flow, since the

cross-section of the flow is narrowed suddenly by
the thickness of the cut-water.

To weaken this negative influence, the cut-water

can be corrected. This is achieved by assuming
that from the angle jC the inner radius r increases
linearly to a value of r+e at the end cross-section
of the volute. This results in larger volute cross-
sections in this area, so that the narrowing of flow
caused by the cut-water becomes less
significant.

By clicking on Default, you can return to the

standard values for the cut-water.

9.3.3 Circular arc approximation

For spirals with rectangular or trapezoidal cross sections, an approximation by circular arcs is
provided. The arcs are optimized with respect to the minimal deviation from the initial contour, which
is defined by the design rule.

The number of circular segments can be specified and the max. deviation from the initial contour is
displayed for information.

The Spiral contour view contains the circular segments, which can be displayed using the "Circle
segments" display option bottom left.

Information about the resulting circular arcs (e.g. midpoints, radii and angles) are shown in the
"informational values" view. In addition, their details are given as hint of the arc in the diagram if
enabled in display properties.

Note that further calculations are based on the initial contour.

9.3.4 Double Volute

Double Volutes are used to compensate asymmetric casing forces that are inevitable for Single
Volutes. Their design can be activated in the initial volute Setup 621 .

General procedure for Double Volute design

Double volutes are calculated analogously to Single Volutes. The blockage at splitter leading edge
has to be compensated by splitter compensation (see parameters below), exactly like Cut-water
compensation 644 . Furthermore, the calculation of the outer contour is considering the geometry of
the splitter (position, fillet-radius, thickness).

The inner radius of the splitter ra,II and thus the Inner area (II) at j is given by the outer radius ra at j-
jSpl.

The Outer area (I) is calculated based on the Design rule 641 for
* a constant flow rate defined by the splitter start angle (normally 50% of overall flow rate)
* starting from the splitter outside radius ri,I = ra,II + r.

Splitter of Double Volute

For double volutes you can define additional properties of the spiral and splitter.

· Start angle jSpl is the angular position where the splitter starts. It also determines the splitter
contour.

· Angular offset jSpl can be used to achieve a radial offset without changing the contour.

· Thickness e Spl defines the distance between the inner and outer splitter contour.

· Compensation jSpl,C is used analogous to the cut-water compensation.

· Fillet radius rSpl defines the radial corner radius between spiral and splitter surface.

· Draft angle Spl defines the deviation to horizontal direction on upper and lower side of the
splitter.

Additional views

The progression diagrams contain curves for each part of the volute, like the area progression below.

Beside the default informational values 650 separate values for inner and outer part of the volute are
reported.

Furthermore 2 additional ratios are displayed:

· Expansion of outer volute (using end point of blue curve / start point of blue curve)

· Ratio of outer to inner throat (using end point of blue curve / end point of green curve)

9.3.5 Additional views

The following information

can be displayed in the
spiral dialog using the
"Additional views" button:

3D-Preview

3D model 259 of the currently designed spiral development areas.

Informational values

Some informative values relating to the end cross-section are displayed:

Inner radius r'

Outer radius r
Min. axial coordinate z
Height H
Width B
Side ratio H/B
Equivalent diameter D
Area A
Area-radius-ratio A/rc

Spiral losses are predicted using the theory of Aungier 683 [Outlet Volute only]:

Sizing parameter

Meridional loss coefficient

for SP 1
Tangential loss coefficient
for SP < 1

Wall loss coefficient

Overall loss coefficient

Spiral contour Frontal view of volute (x-y)

Cross sections Volute cross sections (z-r)

Radius progression Radius distribution ( -r)

Area progression Area distribution ( -A)

Area-radius-ratio Area/Gravity center radius (rC ) distribution ( -A/rc )

Contour angle progression Angle between the outer spiral contour and the
circumferential direction Note, that due to the
differential characteristic of the contour angle, the continuity
of this distribution is decreased by one.

9.4 Diffuser

VOLUTE | Diffuser

The geometry of the outlet or inlet diffuser can be designed and calculated in this design step.

Dimensions x,y-plane

In general, 3 basic shapes are available:

Tangential diffuser

Radial diffuser

Spline-diffuser

The tangential diffuser is easier to manufacture, the radial diffuser has the advantage of minimizing
tangential forces. The spline diffuser is similar to the radial but with extended flexibility.

Tangential diffuser

For the tangential diffuser the eccentricity can be specified:

The right side is parallel to the center line (perpendicular to the last spiral cross section).
The diffuser opens to left side only.

The diffuser opens to both sides (default).

The left side is parallel to the center line (perpendicular to the last spiral cross section).
The diffuser opens to right side only.

The eccentricity can be specified manually.

Radial diffuser

In the case of a radial diffuser, the angle e between the outlet branch and the line connecting
impeller-center and outlet branch center can be selected.

Spline diffuser

For the Spline-diffuser the angle j between connecting line impeller-center « outlet branch center
and diffuser start section has to be defined. Points 0 and 4 are start and endpoint of the middle line

on the inlet and outlet cross section, point 2 is fixed by the intersection of appropriate perpendiculars
of these sections. Position of points 1 and 3 influence the curve shape of the middle line.

By clicking on Default, you can return to the default values for the diffuser geometry.

The extension H of the diffuser can be defined in panel Dimensions x,y-plane.

For all diffuser shapes the extension is

defined by the diffuser height H, which is the
distance from the diffuser outlet to a parallel
line through the center point.

The distance C from the H-line to the center

point is displayed for information, both in the
diagram and numerical in the Information
panel.

The starting position of the diffuser is defined by the angle j0, whereas 0° is horizontal right. The
whole volute can be rotated by this value. By using the button Vertical outflow direction the volute
can be rotated for vertical direction of the pressure joint.

Additionally, the diffuser can be shifted

in radial direction by the radial offset
rC to reduce the intersection of spiral
and diffuser.

This radial offset can increase the

available space for the cut-water in
order to locate it closer to the desired
radius.

Radial offset is available for strictly

external volutes with 360° wrap angle
only.

Dimensions z-direction

Two options are available for aligning the diffuser in z-direction, bend and offset (rake).

Bend

The diffuser bending in z-direction is described by the parameters shown in the sketch. There exist
2 straight segments 1, 3 and a circular segment 2.

· The lengths L1, L2 and L3 are specified as percentage.

· The curvature is defined by the radius R, the direction by the angle .

· The z-bend is illustrated in the diagram by a green center line.

Offset

There are 4 offset options:

The diffuser sections are shifted in negative z-direction in order to avoid higher z-coordinate
compared to the last spiral section

The diffuser is developing centric with respect to the z-direction (default).

The diffuser sections are shifted in positive z-direction in order to avoid lower z-coordinate
compared to the last spiral section

The offset can be specified manually in both directions. Additionally the progression of the
diffuser can be chosen: linear or quadratic with respect to the length of the diffuser.

The following image illustrates this feature: left centric design, right negative offset.

End cross-section

The end cross-section of the diffuser can be either round or rectangular. The diameter D can be
directly defined or selected from standard tables. In the case of a rectangular end cross-section the
height and width can be chosen.

Section progression

The position of end shape specifies the percentage position along the diffuser, where the type of
end cross section is reached (default = 100%). To reach certain cross section areas a scaling of
those sections is necessary. Instead of just scaling uniformly in both directions (z and r) a scaling
ratio (z/r growth) can be defined.

The choice of the area progression influences the scaling of the morphed cross sections.

Linear blending The morph between two different cross sections is linear which results in an
quadratic area progression. (unscaled)

Linear area The size of the morphed cross sections is scaled to achieve a linear area
progression.

Quadratic area The size of the morphed cross sections is scaled to achieve a quadratic
progression from the diffuser inlet to the end shape position. The progression to
diffuser outlet is linear again.

Custom area The size of the morphed cross sections is scaled with respect to a Beziér
curve.

Splitter of Double Volute

The position of splitter end defined the relative length of the splitter inside the diffuser.

9.4.1 Additional views

The following information

can be displayed in the
diffuser dialog using the
"Additional views" button:

3D-Preview

3D model 259 of the currently designed diffuser geometry as well as spiral surfaces.

Informational values

Velocity ratio c Out / c In Deceleration ratio

Length L Length of the diffuser

Angle between connecting line impeller-center «

Angle to centerline j
outlet branch center and diffuser start section

Center distance C Distance from the h-line to the center point

Cone angle J Cone angle from DIn to DOut over the length L

Max. theoretical cone angle J max J max =16.5°(DIn/2/L)½ , see Gülich 681 ,
not for turbines

Radius of centerline R Radius of middle line (for radial diffuser only)

Diffuser outlet center C Spatial position of diffuser outlet

Inlet & Outlet information

Diameter of the equivalent circle at the diffuser

Equivalent diameter D
inlet / outlet

Area A Area at diffuser inlet / outlet

Velocity c Velocity at the diffuser inlet / outlet

Pressure p Pressure at the diffuser inlet / outlet

Total pressure pt Total pressure at the diffuser inlet / outlet

For turbines and compressor additional information is visible:

Temperature T Temperature at the diffuser inlet / outlet

Total temperature Tt Total temperature at the diffuser inlet / outlet

Density Density at the diffuser inlet / outlet

Mach Number Ma Mach Number at the diffuser inlet / outlet

Losses

Spiral losses are predicted using the theory of Aungier 683 [Outlet Volute only]:

Cone loss coefficient

Wall loss coefficient

Overall loss coefficient

Cross sections

Diffuser cross sections (z-r)

Area progression

Area distribution (l-A)

9.5 Cut-water

VOLUTE | Cut-water

The geometry of the cut-water can be designed in this dialog box.

Generally, the cut-water can be designed in three modes: Simple 665 , Fillet 667 or Sharp 670 .

Splitter of Double volute

The leading/trailing edge axis ratio specifies the ratio between the minor and major axis length of
an ellipse, representing the leading and trailing edge of the splitter.

Limitations

General The wrap angle 638 must be at least 330°.

Simple For cornered spiral cross sections the side position is fixed to the corner position
and cannot be modified individually.

Rounding of cut-water edges (Round edges) is possible only if side position is

higher than the position of maximum curvature and if no diffuser radial offset is
defined.

Fillet, Not available for cornered cross sections, either spiral or diffuser.
Sharp
Intersection of spiral and diffuser geometry is necessary to create the cut-water.

Fillet Fillet cut-water is usually not possible, if the spiral development is at the beginning
very flat and a tangential diffuser with a big end cross-section is chosen.

For asymmetric spiral cross sections, only non-tangential surface transition is

available.

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Intersection of Side A1/B1 with Inlet/Outlet

Cut-water Side A1/B1 face intersects with Any parameter modification of the Fillet Cut-
Inlet/Outlet face. water affects the geometry of the side patches.

Inlet/Outlet is a virtual face bordering the Use automatic Surface transition.

Volutes's Flow domain. The intersection affects
volumetric meshing of the Flow domain, which
may result in very small mesh entities and in a
non smooth surface in these regions.

Generally, the intersection is very small and

hardly visible in 3D-model.

The cut-water cannot be created because the spiral wrap angle is too low (minimum: ...).

A minimum spiral wrap angle is necessary for Increase spiral warp angle 638 at least to the
cut-water creation. given minimal value.

Cutwater is self-intersecting.

Problem Possible solutions

Cut-water faces intersect each other. The problem might have various reasons.
Therefore, modify spiral, diffuser or cutwater
design.

E.g. define a flat radius progression at the start

of spiral development areas 638 , or change
angular position / radial offset of the
cutwater.

Multiple intersection curves between spiral and diffuser.

Spiral and diffuser may have multiple intersection This problem can be solved by manipulating the
curves. (red) spiral start position. A single intersection curve
is required for generation of sharp and fillet cut-
waters.

3D-Error: Could not create bounded surface for Cut-water!

The side position should not be too low when

Parameter side position is disadvantageous.
edges are rounded.

3D-Error: Creation of Cut-water failed! Possibly, the fillet radius is too large.

[for asymmetric volutes] Modify the Position of end shape 658 in the
Diffuser dialog to avoid wavy intersection curve.
Fillet cannot be created because intersection
curve of spiral and diffuser is wavy.

Problem Possible solutions

[for asymmetric volutes] Modify Spiral start position

Fillet cannot be created because intersection

curve of spiral and diffuser is tangential to the
sharp diffuser edge.

Creating fillet cutwater requires intersection between diffuser and spiral contour.

There is no intersection of original spiral surface The shape of spiral and diffuser determine the
and diffuser surface. intersection.

The fillet cut-water is generated along this The diffuser shape is additionally influenced by
intersection curve. the "Radial offset 656 " (reduce if possible) and
the "Diffuser base form factor 667 " (enlarge if
possible).

9.5.1 Simple

The simple cut-water is a rounding-off between spiral and diffuser.

The rounding position is defined by the angular

position jC,0 (0°=start of volute).

Side position defines the

transition position from the central
rounding surface to the side
surfaces. For asymmetric spiral
cross sections two independent
values can be specified for left and
right side.

The created edge can be rounded

optionally (Round edges).

The cut-water height has a

similar effect like side position and
defines the transition position of
the cut-water surface on the spiral
outlet.

The cut-water itself is designed by a 4th order Bezier curve. The shape can be modified interactively
after zooming in (Zoom Cut-water).

9.5.2 Fillet

For fillet cut-water design the spiral and the diffuser are trimmed and rounded at their intersection
curve.

Prerequisites:

· The wrap angle 638 must be high enough so that spiral and diffuser intersect.

The corresponding fillet radius can be specified.

Additionally, the Diffuser base form factor defines

the roundness of the first diffuser cross section on its
base side and is between 0.2 and 1:
· 0 = cornered base side (like spiral section)
· 1 = full rounded base side

The factor affects the shape of the intersection curve

and therefore the shape of the cut-water. A high value
could help to get an intersection of spiral and diffuser
as a pre-condition for fillet cut-water.

Diffuser base form factor for a round spiral cross section

Com pares diffuser base form factor of 0.2 and 1.0 for a spiral cross section of type line segm ents

The Spiral start position indicates the angular position at which the spiral begins and influences the
intersection of spiral and diffuser. It has to be at least 1° and must be lower than the intersection
position of spiral and diffuser. If Automatic is activated the optimal angular position is determined
automatically.

The Surface transition defines the transition from the side patch surfaces to the central fillet
surface:
· Tangential: Tangential transition between both surfaces (Time-consuming)

· Non-tangential: No tangential transition between both surfaces

· Automatic: Tries tangential transition. If it fails, a non-tangential transition is used. (Time-

consuming)

If the fillet cut-water mode has been

chosen, the 3D-model is set to the
model state 271 "Solids only" after
every update of the design because
only then the spiral and diffuser
surfaces that are trimmed according to
the fillet are visible.

9.5.3 Sharp

For sharp cut-water design the spiral and the diffuser are trimmed only at their intersection curve. The
resulting geometry can be processed in the CAD system.

Prerequisites:

· The wrap angle 638 must be high enough so that spiral and diffuser intersect.

9.5.4 Additional views

The following information

can be displayed in the
cut-water dialog using the
"Additional views" button:

Informational values

Some informative values relating to both end cross-sections and the cut-water cross-section are
displayed:

Equivalent diameter D
Cross-section area A

Especially for cut-water, some diameters and angle are displayed:

Inner / Outer / Average / /

In Out Av g
cut-water angle

Inner / Outer / Average dIn / dOut / dAv g

cut-water diameter

Minimal dMin
cut-water diameter

Cutwater angular position C,1

9.6 Wall thickness

VOLUTE | Wall thickness

The volute's material solid can be designed by activating the "Wall thickness design" feature on the
right side. Initial contours will be visible, which can be manipulated using the edit controls for the
material thickness and for the angles of the conical endings.

The "Thickness" parameter defines the orthogonal distance of the outer material walls from the flow
surfaces of the spiral and the diffuser. The modeling of the outer walls at the cut-water is not based
on orthogonal distance but on a smooth transition between the spiral and the diffuser, hence the
material thickness differs in this area.

Informational values for the tangential and for the meridional stress within the material solid are given.
The values are coarse approximations based on a simplified pipe bend model. They can be used to
define a suitable material thickness, but don't substitute more advanced stress analysis techniques.

Tangential stress

Meridional stress

(max. value at = 270°)

(e.g. Dubbel: Handbook of Mechanical Engineering/ Strength of materials)

The angle parameters for both sides of the material cross section define the end shape on the
conical side of the spiral material solid (conical endings).

The 3D model of the material solid can finally be obtained within the 3D model main view:

Possible warnings

Problem Possible solutions

Left / Right / Inner / Outer angle lead to intersection with flow volume.

The contour of the left / right / inner / outer Change angle of the end shape at the related
conical spiral ending intersects the flow volume. position.

Material contours intersect internal bend contours.

Spiral's material contours intersect the internal Change angle of the related end shape or reduce
bend. A material wall design for the internal bend thickness.
is currently not supported.

Conical endings intersect each other.

Contours of both conical end shapes intersect Change angles of the end shapes.
each other.

Spiral material contour could not be computed.

Problem Possible solutions

Spiral's material cross section could not be Change thickness.

computed.
Change spiral's cross section 628 geometry.

Material contour at tongue could not be computed.

A valid material contour at flow domain's tongue Change thickness.

could not be computed.
Change cut-water type 661 .

Change cut-water geometry 665 .

3D-Error: Computing spiral / diffuser / intake wall thickness failed!

Computing 3D geometry for any material cross Change thickness.

section of spiral / diffuser / intake failed.
Change cross section geometry 628 of spiral.

Change geometry 652 of diffuser / intake.

3D-Error: Computing conical endings failed!

Updating 3D material cross sections of the spiral Change angles of the end shapes.
to fit the conical end shape failed.

3D-Error: Adapting diffuser / intake wall surface to conical endings failed!

Updating 3D material cross sections of the Change angles of the end shapes.
diffuser / intake to fit the conical end shape of
the spiral failed.

3D-Error: Computing spiral / diffuser / intake wall surface failed!

A valid 3D surface for the material solid of spiral / Change thickness.

diffuser / intake could not be computed.
Change angles of the end shapes.

3D-Error: Could not create rounding surface!

A valid 3D surface for the material solid at flow Change thickness.

domain's cut-water could not be computed.

Problem Possible solutions

Change cut-water type 661 .

Change cut-water geometry 665 .

3D-Error: Could not create Material domain!

A valid 3D solid geometry of the volute's material Change thickness.

domain could no be computed.

3D-Error: Rounding material walls intersect Flow domain!

Rounding material wall surface intersects the Change cut-water geometry 665 .
flow volume near the cut-water.
Change thickness.

9.7 CFD setup

VOLUTE | CFD setup

For flow simulation (CFD), the diffuser can be extruded in normal direction of its outlet. The Length
can be specified either absolutely or as a multiple (Factor) of the diffuser outlet diameter D6.

If a RSI connection 587 was enabled for the impeller, these geometrical parts are added to the virtual
geometry of the volute (see virtual geometry 582 for more information).

9.8 Model settings

VOLUTE | Model settings

On dialog Model settings you can specify how many data points are to be used for the 3D model
and for the point based export formats.

The number of points can be set for both cases separately for all geometry parts.

§ Spiral: cross sections, points per cross section

§ Diffuser: cross sections

§ Cutwater (sides): cross sections, points per cross section

The cutwater cross sections setting does not refer to the center face, because its section
count is determined by the number of points of the spiral and by the side position 644 .

3D Model

Distance tolerance
The distance tolerance defines the maximum allowed distance
between sewed surfaces, e.g the faces of a solid.

If it is too small, the solids cannot be created.

If it is too big, small faces are ignored when creating a solid.

Point Export

Presetting

Select from 3 global presettings.

When a new volute is created the model settings of the last opened volute are adopted.

X
Appendix 681

10 Appendix
10.1 References

GENERAL

Arnold Whitfield, Nicholas C. Baines

Design of Radial Turbomachines
Longman Scientific & Technical, 1990

O.E. Balje
Turbomachines - A Guide to Design, Selection and Theory
John Wiley & Sons, 1981

Willi Bohl, Wolfgang Elmendorf

Strömungsmaschinen 1+2
Vogel-Verlag, 2008

Werner Fister
Fluidenergiemaschinen Bd. 1 und 2
Springer-Verlag, 1984 und 1986

Wolfgang Kalide
Energieumwandlung in Kraft- und Arbeitsmaschinen
Hanser-Verlag, 1989

Carl Pfleiderer, Hartwig Petermann

Strömungsmaschinen
Springer-Verlag, 1991

Joachim Raabe
Hydraulische Maschinen und Anlagen
VDI-Verlag, 1989

PUMPS

Johann F. Gülich
Centrifugal Pumps
Springer, 2020

Val S. Lobanoff, Robert R. Ross

Centrifugal Pumps, Design & Application
Gulf Professional Publishing, 1992

A. J. Stepanoff
Centrifugal and Axial Flow Pumps
John Wiley & Sons, 1957

John Tuzson
Centrifugal pump design
John Wiley & Sons, 2000

B. Neumann
The Interaction between Geometry and Performance of a Centrifugal Pump
Mechanical Engineering Publications Limited, 1991

Kurt Holzenberger, Klaus Jung

Kreiselpumpen Lexikon
KSB AG, 1989

Michael Schwanse
Strömungsmechanische Auslegung und Nachrechnung von radialen und diagonalen
Kreiselpumpenlaufrädern
Dissertation, TU Dresden, 1990

Walter Wagner
Kreiselpumpen und Kreiselpumpenanlagen
Vogel-Verlag, 1994

Gotthard Will
Kreiselpumpen
in: Taschenbuch Maschinenbau, Band 5
hrsg. von Hans-Joachim Kleinert, Verlag Technik Berlin, 1989

FANS

Leonhard Bommes, Jürgen Fricke, Reinhard Grundmann

Ventilatoren
Vulkan-Verlag, 2003

Bruno Eck
Ventilatoren
Springer-Verlag, 1991

Thomas Carolus
Ventilatoren
Teubner-Verlag, 2003

Hans Werner Roth

Optimierung von Trommelläufer-Ventilatoren
Dissertation, Universität Karlsruhe, 1980

R. A. Wallis
Axial flow fans and ducts
John Wiley & Sons, 1983

COMPRESSORS

Ronald H. Aungier
Centrifugal Compressors
ASME Press, 2000

Ronald H. Aungier
Axial-flow Compressors
ASME Press, 2003

Michael Casey and Chris Robinson

Radial Flow Turbocompressors
Cambridge University Press, 2021

Davide Japikse
Centrifugal Compressors Design and Performance
Concepts ETI, 1996

N. A. Cumpsty
Compressor aerodynamics
Krieger publishing, 2004

Klaus H. Lüdtke
Process Centrifugal Compressors
Springer-Verlag, 2004

Franz Joos
Aerodynamik axialer Turbokompressoren
Springer Vieweg, 2020

Bruno Eckert, Erwin Schnell

Axial- und Radialkompressoren
Springer-Verlag, 1980

Ernst Lindner
Turboverdichter
in: Taschenbuch Maschinenbau, Band 5
hrsg. von Hans-Joachim Kleinert, Verlag Technik Berlin, 1989

Arthur J. Wennerstrom
Design of highly loaded axial-flow fans and compressors
Concepts ETI, 2000

Members of the staff of Lewis Research Center

Aerodynamic design of axial-flow compressors
NASA SP-36, Washington, D.C. 1965

P. de Haller
Das Verhalten von Tragflügelgittern in Axialverdichtern und im Windkanal
Brennstoff-Wärme-Kraft, Band 5, Heft 10, 1953

Michael Casey and Chris Robinson

A method to estimate the performance map of a centrifugal compressor stage
Proceedings of the ASME Turbo Expo 2011, ASME GT2011- 45502

Jakob Ackeret
Zum Entwurf dicht stehender Schaufelgitter
Schweizer Bauzeitung 120, pp. 103-108, 1942

GAS TURBINES

Ronald H. Aungier
Turbine Aerodynamics
ASME Press, 2006

Hany Moustapha, Mark Zelesky, Nicholas C. Baines, Davide Japikse

Axial and Radial Turbines
Concepts NREC, 2003

O. E. Balje
A study on design Criteria and matching of Turbomachines: Part A - Similarity Relations and Design
Criteria of Turbines
Journal of Engineering for Power, p. 83-102, January 1962

HYDRO TURBINES

Rudolf Escher
Die Theorie der Wasserturbinen
Springer-Verlag, 1921

R. Thomann
Die Wasserturbinen und Turbinenpumpen 1./2. Teil
Verlag Konrad Wittwer, 1924/1931

Further literature

John D. Stanitz, Vasily D. Prian

A rapid approximate method for the determining velocity distribution on impeller blades of centrifugal
compressors
NACA Technical note 2421, July 1951

John David Anderson, R. Grundmann, E. Dick

Computational Fluid Dynamics: An Introduction
Springer, 1996

O. Redlich, J. N. S. Kwong
On the Thermodynamics of Solutions. V. An Equation of State. Fugacities of Gaseous Solutions,
Chemical Reviews. 44, No. 1, pp. 233–244, 1949

R. H. Aungier
A Fast, Accurate Real Gas Equation of State for Fluid Dynamic Analysis Applications,
Journal of Fluids Engineering, Vol. 117, pp. 277-281, 1995

Giorgio Soave
Equilibrium constants from a modified Redlich-Kwong equation of state.,
Chemical Engineering Science. 27, No. 6, pp. 1197–1203, 1972

D. Y. Peng, D. B. Robinson
A New Two-Constant Equation of State,
Industrial and Engineering Chemistry: Fundamentals, Vol. 15: pp. 59–64, 1976

Th. W. Von Backström

A unified correlation for slip factor in centrifugal impellers
Journal of Turbomachinery, 128(1):1-10, 2006

E. A. Mason, S. C. Saxena
Approximate formulae for the thermal conductivity of gas mixtures
Phys. Fluids 1, p. 361, 1958

Waldemar Steinhilper, Rudolf Röper

Maschinen- und Konstruktionselemente 3
Springer, 1996

10.2 Symbols

Symbo Description
l

Angle of absolute flow

Angle of relative flow

slip coefficient, Stagger angle

Deviation angle flow / blade

r
Swirl number

Drag ratio

Efficiency

Decreased power factor (sweeping)

Symbo Description
l

Diameter ratio

Pressure ratio

Density

Thickness in circumferential direction; Speed coefficient

Blockage of flow channel by blades

Wrap angle; Flow coefficient

Work coefficient (= pressure and head coefficient)

Angular velocity

, , , Sweep angles

Symbo Description
l

A Cross section area

b Width

c Absolute velocity

cm Meridional velocity (c m =wm )

cu Circumferential component of absolute velocity

cL Lift coefficient

cD Drag coefficient

d Diameter

f Camber

F Force

h Enthalpy

H Pump head

i Incidence angle

Symbo Description
l

l Chord length

L Length

M Torque; Meridional coordinate

m Meridional coordinate (dimensionless)

Mass flow

n Number of revolutions

nq, Ns Specific speed

p Pressure

P Power

Q Flow rate

r, R Radius

s Entropy, Orthogonal thickness

S Static moment

t Pitch; Tangential coordinate (dimensionless)

T Temperature, Tangential coordinate

u Circumferential velocity (Rotational speed)

v Velocity

w Relative velocity

wu Circumferential component of relative velocity (wu+c u=u)

Y Specific energy

z Geodetic height; Number of blades

10.3 Contact addresses

www.cfturbo.com
[email protected]

CFturbo GmbH

Unterer Kreuzweg 1
01097 Dresden, Germany
Phone +49 351 40 79 04 79

CFturbo, Inc.

NEWLAB, 19 Morris Avenue, Building 128

Brooklyn Navy Yard
Brooklyn, NY 11205, USA
Phone +1 929 351 2009

10.4 License agreement

Software Cession and Maintenance Contract

between

CFturbo GmbH

Unterer Kreuzweg 1, 01097 Dresden (Germany)

- hereinafter designated the 'Licensor' -

and

the CFturbo user

- hereinafter designated the 'User' -

§ 1 LICENSE AGREEMENT

By virtue of this agreement, the User acquires from the Licensor the non-transferable and non-
exclusive right to use the software 'CFturbo' (hereinafter designated the 'Software') for a period of
time, in exchange for the licence fee agreed between the Licensor and the User.

1. Licence Object

The User acquires a nodelocked license or a license for one local office network (LAN) at one
distinguished location of the company.

The program package consists of a data medium (CD-ROM or DVD) with the Software and a user
manual in the form of a PDF file. In the event that the Software was downloaded from the official
website of the Licensor, the program package consists of the corresponding installation file including
electronic documentation.

2. Duration / commencement of the licence

The User obtains the right to use the Software. The right is obtained after the payment of the full
licence fee and implicitly expires at the end of the arranged time period.

4. Right of Use

(1) In accordance with this contract, the Licensor grants the User a right of use to the Software
described under 1. as well as a right to use the necessary printed matter and documentation. The
printing-out of the manual for the purposes of working with the Software is permitted.

(2) The User may duplicate the Software only insofar as the duplication in question is necessary for
the use of the Software. Necessary reasons for duplication notably include the installation of the
Software from the original data medium onto the mass storage of the hardware used, as well as the
loading of the Software into the RAM memory.

(3) The User is entitled to perform duplication for backup purposes. However, in principle, only a
single backup copy may be created and stored. The backup copy must be labelled as being a
backup copy of the ceded Software.

(4) If, for reasons of data security or the assurance of a fast reactivation of the computer system after
a total failure, the regular backing-up of the entire dataset including the computer programs used is
essential, then the User may create the number of backup copies which are compulsorily required.
The data media concerned must be labelled accordingly. The backup copies may only be used for
purely archival purposes.

(5) The User is obliged to take appropriate measures to prevent the unauthorized access of third
parties to the program including its documentation. The supplied original data media, as well as the

backup copies, must be stored in a location protected against the unauthorized access of third
parties. The employees of the User must be explicitly encouraged to observe these contractual
conditions as well as the provisions of copyright law.

(6) Additional duplications, also including the printing-out of the program code on a printer, must not
be created by the User. The copying and the handover or transfer of the user manual to third parties
is not permitted.

5. Multiple Use and Networks

(1) The User may use the Software on any hardware available to him, provided that this hardware is
appropriate for the use according to the Software documentation. In the event of changing the
hardware, the Software must be erased from the previously used hardware.

(2) The simultaneous reading in, storage or use on more than one hardware device is not permitted
unless the User has acquired multiple-use licences or network licences. Should the User wish to use
the Software on multiple hardware configurations at the same time, for example to permit the use of
the Software by several employees, he must purchase the corresponding number of licences.

(3) The use of the ceded Software on different computers on a network or another multiple-
workstation computer system is permitted, provided that the User has purchased multiple-use
licences or network licences. If this is not the case, the User may only use the Software on a
network if he prevents simultaneous multiple use by means of access protection mechanisms.

6. Program Modifications

(1) The disassembly of the ceded program code into other code forms (decompilation) as well as
other types of reverse-engineering of the different manufacturing stages of the software, including a
modification of the program, is not permitted.

(2) The removal of the copy protection or similar protection mechanisms is not permitted. Insofar as
the trouble-free use of the program is impaired or hindered by one of the protection mechanisms, the
Licensor is obliged to remedy the fault on an appropriate request. The User bears the burden of proof
of the impairment or hindrance of trouble-free usability as a result of the protection mechanism.

(3) Copyright notices, serial numbers and other marks used for program identification purposes must
in no event be removed or modified. This also applies to the suppression of the screen display of
such marks.

7. Resale and Leasing

Resale and leasing of the Software or other cession of the Software to third parties is only permitted
with the written agreement of the Licensor.

8. Warranty

(1) The Licensor makes no warranty with respect to the performance of the Software or the obtained
data and the like. He grants no guarantees, assurances or other provisions and conditions with
respect to the merchantability, freedom from defects of title, integration or usability for specific
purposes, unless they are legally prescribed and cannot be restricted.

(2) Defects in the ceded software including the user manuals and other documents must be
remedied by the Licensor within an appropriate period of time following the corresponding notification
of the defect by the User. The defect is remedied by free-of-charge improvements or a replacement
delivery, at the discretion of the Licensor.

(3) For the purposes of testing for and remedying defects, the User permits the Licensor to access
the Software via telecommunications. The connections necessary for this are established by the
User according to the instructions of the Licensor.

(4) A right of cancellation of the User due to the non-granting of use according to § 543 para. 2
clause 1 no. 1 of the Civil Code is excluded insofar as the improvement or replacement delivery is not
to be regarded as having failed. Failure of the improvement or replacement delivery is only to be
assumed if the Licensor was given sufficient opportunity to make the improvement or replacement
delivery.

(5) Furthermore, the statutory regulations also apply.

9. Liability

(1) The claims of the User for compensation or replacement of futile expenditure conform, without
regard to the legal nature of the claim, to the existing clause.

(2) In the Software, it is a question of a design procedure. It is considered to be purely an

approximation method. The Licensor is not liable for the functioning of the data obtained in practice,
for the manufactured prototypes or components, or for possible consequential damages resulting
therefrom.

(3) The Licensor is liable for damage involving injury to life and limb or to health, without limitation,
insofar as this damage is the result of a negligent or intentional breach of obligation on the part of the
Licensor or one of his legal representatives or vicarious agents.

(4) Otherwise, the Licensor is liable only for gross negligence and deliberate malfeasance.

(5) Liability for consequential damages due to defects is excluded.

(6) The above regulations also apply in favour of the employees of the Licensor.

(7) The liability according to the Product Liability Act (§ 14 ProdHaftG) remains unaffected.

(8) The liability of the Licensor regardless of negligence or fault for defects already existing on
entering into the contract according to § 536 a para. 1 of the Civil Code is expressly excluded.

10. Inspection Obligation and Notification Obligation

(1) The User will inspect the delivered Software including its documentation within 8 working days
after delivery, in particular with regard to the completeness of the data media and user manuals as
well as the functionality of the basic program functions. Defects determined or detectable hereby
must be reported to the Licensor within a further 8 working days by means of a registered letter. The
defect notification must contain a detailed description of the defects.

(2) Defects which cannot be detected in the context of the described appropriate inspection must be
reported within 8 working days of their discovery with observance of the notification requirements
specified in paragraph 1.

(3) In the event of the violation of the inspection and notification obligation, the Software is considered
to be approved with regard to the defect concerned.

11. Intellectual Property, Copyright

The Software and all the authorized copies of this Software made by the User belong to the Licensor
and are the intellectual property of the latter. The Software is legally protected. Insofar as it is not
expressed stated in this contract, the User is granted no ownership rights to the Software, and all
rights not expressly granted by means of this contract are reserved by the Licensor.

12. Return

(1) At the end of the contractual relationship, the User is obliged to return all of the original data
media as well as the complete documentation, materials, and other printed matter ceded to him. The
program and its documentation must be delivered to the lessor free of charge.

(2) The appropriate return also includes the complete and final deletion of all installation files and
online documentation, as well as any copies that may exist.

(3) The Licensor may dispense with the return and order the deletion of the program and the
destruction of the documentation. If the Licensor exercises this elective right, he will explicitly inform
the User to this effect.

(4) The User is expressly advised that, after the end of the contractual relationship, he may not
continue to use the Software and, in the event of non-compliance, is violating the copyright of the
copyright holder.

§ 2 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE

The Licensor performs the maintenance and upkeep of the Software modules included in this
contract under the following conditions. The maintenance of computer hardware is not the subject
matter of this contract.

1. Scope of the maintenance obligation

(1) The contractual maintenance measures include:

a) The provision of the respectively newest program versions of the Software modules named under
§ 1 no. 1 as free-of-charge downloads. The Software is installed by the User.

b) The updating of the Software documentation. Insofar as a significant change to the functional
scope or operation of the software occurs, completely new documentation will be provided.

c) On the expiration of the defect liability period resulting from the Software cession contract, the
remedying of defects both in the program code and in the documentation.

d) Both the written (also by fax or e-mail) and telephone advising of the customer in the event of
problems regarding the use of the Software as well as any program errors that may need to be
recorded.

e) The telephone advice service ('hotline') is available to customers on working days between 9.00
a.m. and 4.00 p.m. (CET).

f) Defects reported in writing or requests for advice are answered no later than the afternoon of the
working day following their receipt. As far as possible, this occurs by telephone for reasons of speed.
The customer must therefore add the name and direct-dial telephone number of the responsible
employee to every written message. For defect reports or requests for advice sent by e-mail, the
answer may also be given by e-mail.

(2) The following services, among others, are not included in the contractual maintenance
services of the contractor:

a) Provision of advice outside of the working hours specified under § 2 para. 1 letter e).

b) Maintenance services which become necessary due to the use of the Software on an inappropriate
hardware system or with an operating system not approved by the Licensor.

c) Maintenance services which become necessary due to the use of the Software on another
hardware system or with another operating system.

d) Maintenance services after interference of the customer with the program code of the Software.

e) Maintenance services with respect to the interoperability of the Software which is the subject
matter of the contract with other computer programs which are not the subject matter of the
maintenance contract.

f) The remedying of faults and damage caused by incorrect use by the User, the influence of third
parties or force majeure events.

g) The remedying of faults and damage caused by environmental conditions at the setup location, by
defects in or absence of the power supply, faulty hardware, operating systems or other influences not
attributable to the Licensor.

2. Payment

(1) If the User has acquired the Software for a limited period of time, then the payment for the
maintenance has already been effected in full with the payment of the licence fee.

(2) In the event of a right of use for an unlimited period of time, the first twelve months of maintenance
are included in the licence fee. In the following period, the annual maintenance fee can be found in
the enclosed price table. The Licensor is entitled to adjust the maintenance fee on an annual basis in
accordance with the general trend of prices. If the increase in the maintenance fee amounts to more
than 5%, the customer may cancel the contractual relationship.

3. Duration of the Contract

In the case of a time-limited right of use, maintenance contract ends with the expiration of the right of
use of the Software.

In the case of a time-unlimited right of use:

the maintenance contract is extended after the first twelve months by a further twelve months
respectively, unless the User opposes this in writing to the Licensor within a period of 3 months prior
to the expiration.

the User may demand, after the first twelve months, a continuation of the maintenance contract by a
further 12 months respectively up to the date of the expiration of the contract. The demand must be
made in writing.

4. Cooperation Obligations

(1) In the transcription, containment, determination and reporting of defects, the customer must
follow the instructions issued by the Licensor.

(2) The customer must specify its defect reports and questions as accurately as possible. In doing
so, he must also make use of competent employees.

(3) During the necessary test runs, the customer is personally present or seconds competent
employees for this purpose, who are authorized to pronounce and decide on defects, functional
expansions, functional cutbacks and modifications to the program structure. If necessary, other work
involving the computer system must be discontinued during the time of the maintenance work.

(4) The customer grants the Licensor access to the Software via telecommunications. The
connections necessary for this are established by the customer according to the instructions of the
Licensor.

5. Liability

(1) The Licensor is liable only for deliberate malfeasance and gross negligence and also that of his
legal representatives and managerial staff. For the fault of miscellaneous vicarious agents, the
liability is limited to five times the annual maintenance fee as well as to such damage the arising of
which is typically to be expected in the context of software maintenance.

(2) The liability for data loss is limited to the typical data retrieval expenditure which would have come
about in the regular preparation of backup copies in accordance with the risks.

§ 3 MISCELLANEOUS AGREEMENTS

1. Conflicts with Other Terms of Business

Insofar as the User also uses General Terms of Business, the contract comes about even without
express agreement about the inclusion of General Terms of Business. Insofar as the different
General Terms of Business coincide with respect to their content, they are considered to be agreed.
The regulations of the anticipated law replace any contradictory individual regulations. This also
applies to the case in which the Conditions of Business of the User contain regulations which are not
contained in the framework of these Conditions of Business. If the existing Conditions of Business
contain regulations not contained in the Conditions of Business of the User, then the existing
Conditions of Business apply.

2. Written Form

All agreements which contain a modification, addition or substantiation of these contractual

conditions, as well as specific guarantees and stipulations, must be set down in writing. If they are
declared by representatives or vicarious agents of the Licensor, they are only binding if the Licensor
has granted his written consent to them.

3. Notice and Cognizance Confirmation

The User is aware of the use of the existing General Conditions of Business on the part of the
Licensor. He has had the opportunity to take note of their content in a reasonable manner.

4. Election of Jurisdiction

In relation to all of the legal relations arising from this contractual relationship, the parties agree to
apply the law of the Federal Republic of Germany, with the exception of the United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods.

5. Place of Jurisdiction

For all disputes arising in the context of the execution of this contractual relationship, Dresden is
agreed to be the place of jurisdiction.

6. Severability Clause

Should one or more of the provisions of this contract be ineffective or void, then the effectiveness of
the remaining provisions remains unaffected. The parties undertake to replace the ineffective or void
clauses with legally effective ones which are as equivalent as possible to the originally intended
economic result. The same applies if the contract should contain a missing provision which requires
addition.

10.5 External Libraries

· Cool Prop (Project Page, License)

· AMD Optimizing CPU Libraries (Project Page, License)

· netgen (Project Page, License)

· Open Cascade (Project Page, License)

Automatic calculations 210

Index Automatic design

Automatic update
88
91
Axial dimensions 429
Axial extension 427, 431
-1- Axial impeller 510

1D-streamline 280, 325, 345 -B-

-3- Background 261
BACKSTROEM 492
3D model 53, 259, 261, 268, 588, 678 Balje 419
3D models 252 Barske 281
3D preview 538, 548, 650, 659, 671 Basic formats 133
3D-model 204 Basic values 327, 347, 366
3D-View 451 Batch file 37

-A- Batch mode

Bend 638
199

Beta progression 495

Absolute flow 453, 552 Bezier 97, 423, 427, 448, 476, 495, 541, 628, 632
Acoustic benefit 577 Bezier curves 94
Add 46, 633 Bezier mode 431, 439
Add component 256 Blade 550, 596
Administrator 20 Blade angle 219, 483, 485, 514
Alternative speed 416 Blade angle distribution 506
ANSA 176 Blade angle in x-y 514
Ansys 138, 141, 142, 146, 181, 183, 184 Blade angle with sine rule 514
Ansys BladeGen 50, 51 Blade angles 479
Ansys Mechanical 176 Blade blockage 483, 485
Ansys Meshing 176 Blade edges 617
Ansys Workbench 15, 199 Blade element momentum method 562
Approximation 97, 644 Blade fillet radius 590, 618
Approximation functions 226 Blade lean angle 519
Arc + line 423 Blade loading 507, 514, 532
Area 451 Blade passage 514
Area circles 423 Blade passage area 538, 548
Area progression 423, 652 Blade profile 244, 538, 574, 616
Assumptions 284, 330, 350, 369, 375 Blade projection 580, 617
Asymmetric 628, 638 Blade properties 453, 611
AUNGIER 490 Blade shape 459
Auto fit view 94 Blade solidity 514
AutoCAD 138, 149 Blade surface values 538, 548
Autodesk 149, 173 Blade sweep 577
AutoGrid 176, 186 Blade thickness 459, 533
Automated component design 87 BladeGen 138, 141
Automatic 69, 479, 661 BLADERUNNER 204

Blades 252, 268, 603 Compare 204

Blade-to-blade 538, 548 Compensation 638, 644
BREP 53 Component 251
Brumfield 309 Component list 85
Components 89
-C- Compressible 229, 235, 239
Compressor 10, 124
CAD 10, 127 Conformal mapping 495, 503, 517
Cadence 186 Constant 533
CAE 127 Contact addresses 688
Calculate 291, 318, 337, 356, 380, 479 Context menu 89, 94, 259, 429, 445, 448, 449, 476,
Calculation 69 503, 506
CAM 127 Continuity equation 291, 318, 337, 356, 380
Camber angle 572 Contour 268, 438
Casey/ Robinson 115, 124 Contour wire 445
Casing 587, 673 Contra rotating 416
Catia 138, 156 CoolProp 235
Center line 606, 626 Coordinate system 261, 495
CFD 10, 127, 181, 204, 580 Coordinates 94
CFD setup 617, 677 Copy 94
CFT 37, 105 Copy to clipboard 22
cft-batch 37 Cordier 108, 395, 410, 418
Cft-geo 50 Coupled 427, 431
CFturbo 10 Coupled linear 541
CFturbo Exchange 50 Coupling 43
CFturbo FEA 176 Creo 157
CFTURBO_LICENSE 31 Creo Parametric 138
CFturbo2ICEM 181 Cross section 427, 431
Characteristic numbers 284, 330, 350, 369, 375 Cross sections 280, 325, 345, 453, 628
Check 250 Curvature 423, 451
Checksum 22 Cut-water 638, 644, 661
Choke 119
Chord length 567, 570, 572, 574 -D-
Circle 435, 628, 652
Circle segments 638, 644 Dassault 156
Circular 244 Data points 588, 678
Circular + Free-form 2D 613 Date 106
Circular + Free-form 2D (axial) 475 Deactivate 69
Circular arc 644 Deceleration ratio 453
Circular blade 514 Decreased output 453, 459, 491
Circular blades 479 Default 220, 222
Cloud 20, 33 Degree of reaction 419, 559
Cm progression 451 Density 327
Color 268 Density.cftst 415
Command line 37 Design point 108, 327, 347, 366
Company 20, 22, 34 Design rule 638, 641

DesignModeler 138 Euler's Equation of Turbomachinery 291, 318, 337,

Deviation angle 459, 485 356, 380
Deviation flow - blade 459 Exact 471
Diagnostic 35 Exit code 43
Diagram 94, 221 Exit diameter 423
Diameter coefficient 284, 330 Exit width 423
Diameter ratio 284, 330, 350, 369, 375 Export 37, 127, 133, 181, 199, 259, 268
Diameter.cftdi 291, 318 Extended blade 590, 618
Diffuser 613 Extension 580, 582, 677
Dimensions 291, 318, 337, 350, 356, 369, 375, 380, Extent 606
386, 395, 402, 410 External 628
Display options 94 External geometry 50, 53
Distance tolerance 272, 588, 678
DoE 199 -F-
Double volute 646
Download 250 FEA 127
Draft angle 628 Fidelity 176, 186
Drag 71 File 35, 71
Drop 71 File location 291, 318, 337, 418
Duplicate 46 Fillet 661, 667
Fillet radius 667
-E- Firewall 26
Fish mortality 521
Edge 550 Fish-friendly pump 521
Edge position 550 Floating 20
Edit 98 Flow 596
Efficiency 108, 304, 311, 330, 390, 405 Flow angle 67, 219, 327, 347, 350, 366, 369, 375,
Hydraulic 284 459
Internal 284 Flow angles 284, 330
Mechanical 284 Flow direction 67
Overall 284 Flow factor 621
Side friction 284 Flow rate 327, 621
Tip clearance 284 Fluid 108, 229
Volumetric 284
Francis 386, 388, 390, 395
Efficiency total-to-static 350, 369, 375 Free vortex 559
Efficiency total-to-total 350, 369, 375 Frontal view 495, 533, 538, 541, 548
Ellipse 541 Full impeller 327, 347, 366
Emergency 79 Function 98, 226
Empirical 98 Functions.cftfu 226
End cross section 638, 652
End shape 652 -G-
Energy 596
Energy fraction 416 Gas 242
Environment variable 31 Gas model 229
Error 34, 35, 76, 224 Geometric coupling 256
Euler 115, 119 Geometry 596

Global setup 102, 108 Input 37, 199

Graphic 94 Install 19
Grid 423 Installation 15, 19
GridPro 176 Intake coefficient 284
Interface 127
-H- Interface definition 67
Interfaces 43
Handling 93 Interference 612
Height position 665 Internal 628, 638
Help 250 Internal efficiency 330
Helyx 176 Inventor 138, 173
Hexpress 176 Inverse design 507
History 125 IP address 25
Hub 423, 427, 429, 431, 606, 626 Isentropic Mach number 512
Hub diameter 291, 318, 337, 356, 380, 418
hyperMILL 138 -K-
-I- Kaplan 402, 403, 405, 410

ICEM 181 -L-

ICEM-CFD 176
IGES 53, 138 Language 210
IGG 176 Leading edge 423, 427, 431, 439, 483, 541
Impeller 10, 104, 222, 224 Lean angle 514
Impeller diameter 291, 318, 337, 418, 419 License 22, 34
Impeller efficiency 330 License agreement 688
Impeller Options 220 License expiration 210
Import 46, 50, 53, 96, 97, 268 License file 26, 33
Incidence angle 459, 483, 514 License key 20
Inclination angle 427, 431 License server 25, 26, 35
Incompressible 229, 235, 239 Licensing 10, 15, 20
Inducer 309 Lieblein method 562
Ineffective blade angle 518 Line segment curve 449
Inflow swirl 327 Line Segments 633
Information 34 Line width 261
Informational values 451, 538, 548, 613, 650, 659, Linear 476, 533
671 Linked 471
Initial 222 Local 22
Initial design 91, 94 Log file 75
Inlet 438, 587, 596, 609 Log. Spiral + Straight 2D 613
Inlet conditions 108 Log. Spiral + Straight 2D (axial) 475
Inlet definition 620 Logging 75
Inlet diameter 356, 380 Losses 119, 603, 659
Inlet triangle 483
Inlet volute 621
Inner 646

-M- -N-
Machine ID 20, 22 NACA 244, 562, 574
Main dimensions 280, 281, 291, 301, 318, 325, Named Selections 183
337, 345, 350, 369, 375 Navigation 87
Main window 85 Neck 638
Manual 93, 661 New 46
Manual dimensioning 281, 301 New project 83, 102
Material 268, 418 NIST 239
Material density 415, 603, 621 Node-locked 20, 31
Material domain 590 NPSH 284
Material solid 445, 673 Number of blades 453, 611, 612
Material stress 673 Number of revolutions 327
Max. curvature 427, 431 NX 138
Mean line 495
Mean line length 514 -O-
Mechanical Efficiency 330, 350, 369, 375
Menu 251, 252, 253 Obstruction 453
Merdional velocity 441 Open 105
Meridian 53, 610, 620 Open project 83
Meridian view 256 OpenFOAM 176
Meridinal deceleration 350, 369, 375 Optimimization 37
Meridional 495 Optimization 199
Meridional boundaries 533, 541 Outer 646
Meridional contour 423 Outflow coefficient 489, 490, 492
Meridional deceleration 284, 330 Outlet 438, 587, 596, 609
Meridional flow coefficient 309 Outlet triangle 483, 485
Meridional preview 395, 410 Outlet volute 621
Meridional thickness 538 Outlet width 291, 318, 337
Meshing 176, 183 Outlet width ratio 284, 330
Middle 429 Output 37, 199
Minimal relative velocity 284 Overall efficiency 330
Mixed-flow impeller 330 Overlapping 514
Mixed-flow rotor 350, 356
Mixture 242 -P-
Model finishing 208, 596
Model settings 588, 618, 678 Parameter 37, 98, 199, 226, 281, 301, 304, 311
Model state 268 Parameters 127, 390, 405
Model-finishing 590, 618 Parametric model 91
Modules 22 Parasolid 53, 138
Mouse 210, 259 Path 34
Mulit stage 416 PDF 261
Multi-stage 104 Performance curve 204
Performance map 204
Performance prediction 115

Periodicity 612 Radial 2D 574

Pfleiderer 459, 491, 641 Radial blade 474
Physical variable 226 Radial blade fibre 474
Pitch 567, 570, 572, 574 Radial blade section 474
Point based export 588, 678 Radial diffuser 514, 610
Points 226, 268 Radial element blade 474, 510
Pointwise 176 Radial equilibrium 559, 561
Polyline 96, 97, 423 Radial impeller 330
Port 31 Radial rotor 350, 356
Port configuration 26 Radius 435, 633
Position 661 Radius based 637
Potential flow 441, 528 Rake 495
Power loss 284, 330 RDP 20
Power output 327 read only 37
Power partitioning 281, 301 Real geometry 132
Preferences 209, 210, 220 Recent projects 83
Pressure coefficient 284, 330 Recovery 79
Pressure difference 327 Rectangle 628, 632, 652
Pressure side 483 Redesign 53
Pre-swirl 108 Redo 87
Preview 72 Reference 204
Primary side 67 References 681, 696
Print 94, 261, 274 REFPROP 239
prism_params 181 Register 20
Pro/ENGINEER 157 Relative flow 453, 552
problems 588 Remote 20
Profile 533, 574 Remove 633
Profile distance 538, 548 Remove design steps 91
Profile selection 562 Report 253, 274
Progression 96, 221, 650, 659 Reprise 26
Progression diagram 256 Request 22
Progressions diagrams 423 Request Generator 26
Project information 106 Required driving power 284, 330
Project Page 696 Resolution 261
Project structure 43 Reverse engineering 50, 53
Project types 43 Reynolds number 514
Projection 587 RLM 26
Properties 72 Rotation direction 108
PTC 157 Rotational speed 347, 366
Pump 10 Rotor power 347, 366
Rotor-Stator-Interface 67
-R- RSI 588
RSI connection 580, 582, 588, 617, 677
r = const. 439 RTZT 51
r = constant 427 Ruled surface blade 471
Radial 652 Runner 386, 402

Speed coefficient 327

-S- Spline 652
Splitter 281, 471, 646
Sample projects 83 Splitter baldes 603
Save 94, 105, 261, 274 Squirrel cage 281
Save as 105 Stack 577
scFLOW 176 Stage 104
Search 93 Stagger angle 567, 570, 572, 574
Secondary flow path 449 Stagnation point 483
Secondary side 67 Stanitz & Prian 522, 532
Section progression 652 Stanitz-Radius 524
Send bug report 76 Start 83, 127
Send E-mail 22 Start angle 652
Settings 119, 124, 127, 588, 678 Start date 22
Setup 19, 388, 403 Static moment 423, 427, 431
Shaded 268 Stator type 603
Shaft diameter 291, 318, 337, 418 Status bar 94
Shaft/ hub diameter 356, 380 STEP 53, 138
Sharp 661, 670 Stepanoff 641
Shroud 423, 427, 429, 431, 606, 626 STL 136, 138
Shroud angle 284 Straight 431, 439
Shroud diameter 356, 380 Straight line 427, 435
SI units 215 Stream function 441, 528
Side position 665 Stress 418
Silent 19 Stress.cftst 291, 318, 337, 418
Simcenter STAR-CCM+ 176 Strictly external 628
Simerics 176, 189 Strike velocity 514, 521
Simple 541, 661, 665 Subsonic 609
Simple blade shape 510 Suction diameter 291, 318, 337
Simple method 562 Suction side 483
SimScale 176 Suction specific speed 219, 284, 309
Single-flow 347, 366 Supersonic 609
Single-intake 327 Surge 119
Single-stage 327, 347, 366 Sweep correction 567, 577
Slip 459, 485 Swirl 483, 532
Slip velocity 489, 490, 492 Swirl number 347, 366
Snapping 445 Symbols 685
solid 268, 272 Symmetric 628
SOLIDWORKS 138
Sollidity 567, 570, 572, 574 -T-
SpaceClaim 138, 142, 146
Spans 476 Tangential 438, 495, 652
Specific diameter 418, 419 Tangential connection 431
Specific energy 327 TCAE 198
Specific speed 217, 327, 347, 366, 418, 419 TCFD 176, 198
Specific work 347, 366 Test 226

Tetrahedral volume mesh 137 Views 85

Thickness 533, 644 Virtual geometry 132
tin 181 Virtual Machine 25
tinXML 181 Visible 268
Tip 587, 596 Vista TF 176
Tip clearance 603 VM 25
Tip projection to casing 587 VNC 20
Torque 418 Volumetric efficiency 330, 621
Torsional stress 418 Volute geometry 638
Trailing edge 427, 431, 439, 541 Volute type 621
Transmission of energy 485
Transparency 268 -W-
Trapezoid 628, 632
Trimming 590, 596 Wall thickness 673
Turbine 10, 386, 388, 390, 395, 402, 403, 405, 410 Warning 224, 533, 541
TurboGrid 176, 184 Wastewater 281
Type number 327, 347, 366 Website 10
WIESNER 459, 489
-U- Windows 25
Windows Explorer 72
Undo 79, 87, 125 Wireframe 268
Uniform 541 Workbench 183
Uninstall 19 Wrap angle 638
Uninstallation 19
Units 214 -Z-
Unshrouded 281, 301, 587, 603
Unwinded length 541 z = const. 439
Update 250 z = constant 427
Update messages 87 Zoom 94, 261
Updates 210 ZW3D 138
US units 215
User defined 533

-V-
Value input 93
Variable load 559
Variables 115
Velocity 532
Velocity components 453
Velocity distribution on blades 522
Velocity triangle 356, 380, 453, 483, 485, 552
Velocity triangles 291, 318, 337, 395, 410
Ventilator 10
Version 106, 127
View 261

Cfturbo 10: User Manual For Cfturbo 10 Software
No ratings yet
Cfturbo 10: User Manual For Cfturbo 10 Software
480 pages
PDF
No ratings yet
PDF
529 pages
CFturbo en
No ratings yet
CFturbo en
690 pages
CFturbo Manual en
No ratings yet
CFturbo Manual en
598 pages
CFturbo en
No ratings yet
CFturbo en
676 pages
Cfturbo PDF
No ratings yet
Cfturbo PDF
560 pages
Driver Manual
No ratings yet
Driver Manual
579 pages
CFturbo en
0% (1)
CFturbo en
372 pages
Turbomachinery Design and Theory - R. S. R. Gorla and A. A. Khan
No ratings yet
Turbomachinery Design and Theory - R. S. R. Gorla and A. A. Khan
179 pages
Installation & Licensing of Cfturbo Software
0% (1)
Installation & Licensing of Cfturbo Software
5 pages
SOM6664411 F, H
100% (1)
SOM6664411 F, H
50 pages
FOLWSERVE
No ratings yet
FOLWSERVE
338 pages
Singer Valve - Made in Canada
No ratings yet
Singer Valve - Made in Canada
250 pages
CFturbo en
No ratings yet
CFturbo en
521 pages
LM-6 SN-44039 Instruction Manual - Part 1 of 2
No ratings yet
LM-6 SN-44039 Instruction Manual - Part 1 of 2
150 pages
SGB 410
No ratings yet
SGB 410
52 pages
Shell Turbo T32
100% (1)
Shell Turbo T32
3 pages
Lecture Planner - Physics - Laksha JEE 2025
100% (1)
Lecture Planner - Physics - Laksha JEE 2025
3 pages
CFturbo en
No ratings yet
CFturbo en
340 pages
Handbook Trade Industry 7thedition
100% (1)
Handbook Trade Industry 7thedition
1,344 pages
CFturbo en
No ratings yet
CFturbo en
184 pages
Deterioration of Compressor Performance Due To Tip Clearance of Centrifugal Impellers
No ratings yet
Deterioration of Compressor Performance Due To Tip Clearance of Centrifugal Impellers
7 pages
Ludeca Thoughts On Dowel Pins in Machine Feet
100% (1)
Ludeca Thoughts On Dowel Pins in Machine Feet
4 pages
Aa 51
No ratings yet
Aa 51
108 pages
Solutions For Reduced Life Cycle Costs of Centrifugal Compressors in Oil and Gas Industry
100% (1)
Solutions For Reduced Life Cycle Costs of Centrifugal Compressors in Oil and Gas Industry
7 pages
Filosofia de Control
No ratings yet
Filosofia de Control
40 pages
C.C.T.V. System Maintenance: Wilton Security Systems LTD P.O. Box 176, Dorking, Surrey, RH5 5DL Tel: 01306 632992
100% (3)
C.C.T.V. System Maintenance: Wilton Security Systems LTD P.O. Box 176, Dorking, Surrey, RH5 5DL Tel: 01306 632992
4 pages
Influence of The Number of Blades of Miniature Centrifugal Impeller On Compressor Performance
No ratings yet
Influence of The Number of Blades of Miniature Centrifugal Impeller On Compressor Performance
6 pages
Iso 20816 2 2017
No ratings yet
Iso 20816 2 2017
12 pages
Ingersoll Rand07 00
100% (1)
Ingersoll Rand07 00
116 pages
Ge28 Instruction Book For Reliq. Compressor
No ratings yet
Ge28 Instruction Book For Reliq. Compressor
198 pages
Transonic Radial Compressor Inlet Design: A Lohmberg
No ratings yet
Transonic Radial Compressor Inlet Design: A Lohmberg
8 pages
t34 04 PDF
No ratings yet
t34 04 PDF
10 pages
Teikoku Canned Motor Pump
No ratings yet
Teikoku Canned Motor Pump
12 pages
Tolerance Chart
No ratings yet
Tolerance Chart
27 pages
Conversion Chart For Hardness
No ratings yet
Conversion Chart For Hardness
5 pages
Thread Data Charts
No ratings yet
Thread Data Charts
4 pages
Turbine Prosedure
No ratings yet
Turbine Prosedure
100 pages
E204 S04 Exr DFT
100% (1)
E204 S04 Exr DFT
8 pages
Encyclopedia of Faith
100% (2)
Encyclopedia of Faith
109 pages
Causes of Rotor Distortions and Applicable Common Straightening Methods For Turbine Rotors and Shafts
No ratings yet
Causes of Rotor Distortions and Applicable Common Straightening Methods For Turbine Rotors and Shafts
6 pages
Emerson CSI - 4500 - System Installation PDF
No ratings yet
Emerson CSI - 4500 - System Installation PDF
242 pages
PMP50 Using This Manual
No ratings yet
PMP50 Using This Manual
5 pages
HP Recoup
No ratings yet
HP Recoup
5 pages
Catalog FPJ Kinsburry PDF
No ratings yet
Catalog FPJ Kinsburry PDF
10 pages
Flexible Coupling Manual
No ratings yet
Flexible Coupling Manual
10 pages
IRM G 8779 CentrifugalBroch Gabarito
100% (1)
IRM G 8779 CentrifugalBroch Gabarito
16 pages
SEAL
No ratings yet
SEAL
6 pages
Break Away Torque For 2 Rotor Gear Shafts
No ratings yet
Break Away Torque For 2 Rotor Gear Shafts
3 pages
Cryostar Corporate
No ratings yet
Cryostar Corporate
16 pages
Shop Balancing of Turbomachinery Rotors by John N: Mechanical Equipment Technologist
No ratings yet
Shop Balancing of Turbomachinery Rotors by John N: Mechanical Equipment Technologist
4 pages
Tilting Pad Bearing
No ratings yet
Tilting Pad Bearing
2 pages
SKF Ball Bearing Dimensions
No ratings yet
SKF Ball Bearing Dimensions
44 pages
CQ Brochure - English A4
No ratings yet
CQ Brochure - English A4
20 pages
Rev.6 MotorView
No ratings yet
Rev.6 MotorView
286 pages
TSGE - TLGE - TTGE - Reduce Moment High Performance Coupling
No ratings yet
TSGE - TLGE - TTGE - Reduce Moment High Performance Coupling
6 pages
DN NDM Factor For Bearings Aricle 3
No ratings yet
DN NDM Factor For Bearings Aricle 3
3 pages
606E
No ratings yet
606E
68 pages
Copy-of-English8 Quarter3 Module3
100% (1)
Copy-of-English8 Quarter3 Module3
18 pages
Lube Select
No ratings yet
Lube Select
7 pages
Recommendations For Stilling Wells For Tank Gauging - Honeywell Enraf
100% (4)
Recommendations For Stilling Wells For Tank Gauging - Honeywell Enraf
12 pages
Viledon HEPA and ULPA Filters - The Patented
No ratings yet
Viledon HEPA and ULPA Filters - The Patented
8 pages
GEA18457A
No ratings yet
GEA18457A
20 pages
Greek (Pythagoras and Plato)
100% (1)
Greek (Pythagoras and Plato)
29 pages
Environment Baseline SURVEY Report For Nghi Son Refinery Petrochemical Complex
No ratings yet
Environment Baseline SURVEY Report For Nghi Son Refinery Petrochemical Complex
159 pages
SERVICE HANDBOOK E-Studio 550-650-810
100% (2)
SERVICE HANDBOOK E-Studio 550-650-810
313 pages
1 - Biomechanics - Gait Analysis
100% (1)
1 - Biomechanics - Gait Analysis
48 pages
Manifolds, Tensors, and Forms: An Introduction For Mathematicians and Physicists
50% (2)
Manifolds, Tensors, and Forms: An Introduction For Mathematicians and Physicists
4 pages
Basic Rules For Using Articles
No ratings yet
Basic Rules For Using Articles
4 pages
She Who Craves The Cruel - Her Own Sweet Way
No ratings yet
She Who Craves The Cruel - Her Own Sweet Way
79 pages
Field-Weakening Control (With MTPA) of PMSM
No ratings yet
Field-Weakening Control (With MTPA) of PMSM
12 pages
Grade 5 Nonrenewable Resources Word Search
No ratings yet
Grade 5 Nonrenewable Resources Word Search
2 pages
Seminar PDF
No ratings yet
Seminar PDF
21 pages
NCERT Solutions For Class 9 Chapter 9 Parallelograms and Triangles Exercise 9 3
No ratings yet
NCERT Solutions For Class 9 Chapter 9 Parallelograms and Triangles Exercise 9 3
14 pages
Industrial Waste Treatment, Volume I
No ratings yet
Industrial Waste Treatment, Volume I
4 pages
OL Science English (2021) Paper 02
No ratings yet
OL Science English (2021) Paper 02
17 pages
India Coastal Features
No ratings yet
India Coastal Features
28 pages
Subsea Well Control Brochure
No ratings yet
Subsea Well Control Brochure
8 pages
Datasheet Norsat LNA Ku Band 4000 Series
No ratings yet
Datasheet Norsat LNA Ku Band 4000 Series
1 page
8310 8311 8312 Kkat Eng 13
No ratings yet
8310 8311 8312 Kkat Eng 13
4 pages
Comparator
No ratings yet
Comparator
11 pages
RIRN100826
No ratings yet
RIRN100826
44 pages
Effect of Added Sodium Sulphate On Colour Strength and Dye Fixation of Digital Printed Cellulosic Fabrics
No ratings yet
Effect of Added Sodium Sulphate On Colour Strength and Dye Fixation of Digital Printed Cellulosic Fabrics
21 pages
M2700/M2701 Series Specification For 5.0X7.0Mm Cmos SMT Oscillator
No ratings yet
M2700/M2701 Series Specification For 5.0X7.0Mm Cmos SMT Oscillator
5 pages
Advanced Car Hire Price List
No ratings yet
Advanced Car Hire Price List
5 pages
CIS2203 Solution Practice
No ratings yet
CIS2203 Solution Practice
5 pages
M109 - TMA - Summer 2022
No ratings yet
M109 - TMA - Summer 2022
6 pages
Modelo Atômico de Theodoro Augusto Ramos
No ratings yet
Modelo Atômico de Theodoro Augusto Ramos
2 pages
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
From Everand
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
Çağatay Şanlı
5/5 (1)
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
From Everand
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
Matthew C. Smith
1/5 (1)